49720D DS7240-DS7220 Ref Guide PDF

Reference Guide for the DS7240/DS7220
Control/Communicators
Armed Armed Perimeter
Status Status Supervisory

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power Power Bell Silenced
Fire Fire Trouble 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TEST WEEKLY TEST WEEKLY
On On
1 2 3 Off 1 2 3 Off
Perimeter Perimeter
4 5 6 Only 4 5 6 Only
No No
7 8 9 Entry 7 8 9 Entry
* 0 # Bypass
* 0 # Bypass
System System
Reset Reset
Keypad Quick Reference Guide

Arming Your System Using the DS7445i or DS7447i Function Key Sequences for Other System Features
Turn the System All On: [On] key or [#] + [1] View Faulted Zones: [#] + [0]
Turn the System Perimeter Only On: [Perimeter Only] or [#] + [2] View Zone Trouble: [#] + [4] + [8]
Turn the System Partial On: [#] + [3] Check System Status: [#] + [4]
Bypassing Zones: Press [Bypass] View System Trouble: [#] + [4] + [2]
Extend Auto On Time: [#] + [5] + [1] View Alarm Memory: [#] + [4] + [0]
Set Partial On Zones: [#] + [6] + [5] View Log: [#] + [8] + [5]
System Test: [#] + [4] + [1]
Walk Test: [#] + [4] + [4]
Change Skeds: [#] + [5] + [2]
Keypad Adjust: [#] + [4] + [9]
Turn Chime On/Off: [#] + [6] + [1]
Select Chime Tone: [#] + [6] + [2]
Select Chime Zones: [#] + [6] + [3]
Set Date and Time: [#] + [4] + [5]
Remote Program: [#] + [4] + [3]
Reset the System: Press [System Reset]
Turning Off (Disarming) Your System
To turn off (disarm) your system, enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN).
For additional information on operating this system, consult the DS7240/DS7220 Users Guide (P/N: 49211).
15.0 Power Supply ....................................................... 46
Contents 15.1 Primary Power .................................................. 46
Part I: DS7240/DS7220 Quick Start........................................5 15.2 Secondary Power ............................................. 46
1.0 Introduction.................................................................5 15.3 System Status LED........................................... 46
2.0 Installation Quick Start................................................6 15.4 External Power Supply ..................................... 46
2.1 Mounting the Enclosure ..........................................6 16.0 Power Outputs...................................................... 46
2.2 Installing the Control/Communicator.......................6 16.1 Circuit Suppression........................................... 46
3.0 Enter Installer Mode .................................................10 16.2 Available Power ................................................ 46
4.0 How to Program........................................................11 16.3 Continuous Power Output................................. 47
4.1 Programming Mode ..............................................11 16.4 Alarm Power ..................................................... 47
4.2 Programming Tables.............................................12 16.5 Output Wiring .................................................... 47
5.0 Programming Quick Start .........................................13 17.0 Telephone............................................................. 48
5.1 Routing Destination, Phone and RPS 17.1 Connections ...................................................... 48
Configurations..................................................................13 17.2 Registration....................................................... 48
5.2 Area Configurations ..............................................14 17.3 Notification ........................................................ 48
5.3 PIN and User Configuration ..................................16 17.4 Dialing Format................................................... 48
5.4 User Configuration ................................................17 17.5 Phone Line Fault............................................... 48
5.5 Keypad Configuration ...........................................19 17.6 Called Party Disconnect ................................... 48
5.6 ABC Key and Duress Configuration .....................21 17.7 Communication Failure (Comm Fail) ................ 48
5.7 Location Configuration ..........................................24 17.8 Ground Start ..................................................... 49
5.8 Zone Function Configuration ................................29 Part III: Panel Wiring and Setup .......................................... 50
5.9 Output Configuration.............................................30 18.0 Control Terminal Wiring........................................ 50
5.10 Sked Configuration............................................36 19.0 On-board Sensor Loops ....................................... 52
5.11 Premises RF Receiver Configuration................38 19.1 Description ........................................................ 52
5.12 Data (Option) Bus Device Configuration ...........39 19.2 Two-wire Smoke Detector Configuration .......... 52
5.13 Miscellaneous System Trouble Options............39 19.3 Four-wire Smoke Detector Configuration ......... 53
5.14 Text Entry Parameters ......................................39 19.4 Sensor Loop 1 Configuration ............................ 53
6.0 Test the System........................................................40 19.5 Single Zone Configuration (Loops 2-8)............. 53
Part II: Introduction...............................................................41 19.6 Doubled Zone Configuration............................. 54
7.0 Specifications ...........................................................41 19.7 On-board Loop Response Time ....................... 54
7.1 Enclosure Housing................................................41 20.0 Off-board Sensor Loops ....................................... 54
7.2 Environmental Specifications................................41 20.1 DX2010 Input Expander ................................... 54
7.3 Voltage Input.........................................................41 21.0 On-board Outputs................................................. 58
7.4 Power Outputs ......................................................41 22.0 Off-board Outputs................................................. 59
7.5 Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule.................41 22.1 Overview ........................................................... 59
7.6 Minimum Operating Voltage .................................41 22.2 DX3010 Octo-Output Expander........................ 59
7.7 Data (Option) Bus .................................................41 23.0 Arming Devices .................................................... 62
7.8 Telephone Connections ........................................41 23.1 Overview ........................................................... 62
7.9 Keypads ................................................................41 23.2 Keypads ............................................................ 62
7.10 Compatible Enclosures .....................................41 23.3 Keyswitch.......................................................... 63
8.0 Standard Features....................................................41 24.0 Data (Option) Bus Devices................................... 63
8.1 Panel Features......................................................41 24.1 Overview ........................................................... 63
8.2 Communicator.......................................................42 24.2 DX4010 RS-232 Serial Interface Module.......... 64
8.3 Zones ....................................................................42 25.0 Installers Keypad and Installer Mode .................. 67
8.4 Areas (Partitions) and Accounts ...........................42 25.1 Installers Keypad ............................................. 67
8.5 Programmable Outputs (PO) ................................42 25.2 Entering the Installer Mode............................... 67
8.6 Users.....................................................................42 25.3 Installer Menu ................................................... 67
8.7 Keypads ................................................................42 Part IV: Panel Programming ................................................ 71
8.8 Keyswitch..............................................................42 26.0 Panel Programming Parameters .......................... 71
8.9 Alarm Event Memory ............................................42 26.1 Routing Destinations......................................... 71
8.10 History Log ........................................................42 26.2 Phone, Auto-Forward and RPS Configuration.. 73
8.11 EMI/Lightning Transient Suppression ...............42 26.3 Global Reporting Options ................................. 77
8.12 Programming.....................................................43 26.4 Tests ................................................................. 83
9.0 SIA Control Panel Standard .....................................43 26.5 Programming Options ....................................... 88
10.0 Other Features......................................................43 26.6 Global Open/Close Options .............................. 90
11.0 Control/Communicator Assembly .........................43 26.7 Areas................................................................. 95
12.0 Listings and Approvals..........................................43 26.8 Authority Level Configuration............................ 97
13.0 System Options.....................................................44 26.9 PIN Configuration, Installer PIN...................... 105
14.0 Standby Battery Requirements .............................45 26.10 Users............................................................... 107
14.1 Standby Battery Calculation ..............................45 26.11 Keypads .......................................................... 110
14.2 Standby Battery Requirements .........................45 26.12 ABC Keys and Duress Parameters ................ 112
14.3 Standby Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm 26.13 Locations......................................................... 115
Applications ...........................................................45 26.14 Zone Function Configuration .......................... 121
26.15 Global Zone Configuration.............................. 131
26.16 Global Output Configuration ........................... 135
26.17 Outputs ........................................................... 137
26.18 Skeds .............................................................. 144
Page 2 P/N: 49720D Copyright 2004 Detection Systems, Inc. DS7220/DS7240 Reference Guide
26.19 Data (Option) Bus Device Configuration .........147 Figure 31: DX2010 Auxiliary Output Connections.................. 56
26.20 Miscellaneous System Trouble Options..........150 Figure 32: DX2010 Tamper Input Wiring................................ 56
26.21 Text Entry Parameters ....................................151 Figure 33: DX2010 Wire Jumper ............................................ 56
26.22 RF Keypads.....................................................154 Figure 34: DX2010 Single Loop Configuration....................... 57
26.23 RF Keyfobs......................................................155 Figure 35: DX2010 Doubled Loop Configuration ................... 57
26.24 Factory Default ................................................156 Figure 36: DX2010 DIP Switch Configuration ........................ 57
Part V: Reference Materials ...............................................157 Figure 37: DX2010 Status LED Location ............................... 58
27.0 Installation Label .................................................157 Figure 38: PO 1 Wiring ........................................................... 58
27.1 DS7240 ...........................................................157 Figure 39: PO 2 - PO 4 Wiring ............................................... 59
27.2 DS7220 ...........................................................158 Figure 41: Installing the DX3010 in Panel Enclosure ............. 60
28.0 Troubleshooting ..................................................159 Figure 42: Installing the DX3010 in D203 Enclosure.............. 60
28.1 Introduction......................................................159 Figure 43: Wiring the DX3010 to the Panel............................ 61
28.2 Arming Issues..................................................159 Figure 44: DX3010 External Power Supply Connections....... 61
28.3 Zone Issues.....................................................159 Figure 45: DX3010 DIP Switch Configuration ........................ 61
28.4 Programming Issues .......................................159 Figure 46: Jumper Plug Configuration.................................... 62
28.5 Keypad Issues.................................................160 Figure 48: Wiring a Keypad to the Panel................................ 62
28.6 Miscellaneous Issues ......................................160 Figure 49: Keypad External Power Supply Connections........ 63
29.0 Approved Application Compliance Guide ...........161 Figure 51: Keyswitches .......................................................... 63
29.1 Listings and Approvals ....................................161 Figure 52: Data Bus Device Wiring ........................................ 64
29.2 Introduction......................................................161 Figure 54: External Power for Data Bus Devices ................... 64
29.3 Optional Compatible Equipment .....................161 Figure 55: DX4010 PCB ......................................................... 64
30.0 Call for Service Details........................................162 Figure 56: Wiring the DX4010 to the Panel............................ 65
30.1 System Chart...................................................163 Figure 57: DX4010 External Power Supply Connections....... 65
31.0 Data (Option) Bus Address Quick Reference .....164 Figure 59: Direct Connect DIP Switch Setting........................ 65
32.0 Reserved Programming Addresses ....................164 Figure 60: Remote Programming Direct Connection ............. 65
33.0 Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables ....164 Figure 61: DX4010 P2 Jumper Pin Settings........................... 66
33.1 Comm Fail Event.............................................164 Figure 62: DX4010 P3 Jumper Pin Settings........................... 66
33.2 Routing Option Tables.....................................165 Figure 63: RS-232 Device DIP Switch Setting ....................... 66
34.0 Panel Events and Reporting Formats.................167 Figure 64: DX4010 DB9 Connector Layout............................ 66
34.1 Introduction......................................................167 Figure 65: Installers Keypad Connections............................. 67
34.2 Panel Events and Reporting Formats .............167 Figure 66: Installer Switch ...................................................... 67
35.0 Basic Pager Format ............................................177 Figure 67: Adding RF ID Codes Menu Display ...................... 68
35.1 Configuring the Panel......................................177 Figure 68: RF ID Code Display .............................................. 68
35.2 Configuring a Pager Display ...........................177 Figure 69: Test RF Devices Display ....................................... 69
36.0 History Log..........................................................180 Figure 70: RF Device Test Status Display ............................. 69
37.0 Glossary..............................................................181 Figure 71: RF ID Code Entry Display ..................................... 69
Figure 72: PK32 to Panel Connections .................................. 70
Figures Figure 73: Routing Destinations ............................................. 71
Figure 1: Basic Panel Wiring Connections ...............................5 Figure 74: DS7240 Installation Label ................................... 157
Figure 2: Enclosure Mounting ...................................................6 Figure 75: DS7220 Installation Label ................................... 158
Figure 3: Mounting the PCB......................................................7 Figure 76: History Log Display ............................................. 180
Figure 4: Installer Switch...........................................................7
Figure 5: Battery Connections ..................................................7
Figure 6: RJ31X Wiring.............................................................9
Figure 7: RJ38X Wiring.............................................................9
Figure 8: Panel Reset Display ..................................................9
Figure 9: System Status LED..................................................10
Figure 10: Installer Switch.......................................................10
Figure 11: Initial Programming Display ...................................11
Figure 12: Selecting an Address.............................................11
Figure 13: Editing Data Digits .................................................11
Figure 14: Reset Display Screen ............................................11
Figure 15: Sample Programming Entry...................................12
Figure 16: On-board Outputs PO 1 PO 4 ............................47
Figure 17: PO 1 Ground Start Connections ............................49
Figure 19: DS7240/DS7220 Control Terminal Connections ...50
Figure 20: Enclosure Wire Routing .........................................52
Figure 21: Typical 2-wire Smoke Detector Wiring ..................52
Figure 22: Typical 4-wire Smoke Detector Wiring ..................53
Figure 23: Sensor Loop 1 Wiring ............................................53
Figure 24: Single Zone Sensor Loop Wiring ...........................53
Figure 25: On-board Doubled Zone Sensor Loop Wiring .......54
Figure 26: Installing the DX2010 in D203 Enclosure ..............54
Figure 27: Installing the DX2010 in Panel Enclosure .............55
Figure 28: Optional DX2010 Enclosure Mounting Locations ..55
Figure 29: Wiring the DX2010 to the Panel ............................55
Figure 30: DX2010 External Power Supply Connections .......56
DS7220/DS7240 Reference Guide Copyright 2004 Detection Systems, Inc. P/N: 49720D Page 3
Tables
Table 1: System Status LED Operation ..................................10
Table 2: Key/Character Assignments .....................................11
Table 3: Option Parameter Table Example ............................12
Table 4: User Configuration Addresses ..................................17
Table 5: Authority Level Configuration Functions ...................18
Table 7: Keypad Data Bus Addresses ....................................19
Table 8: DS7240/DS7220 Location Config Parameters .........24
Table 9: Location Configuration Parameters, DS7240 only....25
Table 10: Zone Function Type Default Settings .....................29
Table 12: DS7240/DS7220 Output Config Parameters ..........30
Table 13: Output Configuration Parameters, DS7240 only ....30
Table 14: Output Function Types............................................31
Table 16: Output Mode Descriptions ......................................34
Table 17: Pulse Mode Configuration.......................................35
Table 18: One Shot Mode Configuration ................................35
Table 19: Sked Configuration Parameters..............................36
Table 20: Key/Character Assignments ...................................39
Table 21: Panel Feature Comparison .....................................41
Table 22: Standby Battery Calculation Table .........................45
Table 23: Quick Reference Terminal Descriptions .................51
Table 24: EOL States..............................................................53
Table 25: DX2010 Address 106..............................................57
Table 26: DX2010 Address 107 (DS7240 only)......................57
Table 27: DX2010 Address Settings.......................................57
Table 28: DX2010 DIP Switch Setting ....................................57
Table 29: DX3010 Wire Lengths.............................................60
Table 30: DX3010 Addresses .................................................61
Table 31: DX3010 Address DIP Switch Settings ....................61
Table 32: Keypad Address Pin Settings .................................62
Table 33: Keypad Wire Lengths..............................................62
Table 34: DX4010 Diagnostic LED Functions ........................66
Table 35: DX4010 DB9 Pin Configuration ..............................66
Table 36: Alternate Communication Selections......................72
Table 34: Authority Level Configuration Functions .................97
Table 35: Keypad Data Bus Addresses ................................110
Table 36: DS7446i Keypad LED Functions ..........................111
Table 37: Device Parameter Settings, DS7240/DS7220 ......116
Table 38: Device Parameter Settings, DS7240 only ............117
Table 39: Zone Function Type Options ................................122
Table 41: EOL Resistor Location Pairing..............................131
Table 45: Output Function Types..........................................138
Table 43: Output Mode Options............................................141
Table 44: Pulse Mode Configuration.....................................143
Table 45: One Shot Mode Configuration ..............................143
Table 46: Key/Character Assignments .................................151
Table 47: RF Keypad Data Bus Addresses ..........................154
Table 48: Call for Service Details..........................................162
Table 49: System Chart ........................................................163
Table 50: Option Bus Address Quick Reference ..................164
Table 51: Panel Events and Reporting Formats...................167
Table 52: Phone Number Selections ....................................179
Table 54: History Log Display Descriptions ..........................180
Part I: DS7240/DS7220 Quick Start
1.0 Introduction
This section provides you with the essential instructions to set up the DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicators.
Refer to the DS7240/DS7220 SIA Quick Start Guide (P/N: 49723).
Do not connect to a receptacle
controlled by a switch. Do not share
IMPORTANT
with other equipment.
Auxilliary Powered Devices 11.5 to 12.4 VDC. Installer Switch Auxiliary Connector
With 7.0Ah battery, Disables arming, reports Connection pins for
Use a CX4010 UL Listed 120mA for 24 hrs for Fire and Combined Fire/Burglary, and relays. Close for local
programming PK32 Programming
Class 2 Transformer. 18 400mA for 4 hrs for UL Burglary. Key.
VAC 22 VA 60 Hz. 600mA for other* JP1
Include keypads in calculations.
Earth Ground AUXILIARY
Installer
Data (Green)
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Data (Yellow) The Power Supply provides a maximum of 600 mA for the Control Panel
and All Accessory Devices. For System loading, see Standby Battery Calculation in
Reference Guide P/N: 49720. Requirements for battery standby time may reduce allowable output.
Black (Aux Pwr -) CAUTION: See Reference Guide for power requirements relating to terminals [Alrm+] and [+Aux].
Red (Aux Pwr +)
Keypads, expanders, Alternate Communications Connector R Red (R)
printer modules & Connector for alternate communications
communication modules source. Available for future release.
R1 Gray (R1)
(up to 19 total devices)
Note 1: A supervisory alarm output module must be used on these
terminals for household fire applications. T1 Brown (T1)
Premises
Note 2: Jumper JP2-PO1 must be in place for connection to NAC Phone
R Installers Keypad or other powered alarm devices. T Green (T)
Y Connector
G Close Installer Switch PO1 Terminals can be configured as an alarm
B to program panel. power output. JP2-PO1 Jumper must be closed.
Incoming
Phone
Line
Alrm PO1 + -
+ A B L-1 Com L-2 L-3 Com L-4 L-5 Com L-6 L-7 Com L-8
+ 1 - 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Outputs PO3 &
Max. charging current is 1.1 A. PO4 can sink up to
BATTERY: Replace every 3 to 500 mA 12 VDC.
5 years with a sealed lead acid
battery such as model P334 (12
V, 7 Ah, 6 cells). For additional
power, see standby battery
calculation table. Output PO2 can be used with Powered sensor loop suitable for
Alrm + as a supervised siren 2-wire smoke detectors. 2.2 k Supervised Loops (L2-L8)
Recommended Battery driver. Connect an approved EOL P/N EOL resistor required at End of Line. Open: 7.7 to 14.0 VDC
Manufacturers:
POWER SONIC: PS-1270, PS-12180
4 or 8 siren. Alternatively, 25899 For compatible detectors, see Normal: 6.3 to 7.3 VDC
YUASA: NP7-12, NPG18-12 PO2 can sink up to 500 mA Technical Service Note P/N: 49722. Short: 0.0 to 6.0 VDC
12 VDC. UL Panel Compatibility Identifier =
B. Also available for 4-wire smoke 2.2 k resistor (P/N: 47819)
Battery Capacity:
Minimum: 5.0 Ah Required at End of Line for
Maximum: 18.0 Ah Use compatible NAC such as Wheelock MB-G6-12-R. detectors such as Detection
Systems DS284TH. default configuration.
400 mA for Fire & Combined Fire/Burglary; 1500 mA for
UL Burglary; 1850 mA for other (not investigated by UL).
Applies to all 4 outputs combined.
Figure 1: Basic Panel Wiring Connections
PART I: DS7240/DS7220 QUICK START
2.0 Installation Quick Start 2.2 Installing the Control/Communicator
The DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicator and the The PCB contains static-sensitive
enclosure are shipped together. Hardware for components and must be handled with
mounting the control/communicator to the enclosure care. Follow anti-static procedures when
is included in a hardware pack. Hardware to mount handling it.
the enclosure is not supplied.
2.1 Mounting the Enclosure 2.2.1 Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)
1. Knock out the desired wire entrances on the
enclosure.
EMI may occur if you install the system or
2. Use the enclosure as a template and mark the
run system wires near any of the following:
top mounting holes on the mounting surface.
3. Pre-start the mounting screws (not supplied) for
these holes. Computer network system
4. Slide the enclosure onto these screws. See Electrical lines, fluorescent fixtures or telephone
Figure 2. lines
Top Mounting Holes
Ham radio transmitter site
Heavy machinery and motors
High voltage electrical equipment or transformers
PBX telephone system
Public service (police, fire, etc.) using radio
communications
Radio station transmitter site or other broadcast
Slide Mounting Screws into
station equipment
Welding shop
Upper Portion of Mounting Hole
If you think that EMI may be a problem, use shielded

cable. The drain wire for the shielded cable must have
continuity from the earth ground terminal on the panel
to the end of the wire run. If continuity is not
maintained, the shielded cable may aggravate
potential noise problems rather than eliminate them.
Connecting the drain wire to ground at any place
other than the earth ground terminal may also
produce problems. If you cut the drain wire to install
devices, be certain to splice it together. Carefully
Bottom Mounting Holes
solder and tape all splices.
Figure 2: Enclosure Mounting
5. Tighten the screws.
6. Screw in the remaining two screws into the
bottom mounting holes. See Figure 2.
2.2.2 Mounting the PCB 2.2.4 Close the Installer Switch
1. Place the PCB mounting clips on the appropriate Closing the Installer Switch disables the panel (see
standoffs in the enclosure. See Figure 3. Figure 4). System reporting is disabled and the
system cannot be armed. A system trouble shows at
Install PCB support standoffs
(P/N: 30503B) here) DS7240 PCB Location Mounting Slots all keypads.
Opening the Installer Switch from the closed position
resets the panel. The panel resets all its timers,
counters, indexes and buffers. Any zones that restore
after a reset is performed do not generate restoral
reports.
Leaving the Installer Switch in the closed position
TERMINALS allows you to power up the panel and charge the
battery as you install the detection devices and
keypads.
Installer Switch
Normal (Open)
JP1
AUXILIARY
Installer Switch
Installer Locked (Closed)
Figure 4: Installer Switch

2.2.5 Install the Backup Battery
1. Place the battery upright in the base of the
enclosure.
Corner of 2. Locate the supplied red and black leads.
DS7240 PCB
Mounting Enclosure
Clip Standoff 3. Push one connector on the black battery lead to
the panels Batt connector. Then push the
leads other connector on the negative (-) side of
the battery. See Figure 5 for details.
= 4. Push one connector on the red battery lead to the
panels Batt + connector. Then push the leads
Mounting Clip Assembly other connector on the positive (+) side of the
battery. See Figure 5 for details.
Black (-)
Red (+)
R
Figure 3: Mounting the PCB Y
G
2. Slide the PCB into the slots at the top of the B
enclosure and then secure it with the two screws
provided. See Figure 3.
3. Connect earth ground to the panel before making Backup Battery
any other connections. See Connect the Earth
DS7240/DS7220 PCB
Ground for more information.
2.2.3 Connect the Earth Ground Figure 5: Battery Connections
To help prevent damage from electrostatic charges or High current arcs are possible. The
other transient electrical surges, connect the system positive (red) battery lead and the panels
to earth ground before making any other connections. Batt + connector can create high current
Recommended earth ground references include a arcs if shorted to terminals or enclosure.
grounding rod or cold water pipe. Use caution when working with the
Do not use telephone or electrical ground for the positive lead and the panels Batt +.
earth ground connection. Use #14-16 AWG (1.8 to Always disconnect the positive (red) lead
1.5 mm) wire when making the connection. Use only from the battery before removing it from
the earth ground terminal. Do not connect any other the panel.
panel terminals to earth ground.
Detection Systems, Inc. recommends 2.2.7 Charge the Battery
battery replacement every 3 to 5 years Once the battery and the transformer connections are
under normal use. Exceeding the made, the panel charges the battery while you finish
maximum output ratings, or installing the the installation. See Power Supply on page 46 for
transformer in an outlet that is routinely instructions.
switched off, causes heavy discharges.
Self Diagnostics at Power Up and Reset: The
Routine heavy discharges can lead to
system performs a series of self diagnostic tests of
premature battery failure. Record the date
its hardware, software, and program at power up
of installation directly on the battery.
and at reset. They take about 60 seconds to
complete. LCD keypads may display a blank screen
2.2.6 Install the Transformer
and sound during the power up and reset interval. If
the panel fails any of the tests, a system trouble
Do not short the transformer terminals.
message appears at the keypads.
Shorting these terminals for prolonged
periods of time may cause permanent Touch the Earth Ground Terminal first: To
damage. Connect the transformer to the discharge any static charge you may be carrying,
panel terminals before plugging it into the always touch the panels earth ground terminal
power source. before beginning work on the panel.
2.2.8 Install and Wire Detection Devices
Detection Systems, Inc. recommends that
Install and wire detection devices and keypads at their
you always connect the battery first and
locations throughout the premises. Do not make the
then connect the transformer.
connections at the panel end of the wiring yet.
See On-board Sensor Loops on page 52 for
1. Use #18 AWG (1.2 mm) (minimum) wire to
instructions on wiring the on-board zone locations to
connect the transformer to the panel. Wire length
detection devices. See Arming Devices on page 62
should be kept as short as possible. Maximum
for instructions on wiring the keypads.
length is 50 ft. (15.2 m).
Instructions for wiring the off-board zone locations are
2. AC wiring can induce both noise and low level found in the instructions packaged with the zone
voltage into adjacent wiring. Route phone and expansion devices.
sensor loop wiring away from any AC conductors,
including the transformer wire. Route data wiring 2.2.9 Install Modules
away from AC and phone wiring. 1. Power Down First: Power down the system by
3. Only connect the transformer into an unswitched, unplugging the transformer and disconnecting the
120 VAC, 60 Hz power outlet. Secure the battery. Detection Systems recommends that you
transformer to the outlet with the screw provided. power down the system when installing modules,
or when making wiring connections to the panel.
2. Install and wire any modules required for your
installation as described in the modules
installation instructions.
Pages 54, 59, and 64 cover the installation of the
DX2010, DX3010 and DX4010 respectively.
2.2.10 Connect the Telephone 4. Connect the flying leads of a telephone cord to
If you are connecting to a ground-start phone system, the telephone terminals labeled R, R1, T1, T. The
use PO 1 as shown in Ground Start on page 49. terminals are located on the right side of the
panel. Connect the other end of the cord to the
The System Status LED shows phone status by RJ31X jack or RJ38X jack.
turning on solid when the panel seizes the phone line
for use. See "System Status LED on 10 for complete 2.2.11 Power Up
function description. Leave the Installer Switch in the CLOSED position for
See Telephone on page 48 for more information. now (see Figure 4). The following sequence of events
occurs:
1. To prevent jamming of signals, wire the RJ31X
jack or RJ38X jack to support line seizure as 1. Apply power.
shown in Figure 6 and Figure 7. 2. All keypads will emit a single beep. LCD keypads
2. Install the jack on the street side of the phone may display a blank screen for approximately 10
switch, wired ahead of any PBX equipment. Line seconds.
seizure temporarily interrupts normal phone 3. A screen showing the panel model number
usage while the communicator transmits data. (DS7240 or DS7220), firmware revision number
3. Confirm that the panel seizes the line, acquires and a Please Wait... message appears for
dial tone, reports correctly to the receiver, and approximately 10 seconds.
releases the phone line to the in-house phone DS7240 Rev X.XX
system. Please Wait...
Outside Telco
(PSTN) Figure 8: Panel Reset Display
4. Trouble! Press # 4 to View appears. Press [#] +
R1 [4] key.
T T1
5. A new message appears: Date/Time lost! Press
R Premises 5 to set. Press the [5] key.
Telephone
6. Enter a valid user PIN when prompted (use the
RJ31X Jack default User 1 PIN 1234 for first-time power-
Bar Short removed on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
up).
Telco Connector Block
insertion - positions 7. Enter the current date and time when prompted.
1&4 and 5&8.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Telco Connector Block To reduce the occurrence of false alarms upon panel
power-up (or restoration of power after a complete
R1 R T T1 loss of primary and secondary power), the panel
ignores all zone faults for approximately 60 seconds
while the devices stabilize. This process is part of the
To Control Panel panels start-up process, and it occurs at power-up.
RJ31X Jack Connections This 60-second period begins when the Please
Wait... screen appears.
Figure 6: RJ31X Wiring The Trouble! Press # 4 to View message reappears,
indicating that the Installer Switch is closed. To return
Outside Telco the system to normal (disarmed, no fault/trouble
(PSTN)
Strap conditions), open the Installer Switch (unless you are
ready to program the panel).
R1
T T1
R Premises
Telephone
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RJ38X Jack
Bar Short removed on
insertion - positions
1&4 and 5&8.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R1 R T T1
To Control Panel
RJ38X Jack Connections
Figure 7: RJ38X Wiring
2.2.12 System Status LED 3.0 Enter Installer Mode
The System Status LED shows system status,
including power supply status as described below. If the panel is armed, you can only enter
Figure 9 shows the location of the LED on the panel. the keypad programming mode using an
Installers Keypad. See page 67 for
System Status LED Installers Keypad information.
This section covers the basic steps to access the
Installer Mode and Keypad Programming Mode.
1. Close the Installer Switch. See Figure 10.
Com L-2 L-3 Installer Switch

Normal (Open)
JP1
Figure 9: System Status LED AUXILIARY

Installer Switch
Installer Locked (Closed)
System Status LED Operation

System Normal On for 50 ms, off for 1 sec.
Battery Missing Off for 200 ms, on for 1 sec.
AC Missing Off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms,
off for 200 ms, on for 1 sec. Figure 10: Installer Switch
Phone Ringing Flickers for 1 sec. As each ring An Installers Keypad automatically
is detected. skips Steps 2 and 3. See page 67 for
Phone Line Seized (panel On solid. Installers Keypad information.
using phone line)
Shut Down (system voltage Off for 200 ms, on for 200 ms, 2. Enter the Installer Personal Identification
below 10.2 VDC) off 200 ms, on 200 ms, off 200 Number (PIN).
ms, on for 1 sec. The default Installer PIN is 9876. When
entered, the display shows Code Accepted!
Table 1: System Status LED Operation
Default PIN length is 4 digits (range between 3
2.2.13 Program the DS7240/DS7220 and 7 digits).
The Installer Switch must be in the closed See PIN Configuration, Installer PIN on page
position to program the panel from a 16 to change the default PIN length.
keypad. 3. Enter [#] + [4] + [1]. The system displays the
Installer Menu.
Quick Start programming instructions begin on page 4. Press [8] to enter Keypad Programming Mode.
13. Detailed programming information begins on page The display shows the panels model number
71. (DS7240 or DS7220) and the installed firmware
Check to be certain you have all the required revision for approximately three seconds. It then
accessory modules installed for the features you want shows the following across the top line: Adr:
to use. 0000 D=0.
After you finish programming, move the Installer You are now ready to program the panel.
Switch to the open position (see Figure 4). If it is
programmed for reporting, the panel transmits a
reboot report to the receiver when you move the
Installer Switch to the open position.
2.2.14 Check for Fire Alarm Verification
You must check the Alarm Verification Box in the
lower right corner of the enclosure wiring label if you
programmed Zone 1 for Fire with Verification (see
pages 157 and 158 for samples of enclosure wiring
labels actual label to be marked is pre-installed on
inside of enclosure door).
4.0 How to Program 4.1.5 Incorrect Entries
1. Press the [#] key.
4.1 Programming Mode
2. Re-enter the Address you wish to program.
4.1.1 Viewing Addresses
3. Enter the desired Data Digit value.
There are two parts to every Address displayed
across the keypads top line: 4.1.6 Reserved Addresses
Adr: XXXX: The number following Adr indicates Reserved addresses cannot be accessed and are
the current address displayed. skipped over. Pressing [#] to move forward skips to
D=X: The number following D indicates the data the next available address. Pressing [*] to move
digit selection for the address currently displayed (if back skips back to the previous available address.
no entry has been made, X = the default data digit See page 164 for a list of the reserved addresses.
entry). See Figure 11. 4.1.7 Programming Text Entry Parameters
Current Address Current (Default) All text entry parameters (System Text, Area Text and
Displayed Data Digit Entry Location Text) require the use of a special text-
programming mode. In this mode, the keypad keys
display different characters depending on the number
Adr: 0000 D=0 of times the keys are pressed. See Table 2.
Number of Key Presses for Each Character
Figure 11: Initial Programming Display Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4.1.2 Going Directly to an Address 1 . , ? ! - & < > 1
To view a specific Address, enter the 4-digit Address 2 A B C a b c 2
number and then press [#]. 3 D E F d e f 3
For example, to go to Address 0221, press [0] + [2] + 4 G H I g h i 4
[2] + [1] + [#]. 5 J K L j k l 5
Adr: 0000 D=1 6 M N O m n o 6
0221 7 P Q R S p q r s 7
8 T U V t u v 8
Figure 12: Selecting an Address 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9
4.1.3 Scrolling through Addresses 0 _ @ # $ % * 0
To scroll forward, press [#]. To scroll back, press [*]. * Moves to the Address before the text block.
4.1.4 Editing Data Digits # Moves to the Address after the text block.
1. To change the Data Digit value set for an A Moves cursor to the previous character position in text block.
Address, go to the Address. B No function emits error tone when pressed.
2. Change the entry by entering the new value (0- C Moves cursor to the next character position in text block.
15) followed by the [*] key. For example, to On, Off, Perimeter Only, No Entry, Bypass and System Reset keys all
change the data digit for Address 0221 from 1 to produce an error tone when pressed. Not used in text programming.
0, enter the following sequence: [0] + [*]. The new
Table 2: Key/Character Assignments
value appears on the second line of the display.
See Figure 13 to change the Data Digit value for Press the [0] key once to clear a character space or to
Address 0221 from 1 to 0. enter a blank space.
4.1.8 Exiting Programming Mode
Adr: 0221 D=1 Keypad display before making any changes.
Current Data Digit entry shown. 1. Press and hold the [#] key. The following appears
on the display for approximately 10 seconds:
Adr: 0221 D=1 Press [0] to change Data Digit DS7240 Rev X.XX
0 entry from 1 to 0. Please Wait...
Figure 14: Reset Display Screen
Adr: 0221 D=0 Press [*] to accept new Data Digit entry.
Display updates new entry. 2. Open the Installer Switch to clear the Trouble
message that appears. The display shown in
Figure 13: Editing Data Digits Figure 14 appears again for approximately 10
seconds. The system then returns to normal
(disarmed, no fault/trouble conditions).
4.2 Programming Tables
This Reference Guide uses tables to show the selections for option parameters. See Table 3 for an example.
Default
Enter This Data Digit to Select Options
Call for Service/System Inactive Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options
Call for Service Display at Call for Service Interval
Call for Service Report at Call for Service Interval
Call for Service Display at System Inactive Interval
Enable Weekly Test Reminder
Table 3: Option Parameter Table Example
The first option usually disables or turns off all the other options.
The 16 Data Digit values (labeled 0-15 under Enter This Data Digit to Select Options heading) are displayed across the top
of the table. Each Data Digit value is tied to an option by a . Some Data Digits are tied to more than one option. To select an
option, enter the corresponding Data Digit value at the Address programming prompt.
A shaded column (or row) with white text identifies the default assignment for a parameter (see Table 3). If the shaded option
is the one you want, then you do not need to reprogram this option.
Any shaded column (or row) in an option table that is not marked as the default setting is currently not
available as a programming selection.
For example, see Figure 15 to change Address 0231 from No Options (default setting) to Enable Weekly Test Reminder
(see Table 3):
Adr: 0231 D=0 Display for Address 0231.

Data Digit Default of 0 shown.
Adr: 0231 D=0 Press [8] to change Data Digit

8 entry from 0 to 8.
Adr: 0231 D=8 Press [*] to accept new Data Digit entry.
Display updates new entry.
Figure 15: Sample Programming Entry
Numbers enclosed in brackets (for example, [137]) that appear throughout this manual refer to the panels
event numbers. See Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167 for panel event descriptions.
5.0 Programming Quick Start
Complete programming instructions begin on page 71.
Make sure to mark the keypad function checkboxes appropriately in the DS7240/DS7220 Users Guide (P/N:
49211).
5.1 Routing Destination, Phone and RPS Configurations

5.1.1 Phone Numbers for Destinations 1 & 2
Enter up to 32 digits for each Phone Number (2 per Destination) using the following information:
Parameter Address Range Default
Phone 1, Destination 1 0000-0031 All zeros (0)
Digit to be Dialed Enter at the Keypad Digit to be Dialed Enter at the Keypad
1 1 9 9
2 2 0 10
3 3 * 11
4 4 # 12
5 5 P (4-second pause) 13
6 6 F (on-hook, pause, off-hook) 14
7 7 Reserved 15
8 8 T (Terminate) 0
When entering phone numbers, use 10 to enter 0; use 0 to terminate the phone number.
If less than 32 digits are entered, the panel automatically truncates the phone number.
5.1.2 Reporting Format for Destinations 1 & 2
Set the Reporting Format. This setting applies to all reports for Destinations 1 and 2.
Parameter Address
Reporting Format for Destination 1 0064
Default
Reporting Format Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Reserved
Contact ID
SIA 300
Basic Pager
5.1.3 Dialing Format
Select the Dialing Format. This format is used for all dialing attempts.
Parameter Address
Dialing Format 0132
Default
Dialing Format Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DTMF
Pulse
5.1.4 Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number

Set the Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number using the following information:
Remote Programming Call Back Number 0181-0212 All zeros (0)
1 1 9 9
2 2 0 10
3 3 * 11
4 4 # 12
7 7 Reserved 15
8 8 T (Terminate) 0
5.2 Area Configurations

5.2.1 Account Number for Routing Destinations 1 & 2
Set the Account Number for Routing Destinations 1 and 2 for each Area (up to 4) using the following information:
Account # for Routing Account # for Routing Default Account #

Area
Destination 1 Destination 2 (for both Routing Destinations)
1 Address 0276-0281 Address 0286-0291 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
2 Address 0298-0303 Address 0308-0313 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
DS7240 3 Address 0320-0325 Address 0330-0335 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0

only
4 Address 0342-0347 Address 0352-0357 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
Account Number Enter at the Keypad Account Number Enter at the Keypad
1 1 9 9
2 2 0 10
3 3 B 11
4 4 C 12
5 5 D 13
6 6 E 14
7 7 F 15
8 8 T (Terminate) 0
5.2.2 Area # Opening/Closing Reporting Options
Set the Area # Opening/Closing Reporting Options for each Area using the following information:
Area Address
1 0296
2 0318
DS7240 3 0340
only
4 0362
Default
Area # Open/Close Reporting Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Open or Close Reports for Area #
Open/Close Reports (for All On) for Area # Enabled
Restrict Open/Close Reports; Open After Alarm, Close
on Force Arm
Open/Close Reports for Perimeter Only (and Partial On)
Mode Must also select Open/Close Reports (for All On)
1 Second Bell Test on Closing Rpt Acknowledgement
See Area # Opening/Closing Reporting Options on page 96 for more information.
5.2.3 Lock Area # Reporting Options
Set the Lock Area # Reporting Options for each Area using the following information. If enabled, all reports for the specified
Area are sent to the selected destination.
Area Address
1 0297
2 0319
DS7240 3 0341
only
4 0363
Default
Lock Area # Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Lock Area Disabled
Lock Area Reports to Routing Destination 1
See Lock Area # Reporting on page 97 for more information.
5.3 PIN and User Configuration
5.3.1 Personal Identification Number (PIN) Length
Set the PIN Length. All User PINs and the Installer PIN follow this length.
Parameter Address PIN Length Default
PIN Length 0379 3 to 7 digits long 4 digits long
5.3.2 User Tamper Options

Set the User Tamper Options using the following information:
Parameter Address
User Tamper Options 0380
Default
User Tamper Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No User Tamper Alert Options
User Tamper [156] Reports Enabled
User Tamper Activates Burg Alarm Output
Reserved
Reserved
See User Tamper Options on page 105 for more information.

5.3.3 User Tamper Retry Count
Set the User Tamper Retry Count. If enabled, the panel creates a User Tamper event when a user enters an invalid PIN the
number of times entered in this parameter (for example, if 5 is entered and an invalid PIN is entered five times, a User
Tamper event occurs).
Parameter Address Data Digit Selections Default
User Tamper Retry Count 0381 0 = User Retry Count Disabled
1-15: # of attempts allowed before a 4 attempts
User Tamper event occurs
5.3.4 User Tamper Lockout Time

Set the User Tamper Lockout Time. This parameter determines how long (in minutes) a keypad is locked out when a User
Tamper event occurs.
User Tamper Lockout Time 0382 0-15 (minutes) 1 minute
5.3.5 Installer PIN

Set the Installer PIN. This PIN must be the same length as set in the PIN Length parameter.
Parameter Address Range PIN Length Default
Installer PIN 0383-0389 3 to 7 digits long 9876543
The Installer PIN cannot disarm the system, but it can arm and access all other functions.
5.4 User Configuration
Authority
Personal Identification Number (PIN) Area
Level
User # Digit 1 Digit 2 Digit 3 Digit 4 Digit 5 Digit 6 Digit 7 Selection Selection
1 Addr 0390 Addr 0391 Addr 0392 Addr 0393 Addr 0394 Addr 0395 Addr 0396 Addr 0397 Addr 0398
Table 4: User Configuration Addresses

5.4.1 User # PIN
Set the User # PIN. This PIN must be the same length as set in the PIN Length parameter (see page 16).
User # PIN See Table 4 3 to 7 digits long User 1: 1234567
Users 2-32: 0000000
5.4.2 User # Authority Level
Set the User # Authority Level. The Authority Level assigns functions to the Users PIN and RF Keyfob.
Parameter Address
User # Authority Level See Table 4
Users 2-32 Default User 1 Default

User # Authority Level Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Authority Level Assigned (Disabled)
Authority Level 1 Assigned
5.4.3 Authority Level Configuration

The Authority Level determines which functions are available to system users. Each user is assigned an Authority Level.
Authority Level defaults can perform the following options. See Table 5 for a summary of Authority Level Configuration
functions.
See page 97 for complete instructions for Authority Level configuration.
Authority Level 1 (Master): Options 1-4, 6-15
Authority Level 2 (Unlimited): Options 1-4, 6-13, 15
Authority Level 3 (General): Options 1-4, 6, 7
Authority Level 4 (One-Time): Options 1-6
Authority Level Option Function(s)
1 All On Arming
2 Perimeter Only Arming
3 Partial On Arming
4 Disarming the System
5 One-Time Disarm
6 Send Open/Close Reports
7 Force Arm/Bypass
8 All Areas On/Off
9 View Alarm Memory, System Test, View System Trouble, Remote Program, Walk Test, Reset
Sensors, View Zone Trouble
10 Set Time/Date, Change Skeds, Renew One-Time PINs, Add/Delete Other PINs, Set Chime
Tone/Zones, Set Partial On Zones, Auto Call Forwarding Enable (Digits to dial at All On)/Disable
(Digits to dial at Disarm)
11 Move to Area
12 Extend Auto On Time
13 Adjust Keypad Settings, Change/Reset Outputs, Turn Chime On/Off, Turn Auto-Forward On/Off
14 Change PINs
15 View Log
Table 5: Authority Level Configuration Functions
5.4.4 User # Area Option
Set the User # Area Option. This parameter assigns User PINs to Areas. PINs may be assigned to multiple Areas.
Parameter Address
User # Area Option See Table 4
User 2-32 Default User 1 Default

Area Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Not Assigned to an Area
Assigned to Area 1
Assigned to Area 2
Assigned to Area 3 (DS7240 only)
Assigned to Area 4 (DS7240 only)
5.5 Keypad Configuration

5.5.1 Keypad Addresses
Up to 8 keypads can be wired to the panel.
Keypad Address Jumper Settings*
Address 1 2 4 8 16 MODE
1 X X
2 X X
3 X X X
4 X X
5 X X X
6 X X X
7 X X X X
8 X X
Table 6: Keypad Data Bus Addresses
* The settings listed in this column are the Address jumper pins that must be covered by a jumper plug.
5.5.2 Keypad # Options
Set the Keypad # Options using the following information:
Parameter Keypad Address
Keypad # Options 1 0678
2 0680
3 0682
4 0684
5 0686
6 0688
7 0690
8 0692
Default
Keypad Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Keypad Options
Beep Keypad on System Trouble
Enable Exit Tone
Enable Area Display (DS7446i Keypad)
Dont Show Zone Status on Keypads (if selected, zone
status not shown until a key is pressed)
See Keypad # Options on page 110 for more information.

5.5.3 Keypad # Area
Set the Keypad # Area assignment. Assign only one Area to each keypad.
Parameter Keypad Area
Keypad # Area 1 Address 0679
2 Address 0681
3 Address 0683
4 Address 0685
5 Address 0687
6 Address 0689
7 Address 0691
8 Address 0693
Keypads 2-8 Default Keypad 1 Default

Keypad Area Assignment 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Area Assigned (Keypad Disabled)
Assign Keypad to Area 1
Assign Keypad to Area 3 (DS7240 only)
5.6 ABC Key and Duress Configuration
5.6.1 Area Options for ABC Keys
Set the Area Options for ABC Keys. These parameters assign areas to the ABC keys.
Each key must have an Area assignment that may consist of one or more Areas (or none Disabled).
[A] Key reports as Zone 100 for all Areas
[B] Key reports as Zone 101 for all Areas
[C] Key reports as Zone 102 for all Areas.
Parameter Address
[A] Key Area Option 0694
[B] Key Area Option 0696
[C] Key Area Option 0698
DS7220 Default DS7240 Default

Area Options for ABC Keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled for All Areas
Key Works for Area 1
Key Works for Area 3 (DS7240 only)
5.6.2 Alarm Response for ABC Keys

Set the Alarm Response Options for ABC Keys. This parameter determines the alarm response generated when the key is
activated (pressed twice): Fire Alarm, Panic Alarm or Emergency Alarm.
Parameter Address
[A] Key Alarm Response 0695
[B] Key Alarm Response 0697
[C] Key Alarm Response 0699
Default
ABC Key Alarm Response Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm Response
Activate Fire Alarm Response
Activate Panic Alarm Response
Activate Emergency Alarm Response
See Alarm Response for ABC Keys on page 112 for more information.
5.6.3 Alarm Output Option for ABC Keys
Set the Alarm Output Option for ABC Keys.
If selected, the alarm output activates for the response type assigned to each key. This parameter affects all Areas.
Parameter Address
ABC Key Alarm Output Option 0700
Default
Alarm Output Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm Output for ABC Keys
Alarm Output for [A] Key
Alarm Output for [B] Key
Alarm Output for [C] Key
Reserved
5.6.4 ABC Key Reports, Acknowledgement Beep at Keypad Options

Set the ABC Key Reports, Ack Beep at Keypad Options using the following information:
Parameter Address
ABC Key Reports, Ack Beep at Keypad Options 0701
Default
ABC Key Report & Ack Beep Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm Report for ABC Keys
Enable ABC Key Reporting (A=100, B=101, C=102)
Acknowledgement Beep for [A] Key
Acknowledgement Beep for [B] Key
Acknowledgement Beep for [C] Key
See ABC Key Reports, Ack Beep at Keypad Options on page 113 for more information.
5.6.5 Duress Reporting Options
Set the Duress Reporting Options.
This parameter creates up to 4 Duress Users (and PINs).
Creating a Duress User does not change any other functionality programmed for that User.
See page 114 for more information.
Parameter Address
Duress Reporting Options 0702
Default
Duress Reporting Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No User Emergency Function Reporting
Make User 32 a Duress User
5.6.6 ABC Keys and Duress Report Routing

Set the ABC Key and Duress Report Routing. Select whether the ABC Key reports are routed to a Destination, logged
and/or printed.
Parameter Address
ABC Key & Duress Report Routing 0703
Data Digit Entry Option

0 No Reports, no Events to Log/Printer
Default 1 Reports to Destination 1, Events to Log/Printer
2 Reports to Destination 2, Events to Log/Printer
3 Reports to Destinations 1 & 2, Events to Log/Printer
4 Reports to Destination 2 only on Destination 1 Comm Fail Event, Events to Log/Printer
5 No reports, Events to Log/Printer
See ABC Key and Duress Report Routing on page 114 for more information.
5.6.7 Enable Keypad Tamper Response
Set the Enable Keypad Tamper Response.
The setting made for this parameter affects all keypads. If selected, the panel reports a keypad tamper event. See page 115
for more information.
Parameter Address
Enable Keypad Tamper Response 0704
Default
Enable Keypad Tamper Response Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
Enabled
5.7 Location Configuration
The DS7240 supports up to 40 Locations; the DS7220 supports up to 24 Locations. Each Location configuration consists of
settings made using the following parameters: Device, Zone Function, Area and Zone Number.
Location Parameters Device Parameter Selections
These columns show the programming Addresses These columns show the selections for the Device parameter. The Device parameter
for each of the four Location parameters. These four tells the panel where to find the sensor loop (or transmitter) status for each location.
parameters configure each Location. The cells in these columns tell you which loop to use on each device. Each cell also
tells you which EOL resistor value to use for each loop.
Location Device Zone Area Zone # 1 2 3 4 5
# Function On-Board DX2010 DX2010, RF Receiver 1 RF Receiver 2
Doubled
1 Addr: Addr: Addr: Addr: 2.2 k only DBus* Addr 101 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
0706 0707 0708 0709-0710 Loop 1, 2.2k Xmitter** 1 Xmitter 1
2 Addr: Addr: Addr: Addr: 3.65 k only when DBus Addr 101 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
0711 0712 0713 0714-0715 doubled with 10 Loop 2, 2.2k Xmitter 2 Xmitter 2
9 Addr: Addr: Addr: Addr: Not available as DBus Addr 102 DBus Addr 106 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
0746 0747 0748 0749-0750 double zone. Loop 1, 2.2k Loop 1, 3.65 k Xmitter 9 Xmitter 9
10 Addr: Addr: Addr: Addr: Doubled with 2, DBus Addr 102 DBus Addr 106 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
0751 0752 0753 0754-0755 2.2k Loop 2, 2.2k Loop 2, 3.65 k Xmitter 10 Xmitter 10
17 Addr: Addr: Addr: Addr: DBus Addr 103 DBus Addr 106 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
0786 0787 0788 0789-0790 Loop 1, 2.2k Loop 1, 2.2k Xmitter 17 Xmitter 17
Table 7: DS7240/DS7220 Location Config Parameters

* DBus = Data Bus. ** Xmitter = Transmitter.
Location Parameters Device Parameter Selections
These columns show the programming Addresses These columns show the selections for the Device parameter. The Device parameter
for each of the four Location parameters. These four tells the panel where to find the sensor loop (or transmitter) status for each location.
parameters configure each Location. The cells in these columns tell you which loop to use on each device. Each cell also
tells you which EOL resistor value to use for each loop.
Location Device Zone Area Zone # 1 2 3 4 5
# Function On-Board DX2010 DX2010, RF Receiver 1 RF Receiver 2
Doubled
25 Addr: Addr: Addr: Addr: DBus* Addr 104 DBus Addr 107 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
0826 0827 0828 0829-0830 Loop 1, 2.2k Loop 1, 3.65 k Xmitter** 25 Xmitter 25
0831 0832 0833 0834-0835 Loop 2, 2.2k Loop 2, 3.65 k Xmitter 26 Xmitter 26
Table 8: Location Configuration Parameters, DS7240 only

* DBus = Data Bus. ** Xmitter = Transmitter.
5.7.1 Location ##, Device
Set the Location ##, Device parameter using the following information:
Parameter Address
Location ##, Device See Table 7 & Table 8
Locations 9-40 Default Locations 1-8 Default

Location ##, Device Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Device Assigned (Disabled)
On-board Zone (L1 to L8)
Wired Zone Expander (DX2010)
Doubled Wired Zone Expander (DX2010)
Data Bus RF Receiver 1
See the Sample Location Scenario on page 28 for more information.
5.7.2 Location ##, Zone Function
Set the Location ##, Zone Function parameter using the following information:
Parameter Address
Location ##, Zone Function See Table 7 & Table 8
Location # Zone Function Type Default

1 1 (24-hour Fire)
2 11 (Entry/Exit Delay 1)
On-Board 4 13 (Follower)
Locations 1-8 5 13 (Follower)
6 14 (Instant)
7 15 (Instant Perimeter)
8 4 (24-hour Tamper)
Off-Board 9-40 0 (Not Configured)
Locations 9-40
5.7.3 Location ##, Area
Set the Location ##, Area parameter using the following information:
Parameter Address
Location ##, Area See Table 7 & Table 8
Locations 1-40 Default

Location ##, Area Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Area Assigned (Disabled)
Assign Location ## to Area 1
Assign Location ## to Area 3 (DS7240 only)
5.7.4 Location ##, Zone Number
Set the Location ##, Zone Number parameter using the following information:
On-Board Locations
Location # Address Range Default Zone #
1 0709-0710 01
2 0714-0715 02
3 0719-0720 03
4 0724-0725 04
5 0729-0730 05
6 0734-0735 06
7 0739-0740 07
8 0744-0745 08
Off-Board Locations Off-Board Locations, DS7240 only

Location # Address Range Default Zone # Location # Address Range Default Zone #
9 0749-0750 09 25 0829-0830 25
10 0754-0755 10 26 0834-0835 26
11 0759-0760 11 27 0839-0840 27
12 0764-0765 12 28 0844-0845 28
13 0769-0770 13 29 0849-0850 29
14 0774-0775 14 30 0854-0855 30
15 0779-0780 15 31 0859-0860 31
16 0784-0785 16 32 0864-0865 32
17 0789-0790 17 33 0869-0870 33
18 0794-0795 18 34 0874-0875 34
19 0799-0800 19 35 0879-0880 35
20 0804-0805 20 36 0884-0885 36
21 0809-0810 21 37 0889-0890 37
22 0814-0815 22 38 0894-0895 38
23 0819-0820 23 39 0899-0900 39
24 0824-0825 24 40 0904-0905 40
Make sure two Addresses are used when entering the Zone Number.
5.7.5 Sample Location Scenario
Suppose the intended premises for the panel is a small store that consists of the following four areas:
Area 1: Managers Office
Area 2: Entrance Foyer
Area 3: Sales Floor
Area 4: Employee Break Room
Your task is to set up Location 9 as follows:
Assign it as an Entry/Exit door (door contact)
Assign it to Area 2 (first zone in Area 2)
Connect it to a DX2010 Input Expander
1. Set the Device Parameter. This parameter tells the panel how the Location is connected to the panel: on-board sensor
loop, off-board expander (DX2010) or Data Bus (DBus) RF Receiver. Since Location 9 is connected to a DX2010 Input
Expander without zone doubling, you would enter a 2 at Address 0746.
Location # Device Zone Area Zone # 1 2 3 4 5

Function On-Board DX2010 DX2010, RF Receiver 1 RF Receiver 2
Doubled
0746 0747 0748 0749-0750 double zone. Loop 1, 2.2 k Loop 1, 3.65 k Xmitter 9 Xmitter 9
Enter 2 at Address 0746 for DX2010 without zone doubling.
2. Set the Zone Function Parameter. This parameter tells the panel how the particular Location will behave. There are
several parameters for configuring a Zone Function. See page 121 for more information.
For example, your entry at Address 0747 would be 11. This means that the panel will now recognize the device at
Location 9 as an Entry/Exit Delay 1 Zone Function Type.

Doubled
11
Enter 11 at Address 0747 for Entry/Exit Delay 1 Zone Function Type.
3. Set the Area Parameter. This parameter tells the panel which Area Location 9 will appear in. Each Location can only be
assigned to one Area. Since Location 9 is in Area 2 for this example, enter a 2 at Address 0748 to assign Location 9 to
Area 2.
Doubled
Enter 2 at Address 0748 to assign Location 9 to Area 2.
4. Set the Zone Number Parameter. This parameter determines the zone number that appears on keypad displays, in the
panel event log and at the optional printer for Location 9. This number is also reported to the Central Station. The
DS7240 supports up to 40 zones. The DS7220 supports up to 24 zones.
The default zone number for Location 9 is 09 (Address 0749-0750). However, this default can be changed to any
number. Since this is the first location in a new Area (Area 2), change the default to 01 by entering a 0 at Address
0749 and a 1 at Address 0750. Be careful not to duplicate zone numbers within the same Area.
Doubled
0-1
Change the Zone Number from 09 to 01 for Location 9.
Make sure two Addresses are used when entering the Zone Number.
5.7.6 Summary
The panel now recognizes the following information for Location 9:
Device: 2 (Location is on a DX2010 Input Expander)
Zone Function: 11 (Entry/Exit Delay 1)
Area: 2 (Location 9 is assigned to Area 2)
Zone Number: 01 (Location 9 will report to keypads, panel event log and Central Station as Zone #01 in Area 2).
5.8 Zone Function Configuration
The DS7240 can monitor any combination of up to 40 sensor loops and/or RF transmitters; the DS7220 can monitor any
combination of up to 24 sensor loops and/or RF transmitters. Each sensor loop or transmitter is assigned to a Location. Each
Location is assigned to one of 15 Zone Functions so that the panel knows how to respond to sensor loop or transmitter
changes.
Table 9 lists the 15 Zone Functions and their respective default Zone Function Types. For more information on Zone
Function Configuration, see page 121.
Zone Function Zone Function Default Description Zone Function Zone Function Default Description
1 1 (24-hr Fire) 9 8 (24-hr, Burglary)
2 2 (24-hr Fire w/ Alarm Verification) 10 10 (Keyswitch)
3 3 (24-hr, Voice Active) 11 11 (Entry/Exit Delay 1)*
4 4 (24-hr, Tamper) 12 12 (Entry/Exit Delay 2)*
5 5 (24-hr, Emergency) 13 13 (Follower)
6 6 (24-hr, Visible Panic) 14 14 (Instant)
7 7 (24-hr, Invisible Panic) 15 14 (Instant)
8 8 (24-hr, Burglary)
Table 9: Zone Function Type Default Settings
* Armed for Perimeter Only Mode by default. See Options 1, Zone Function ## on page 125 for more information.
24-Hour Zone: 24-hour zones are always on and cannot be turned off by the user. Faults on 24-hour zones do not have to
be cleared or bypassed to turn the system on (armed).
Zone: Zones are turned on and off when the user turns the system on (armed) and off (disarmed).
5.9 Output Configuration
The DS7240 supports a total of 20 Programmable Outputs including four on-board (PO 1-PO 4) and up to 16 off-board
outputs. The DS7220 supports a total of 12 Programmable Outputs including four on-board (PO 1-PO 4) and up to 8 off-
board outputs. PO 2 can be configured as a supervised siren output (8 , 10 watt).
See Table 10 and Table 11 for Output parameter Addresses.
Output Area Function Mode Base Multiplier
Outputs 1-4:
Digit 1 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 2

(PO 1-PO 4)
On-board
1 Address 1044 Address 1045 Address 1046 Address 1047 Address 1048 Address 1049 Address 1050
Device Address 150
Off-board Data Bus
Outputs 5-12:
Table 10: DS7240/DS7220 Output Config Parameters

Output Area Function Mode Base Multiplier
Off-board Data Bus Device
Digit 1 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 2

Outputs 13-20:
Address 151
Table 11: Output Configuration Parameters, DS7240 only

5.9.1 Area, Output #
Use the following information to set each output to one or more Areas:
Parameter Address
Area, Output # See Table 10 and Table 11
Default
Area Output Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
Assign Output to Area 1
Assign Output to Area 2
Assign Output to Area 3 (DS7240 only)
Assign Output to Area 4 (DS7240 only)
5.9.2 Function, Output ##
This parameter assigns each output to a specific function that determines when the output activates. The Mode, Time and
Multiplier parameters, in combination with the Function parameter, determine when the output deactivates.
Output Address Default Function
PO 1 1, 10 (Alarm Zones, 24-Hour Fire/Non-Fire Zones)
PO 2 1, 13 (Fire Verification)
PO 3 See Table 10 and Table 11 0,1 (Armed All, Perimeter Only or Partial On)
PO 4 2,13 (Ready to Arm No Zones Faulted)
PO 5 to PO 20 0, 0 (Disabled)
See Table 12 for descriptions of each Output Function type.
Digit 1 Digit 2 Function Type/Description

0 0 Disabled.
0 1 Armed (All, Perimeter Only, Partial On): Output activates when the system is armed All On, Perimeter Only or
Partial On. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until system is turned off.
0 2 Armed (Perimeter Only or Partial On): Output activates when the system is armed Perimeter Only or Partial On.
Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until system is turned off or moved to another arming state.
0 3 Armed (All On): Output activates when the system is armed All On. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse
Modes until system is turned off or moved to another arming state.
0 4 Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert: Output activates at the start of the Auto Arm Pre-Alert. Output remains activated for
Steady or Pulse Modes for duration of alert. See Auto On Pre-Alert Time on page 82.
0 5 Exit Delay or Entry Delay: Output activates at the start of Exit Delay or Entry Delay. Output remains activated for
Steady or Pulse Modes until Entry or Exit Delay ends.
0 6 Exit Delay: Output activates at the start of Exit Delay. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until
Exit Delay ends.
0 7 Exit Delay Finished (until disarmed): Output activates at end of Exit Delay. Output remains activated for Steady
or Pulse Modes until system is turned off.
0 8 Bell Test On Close: For systems programmed for Closing reports, output activates when the acknowledgement
for Closing report is received. For systems not programmed for Closing reports, output activates at end of Exit
Delay. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until system is turned off.
0 9 Entry Delay: Output activates at the start of Entry Delay. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until
Entry Delay ends.
0 10 Entry Delay +Chime: Output activates at start of Entry Delay. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes
until Entry Delay ends. Output also activates whenever a Chime zone is faulted. Output does not activate if Chime
Tone is turned off.
0 11 Exit Delay, Entry Delay, Chime: Output activates at start of Entry or Exit Delay. Output remains activated for
Steady or Pulse Modes until Entry or Exit Delay ends. Output also activates whenever a Chime zone is faulted.
Output does not activate if Chime Tone is turned off.
0 12 Phone Line Fail: Output activates when a Phone Line Fail condition is detected. Output remains activated for
Steady or Pulse Modes until condition is cleared. This output works independently of the Phone Line Fault
Response Options (Address 0220) see page 75 for more information.
0 13 Ack Received (any report): Output activates when acknowledgement for any report is received. [#] + [4] + [7]
resets for Steady or Pulse Modes.
0 14 AC Fail: Output activates when an AC Fail condition is detected. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse
Modes until condition is cleared.
0 15 Low or Missing Battery: Output activates when a panel Low or Missing Battery condition occurs. Output remains
activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until condition is cleared.
1 0 PO 2 (on-board) Siren Supervision Fail: Output activates when a Siren Supervision Fail condition is detected.
Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes until condition is cleared.
1 1 Sensor Trouble Monitor: Output activates when a Sensor Trouble Monitor condition is detected in conjunction
with setting made for Sensor Monitor Time (see page 133). Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes
until Sensor Monitor Trouble condition is cleared.
Table 12: Output Function Types
1 2 Duress, [System Reset] Resets: Output activates whenever a Duress PIN is entered. Output remains activated
for Steady or Pulse Modes until user presses [System Reset] key or enters [#] + [4] + [7].
1 3 User Tamper, [System Reset] Resets): Output activates on a User Tamper event. Output remains activated for
Steady or Pulse Modes until user presses [System Reset] key or enters [#] + [4] + [7].
1 4 Arming Beeps (for Keyswitch/RF Arming): Off/All On/Perimeter Only/Partial On Beeps for Keyswitch/RF arming.
1 Beep = Off, 2 Beeps = All On, 3 Beeps = Perimeter Only. Mode & Time parameters do not apply. This feature
works in conjunction with Global Output Options (Address 1039, page 135). Available for on-board
outputs only.
1 5 Bell Time (starts on any alarm event; PIN stops; activates on Bell Test): Output activates on any alarm event.
Entering PIN terminates Bell Time. Output remains activated for Steady or Pulse Modes for duration set in Bell
Time parameter (see page 135).
1 6 Strobe: See Strobe Output Type Options on page 136 to learn how Strobe starts. PIN entry resets function.
1 7 Silent Alarm: Activated by alarm on non-fire zones programmed for No Alarm Output. Follows Bell Time for
Steady and Pulse Modes. PIN entry stops.
1 8 Alarm (All On, Perimeter Only & Partial On, non-fire 24-hr alarms): Activated by alarm on zone when armed All
On, Perimeter Only or Partial On, or by alarm on non-fire 24-hr zone, & by user/installer Bell Test. Follows Bell
Test for Steady and Pulse Modes. PIN entry resets. Follows programming for Alarm output types.
1 9 Alarm (Perimeter Only & Partial On, non-fire 24-hr alarms): Activated by alarm on zone when armed Perimeter
Only or Partial On, or by alarm on non-fire 24-hr zone, & by user/installer Bell Test. Follows Bell Test for Steady
and Pulse Modes. PIN entry resets. Follows programming for Alarm output types.
1 10 Alarm Zones, 24-hr zones (fire & non-fire): Activated by alarm on zone when armed All On, Perimeter Only or
Partial On, or by alarm on fire & non-fire 24-hr zones, & by user/installer Bell Test. Follows Bell Test for Steady and
Pulse Modes. PIN entry resets. Off-board outputs cannot provide output in Temporal Code 3 format (only on-
board outputs). Off-board outputs configured for Temporal Code 3 will provide a steady output. Follows
programming for Alarm output types. On-board outputs pulse in Temporal Code 3 format per NFPA & UL
requirements.
1 11 Fire Alarm: Activated by alarm on fire zone & by user/installer Bell Test. Follows Bell Time. Pulses in Temporal
Code 3 format per NFPA & UL requirements. Mode & Time parameters do not apply. PIN entry resets. Off-board
outputs cannot provide output in Temporal Code 3 format (only on-board outputs). Off-board outputs
configured for Temporal Code 3 will provide a steady output. Follows programming for Alarm output types.
On-board outputs pulse in Temporal Code 3 format per NFPA & UL requirements.
1 12 Fire Alarm, Latching: Activated by alarm on fire zone & by user/installer Bell Test. Does not pulse in Temporal
Code 3 format. Mode & Time parameters do not apply. [System Reset] key (or [#]+[4]+[7]) resets. Follows
programming for Alarm output types.
1 13 Fire Verification/Reset: Inverted, resettable output used with Fire Verification zones. Verification for Fire
Verification Zone Function Type & [System Reset] key (or [#]+[4]+[7]) activate output for approximately 15
seconds. Mode & Time parameters do not apply. See page 122 for 24-Hour, Fire with Alarm Verification Zone
Function Type description. Used for 4-wire smoke detectors.
1 14 System Trouble: Activates on any System Trouble. Resets when all system troubles are clear.
1 15 [O] Key (trapezoid key on RF Keyfob): Activates when [O] key on RF keyfob is pressed. [System Reset] key (or
[#]+[4]+[7]) resets. Pressing [O] key again also resets output.
2 0 [P] Key (rising sun key on RF Keyfob): Activates when [P] key on RF keyfob is pressed. [System Reset] key (or
[#]+[4]+[7]) resets. Pressing [P] key again also resets output.
2 1 Panic on RF Keyfob: Activates when Arm key (locked icon) and Disarm key (unlocked icon) on RF Keyfob are
pressed at the same time. [System Reset] key (or [#]+[4]+[7]) resets.
2 2 Panic on RF Keyfob, Bell Time, PIN Resets: Activates when Arm key (locked icon) and Disarm key (unlocked
icon) on RF Keyfob are pressed at the same time. Steady and Pulse Modes follow Bell Time. PIN entry resets.
2 3 [A] Key: Activates when [A] key is pressed twice. [System Reset] key resets if no alarm response is assigned.
2 4 [B] Key: Activates when [B] key is pressed twice. [System Reset] key resets if no alarm response is assigned.
2 5 [C] Key: Activates when [C] key is pressed twice. [System Reset] key resets if no alarm response is assigned.
Table 12 (cont.): Output Function Types
2 6 3 Unsuccessful Dialing Attempts: Activates after 3 unsuccessful dialing attempts. Resets with first successful
call or [System Reset] key (or [#]+[4]+[7]).
2 7 Comm Fail Event (successful communication clears): Activates with any Comm Fail event. Resets with any
successful communication or [System Reset] key (or [#]+[4]+[7]).
2 8 Panel Off Hook: Activates when panel takes phone line off-hook for a dialing attempt. Resets when panel finishes
with phone line and goes on-hook.
2 9 Ring Detect: Activates when panel detects a ring on phone line. Resets when ringing stops.
2 10 Voice Request: For use with optional Voice Verification Module. Output activates for 2 seconds when panel
receives acknowledgement of alarm report from a zone with Voice Verification option enabled. See Options 1,
Zone Function ## on page 125 for more information. Mode & Time parameters do not apply.
2 11 Follow Keypad Sounder: Available for on-board outputs only. Output follows keypad sounder. Mode & Time
parameters do not apply.
2 12 Chime: Activates per Chime Feature configuration. Follows keypad sounder per Chime Tone configuration.
2 13 Ready to Arm (no zones faulted): Output activates (turns on) when (1) panel is disarmed & no zones are faulted
(2) panel is armed & no zones are faulted (3) panel is armed & any zone is faulted. Output deactivates (turns off)
when panel is disarmed & any zone is faulted. Output deactivates even if zone became faulted when panel was
armed.
2 14 Exit Error: Activates if zone is faulted at end of Exit Delay. Resets when system is disarmed.
2 15 AC 60 Hz: Activates on 60 Hz. Resets on 50 Hz.
3 0 Ground Start: Activates for approximately 0.5 seconds at start of any dialing attempt. Use to bring up dial tone in
ground start phone systems. See page 49 for wiring instructions.
3 1 Follow Zone Functions 1 to 15: These 15 output functions activate for any fault on any zone assigned to the
To specified Zone Function.
3 15
4 0 Change Outputs: Activated/deactivated by Change Outputs function ([#] + [5] +[4]).
4 1 Alarm Zone Functions 1 to 15: These 15 output functions activate for alarms on any zone assigned to the
specified Zone Function and the area(s) the output is assigned to. They reset when none of the zones assigned to
To
the specified Zone Function are in alarm.
4 15
5 1 Trouble Zone Functions 1 to 15: These 15 output functions activate for troubles on any zone assigned to the
To specified Zone Function. They reset when none of the zones assigned to the specified Zone Function are in
trouble.
5 15
6 1 Follow PIN 1 to PIN 32: These output functions activate when the specified PIN is entered. PIN Area
To assignments are ignored when these output functions are selected.
6 15
7 0
To
7 15
8 0
8 1 Sked Only: This output is only available for Outputs 1 to 15. Activated by Skeds. See Sked Configuration on
page 36 for more information.
8 3 Always On: Output is always activated.
5.9.3 Mode (Steady, Pulse, One Shot), Output ##
Use this parameter to select a Mode setting for each output. The Mode determines how the output responds once it has
activated.
Parameter Address Default
Mode, Output # See Table 10 and Table 11 1 (Steady)
Mode Mode Description

0 Output Disabled
1 Steady: Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs are
energized when activated. Time parameters do not apply. Resets as specified by Output function.
2 Latch: Normally open. On-board outputs latch low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs latch
energized when activated. Time parameters do not apply. Resets with [System Reset] key or [#] + [4] + [7].
3 Toggle: Toggle output state. When the output is activated, the output toggles states.
4 Pulse: Normally open. On-board outputs pulse low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs pulse
energized when activated. The time parameters set the activated duration of the pulse.
5 One Shot: Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs are
energized when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Always runs the full
duration. A new triggering event does not restart.
6 One Shot with Re-Trigger: Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board
outputs are energized when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Always
runs at least the full duration. A new triggering event restarts the one shot timer. Could be used with a motion
sensor as trigger for lighting control.
7 One Shot with Reset: Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board
outputs are energized when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation).
Termination of the triggering event terminates the One Shot early.
8 Steady, Reversed Logic Normal: On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are
normally energized. On-board outputs open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize when activated.
Time parameters do not apply. Resets as specified by output function.
9 Latch, Reversed Logic Normal: On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally
energized. On board outputs latch open when activated. Off-board outputs latch de-energized when activated.
Time parameters do not apply. Resets with [System Reset] key or [#] + [4] + [7].
10 Pulse, Reversed Logic Normal: On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally
energized. On board outputs pulse open when activated. Off-board outputs pulse de-energized when activated.
The time parameters set the activated duration of the pulse.
11 One Shot, Reverse Logic Normal: On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are
normally energized. On board outputs go open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize when activated.
Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Always runs the full duration. A new triggering
event does not restart.
12 One Shot with Re-Trigger, Reverse Logic Normal: On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board
outputs are normally energized. On board outputs go open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize
when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Always runs at least the full
duration. A new triggering event restarts the one shot timer. Could be used with a motion sensor as trigger for
lighting control.
13 One Shot with Reset, Reverse Logic Normal: On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board
outputs are normally energized. On board outputs go open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize
when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Termination of the triggering
event terminates the One Shot early.
Table 13: Output Mode Descriptions
5.9.4 Base, Output ##
Multiply the Base with the Multiplier to determine the outputs off time.
Parameter Address
Base, Output # See Table 10 and Table 11
Default
Base Output Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
200 ms (onboard outputs only)
1 second
1 minute
1 hour
5.9.5 Multiplier
Multiply the Multiplier with the Base to determine the outputs off time.
Parameter Address Data Digits Default
Multiplier See Table 10 and Table 11 0-9 0, 0
Steady and Toggle Modes: These modes are not affected by the Time Base and Time Multiplier parameters below.
Pulse Modes: The system calculates the On Time (activation) and the Off Time for outputs based on the values in the Base
and Multiplier columns (see Table 14). The duration, or On Time, of an output is determined by selecting one of the four
Base options from Table 14. Calculate the Off Time by multiplying the Base by the Multiplier.
The Time Base of 200 ms in Table 14 and Table 15 is only available for on-board outputs.
Base On Time Multiplier Off Time Tolerance

(On Time = Time of Base) (Off Time = Base x Multiplier)
0 0 N/A Always Off N/A
1 (200 ms) 200 ms 01-99 200 ms 19.8 sec 200 ms
2 (1 sec) 1 sec 01-99 1 99 sec 1 sec
3 (1 min) 1 min 01-99 1 99 min 1 min
4 (1 hr) 1 hr 01-99 1 99 hr 1 hr
Table 14: Pulse Mode Configuration
One Shot Modes: The duration of the On Time of a One Shot output is determined by multiplying the Base by the Multiplier.
Base Multiplier On Time Tolerance

(On Time = Base x Multiplier)
0 N/A 0 N/A
1 (200 ms) 01-99 200 ms 19.8 sec 200 ms
2 (1 sec) 01-99 1 sec 99 sec 1 sec
3 (1 min) 01-99 1 min 99 min 1 min
4 (1 hr) 01-99 1 hr 99 hr 1 hr
Table 15: One Shot Mode Configuration
Pulse Modes and One Shot Modes: If using a larger time base value, be aware that the output may not activate
immediately as desired. It may wait until the off time has expired before activating.
5.10 Sked Configuration
Skeds are scheduled events that occur at a programmed time of day and day of the week. Skeds can automatically arm the
system (All On, Perimeter Only or Partial On), disarm the system or operate an output (turn on/off).
Assign Time Days Days

Sked Type (Area or
(H___) (_H__) (__M_) (___M) Option 1 Option 2
Output)
1 Addr 1184 Addr 1185 Addr 1186 Addr 1187 Addr 1188 Addr 1189 Addr 1190 Addr 1191
Table 16: Sked Configuration Parameters
5.10.1 Type, Sked #
Use the following information to determine each type of Sked:
Parameter Address
Type, Sked # See Table 16
Default
Sked Type Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
Auto All On
Auto Perimeter Only On
Auto Partial On
Auto Off
Output Function On (DS7240: Outputs 1-15; DS7220:
Outputs 1-12)
Output Function Off (DS7240: Outputs 1-15; DS7220:
Outputs 1-12)
5.10.2 Assign (Area or Output), Sked #

Use this parameter to assign an Area or an Output to each Sked. If the Sked Type is Output Function On or Output Function
Off, this parameter assigns a programmable output to the Sked.
Parameter Address
Assign (Area or Output), Sked # See Table 16
Data Selection Default Data Selection Default

Digit Digit
0 Disabled 0 (Disabled) 8 Output 8 0 (Disabled)
1 Area 1 or Output 1 0 (Disabled) 9 Output 9 0 (Disabled)
2 Area 2 or Output 2 0 (Disabled) 10 Output 10 0 (Disabled)
3 Area 3 (DS7240 only) or Output 3 0 (Disabled) 11 Output 11 0 (Disabled)
4 Area 4 (DS7240 only) or Output 4 0 (Disabled) 12 Output 12 0 (Disabled)
5 Output 5 0 (Disabled) 13 Output 13 (DS7240 only) 0 (Disabled)
5.10.3 Time, Sked #
Use this parameter to determine when the Sked occurs. Time settings are in 24-hour format (HHMM) where midnight is 2400,
noon is 1200 and 12:01 am is 0001.
Time, Sked # See Table 16 0-9 0000
5.10.4 Days Option 1 (2), Sked #

Use these parameters to determine the day(s) of the week the Sked occurs.
Days Option 1: Use if Sked occurs Everyday or Monday, Tuesday or Wednesday (or a combination of these days)
Days Option 2: Use if Sked occurs on Thursday, Friday, Saturday or Sunday (or a combination of these days)
Entering 0 (zero) for both Days Option parameters disables the Sked.
If the Every Day option is selected in the Days Option 1, Sked # parameter, it overrides any selection made in
the Days Option 2, Sked # parameter.
Parameter Address
Assign (Area or Output), Sked # See Table 16
Default
Days 1 Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected
Every Day
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Default
Days 2 Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
5.11 Premises RF Receiver Configuration
The following parameters configure devices that connect to the panels Data Bus.
5.11.1 Premises RF Receiver Options
Set the Premises RF Receiver Options using the following information:
Parameter Address
Premises RF Receiver Options 1249
Default
Premises RF Receiver Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No RF Receiver Connected
RF Receiver 1 Connected, Set to Address 50
(Address PINs OFF)
(Address PINs ON)
5.11.2 Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval

Use this parameter to adjust the interval in which the RF Receiver expects to hear a supervisory signal from each RF
Transmitter.
Parameter Address
Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval 1250
Default
Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Supervision
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
12 Hours
24 Hours
Supervision interval for fire transmitters is fixed at 4 hours.
5.11.3 RF Jam Detect Level

Use this parameter to configure the RF receivers for jam detection.
Detection Systems, Inc. recommends that you leave the RF Jam Detect Level setting at the default unless
advised by Detection Systems Technical Service.

RF Jam Detect Level 1251 0-15 12
5.12 Data (Option) Bus Device Configuration
5.12.1 DX4010 and DX8010 Configuration Parameters
To configure the DX4010 RS-232 Serial Interface Module, see the DX4010 configuration parameters beginning on page 148.
To configure the DX8010 Telephone Modules access options, see page 150.
5.13 Miscellaneous System Trouble Options
To configure the panels system trouble options, see page 150.
5.14 Text Entry Parameters
The panel uses text entry parameters to enter System Text (Call for Service, ABC Key), Area Text (Area Name, Area Idle
Text) and Location Text for DS7447i LCD Keypads.
Addresses are shown for each text entry parameter. When programming from the LCD keypad, selecting any Address in the
parameter puts you in a special text programming mode that allows you to edit text blocks of 16 characters.
Depending on the number of times a key is pressed, a different character is displayed. See Table 17.
Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 . , ? ! - & < > 1
2 A B C a b c 2
3 D E F d e f 3
4 G H I g h i 4
5 J K L j k l 5
6 M N O m n o 6
7 P Q R S p q r s 7
Press the [0] key once to 8 T U V t u v 8
clear a character space or to
enter a blank space. 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9
0 _ @ # $ % * 0
* Moves to the Address before the text block.
# Moves to the Address after the text block.
A Moves cursor to the previous character position in text
block.
B No function emits error tone when pressed.
C Moves cursor to the next character position in text block.
On, Off, Perimeter Only, No Entry, Bypass and System Reset keys all
produce an error tone when pressed. Not used in text programming.

5.14.1 Call for Service Text
Configure the Call for Service Text parameter using Table 17. The message entered in this parameter is displayed on the
second line of the keypad whenever the first line shows Call for Service. Possible entries include:
Central Station phone number.
Preferred phone number to call for service.
Press 0 to View, which shows system trouble details when the [0] key is pressed.
Call for Service Text 1266-1297 Blank
See Call for Service Details on page 162 for more information.
5.14.2 ABC Key Text
Configure the text displayed when the ABC Keys are activated using the following information:
[A] Key Text 1298-1329 A Key Text
[B] Key Text 1330-1361 B Key Text
[C] Key Text 1362-1393 C Key Text
5.14.3 Area Name Text
Configure the Area Name text parameters for each Area. These parameters are used to describe each Area.
Area 1 Name 1394-1425 Area 1 Name Text
Area 3 Name (DS7240 only) 1522-1553 Area 3 Name Text
Area 4 Name (DS7240 only) 1586-1617 Area 4 Name Text
5.14.4 Area Idle Text

Configure the Area Idle Text parameters for each Area. These parameters display a message when the system is idle (no
alarms, no troubles, system disarmed).
See Keypad # Options on page 110 and Area 1 Idle Text on page 152 before changing the default Area Idle
Text.

Area 1 Idle Text 1426-1457 Not Ready
Area 3 Idle Text (DS7240 only) 1554-1585 Not Ready
Area 4 Idle Text (DS7240 only) 1618-1649 Not Ready
5.14.5 Location Text Parameters

These parameters are used to describe each Location (one parameter for each Location). X represents the Location
number.
Location Text See page 153 Location X Text
6.0 Test the System

After finishing the installation and programming of the panel, make a complete functional test of the system. Test the panel
and all devices for proper operation. Test after you first program the panel and after any subsequent programming session.
System Walk Test: Use the Walk Test ([PIN] + [#] + [4] + [4]) or the system test available from the Installers Menu (see
page 67) to perform a complete test of the panel. If you test a device, and the panel does not respond, there may be a
problem with the device, the wiring, a module setting, or the programming for the zone.
Clear After Test: To clear the event memory and report buffer, momentarily close the Installer Switch. Events stored in the
panels event log are not cleared.
Test according to NFPA 72 if this system is used for residential fire applications.
Recharge Cycle
Part II: Introduction
AC On: Panel restarts, battery charging begins, AC
This section contains panel specifications, feature restoral report sent as programmed, AC trouble
descriptions and system wiring information pertaining clears from keypads.
to the DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicator. 13.0 VDC: Battery restoral reports sent, battery
7.0 Specifications trouble clears from keypads.
13.8 VDC: Battery float charged.
7.1 Enclosure Housing
The standard enclosure is manufactured from 20 Ga., 7.6 Minimum Operating Voltage
cold-rolled steel, and measures 12.5 in. x 14.5 in. x 3 10.2 VDC
in. (31.8 cm W x 36.8 cm H x 7.6 cm D) (HxWxD). A
keyed lock is optional, and this enclosure has a 7.7 Data (Option) Bus
provision for an optional tamper switch (required for 12 VDC nominal. 1,000 ft. (305 m) of #22 AWG (0.8
Commercial Burglary applications) for monitoring the mm) cable.
door.
7.8 Telephone Connections
7.2 Environmental Specifications
RJ31X or RJ38X jack can be interfaced with the
Temperature: 32F to 122F (0C to +50C) DS7240 and DS7220.
Relative Humidity: 5 to 85% at 86F (30C) non- 7.9 Keypads
condensing.
DS7445i LED Keypad
7.3 Voltage Input
DS7447i Text (LCD) Keypad
Primary: 18 VAC, 22 VA Class 2 plug-in
transformer (CX4010). 7.10 Compatible Enclosures
Secondary: Sealed lead acid rechargeable battery AE1 Standard Enclosure (included with panel)
(12 VDC, 7 Ah or 12 VDC, 18 Ah). AE5CC Attack Enclosure
Current Requirements: 100 mA
8.0 Standard Features
See Standby Battery Requirements on 8.1 Panel Features
page 45 for current requirements of other
system components. Feature DS7240 DS7220
Zones/Inputs 40 24
7.4 Power Outputs RF Zones/Inputs 40 24
Continuous Power: up to 600 mA max. at 11.5 Outputs 20 12
VDC to 12.4 VDC (continuous supply) total for all
devices and output for non-UL applications. Areas 4 2
Users 32 32
Up to 400 mA at 11.5 VDC to 12.4 VDC for
UL Listed burglary applications, 120 mA for RF Key Fobs 32 32
Fire and Combined Burglary/Fire Enclosure AE1 AE1
(continuous supply) total for all devices DX2010 Input Expander Single 5 max 3 max
and outputs. Inputs
Alarm Power:400 mA for Fire & combined DX2010 Input Expander Double 2 max 1 max
Fire/Burglary; 1500 mA for UL Burglary; 1850 mA Inputs
for other (not investigated by UL). Applies to all 4 DX3010 Octo-Output Expander 2 max 1 max
outputs combined. See On-board Outputs on page
58 for more information. DX3020 X10 Interface 1 max 1 max
DX4010 to Logging Printer 1 max 1 max
7.5 Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule
RF3224 Premises RF Receiver 2 max 2 max
Discharge Cycle
D621 LED Command Center 8 max 8 max
AC Off: Keypads indicate trouble. AC Fail report
D623 LCD Command Center 8 max 8 max
sent as programmed.
D625 VF Command Center 8 max 8 max
13.8 VDC: Charging Float Level.
RF Command Centers 4 max 4 max
12.1 VDC: Low Battery trouble at keypads. Low
Battery report as programmed. DX8010 DTMF Command Mod. 1 max 1 max
18 VAC Transformer CX4010 CX4010
10.2 VDC: Panel shuts down as voltage falls below
10.2 VDC. RF Keypads 4 max 4 max
Table 18: Panel Feature Comparison
PART II: INTRODUCTION
8.2 Communicator 8.5 Programmable Outputs (PO)
The panel uses a built-in digital communicator to 4 on-board programmable outputs are available (PO
send reports to the receiver. The panel transmits 1-PO 4). Up to 20 outputs (12 on DS7220) available
reports in Contact ID, SIA or Basic Pager formats. via off-board output expansion modules. See On-
board Outputs on page 58 for more information.
The panel connects to an RJ31X or RJ38X jack for
phone line seizure. Connection to the RJ31X or 8.6 Users
switched RJ38X complies with FCC regulations for The panel allows up to 32 individual users. Each
using the Public Telephone Network. You can user is assigned a Personal Identification Number
program the panel to route reports for up to two (PIN) (3 to 7 digits in length) and an authority level
routing destinations. to determine which functions can be performed.
The system has routing capabilities that allow you to
direct groups of system event reports and individual
8.7 Keypads
zone reports to two different routing destinations. Connect up to 8 keypads max.
The reports can be routed to either destination, both
Up to 1,000 ft. (305 m) allowed between
destinations, or to Destination 2 only on failure of
panel/external power supply and keypad when
Destination 1.
using #22 AWG (0.8 mm) wire.
Each routing destination can be programmed with
Up to 2,000 ft. (610 m) allowed between
two phone numbers.
panel/external power supply and keypad when
Check panel communications (from panel using #18 AWG (1.2 mm) wire.
to Central Station) to verify that the panel No more than 2 keypads (#22 AWG) or 3 keypads
is communicating properly in the selected (#18 AWG) are recommended on any 1,000 ft. run
reporting format at least once a year. when powered from the panel.
8.3 Zones 8.8 Keyswitch
40 total zones (24 on the DS7220) available via on- You can arm and disarm any of the available areas
board and off-board (including input expanders and with maintained or momentary closure devices such
wireless devices). as keyswitches. Zone programming determines loop
Zone function programming determines the panel's responses and which area a keyswitch controls.
response to open and shorted conditions on the
8.9 Alarm Event Memory
zones sensor loop.
The system uses alarm event memory to store
8 on-board sensor loops (marked L-1 to L-8).
alarm events for each area. You can view the area
Off-board zone locations can be standard wired alarm events at a keypad assigned to the area. The
sensor loops (DX2010 Input Expander) or premises panel clears the areas alarm event memory and
RF transmitters (premises RF receiver is required). starts storing new alarm events when you arm the
area.
8.4 Areas (Partitions) and Accounts
The system supports up to 4 separate areas 8.10 History Log
(partitions). You can assign all zones to a single The system stores 254 events from all areas in its
area or spread them out over a maximum of 4 areas event log.
for the DS7240 (max of 2 areas for the DS7220).
All events can be stored even if the panel does not
You arm and disarm the panel by area. You can send a report for them. You can view the log at a
arm and disarm several areas with one function. text keypad, print it locally using the DX4010 Serial
You can also assign a PIN an authority level that Interface Module and a serial printer, or upload it to
allows a user to arm an area from a remote keypad the Remote Programming Software (DSRPS
in another area. 2000+).
Assigning each area its own account number See Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page
creates separate accounts in one panel. Assigning 167 for a listing of log events. For information on
the same account number to different areas groups viewing and understanding the log events, see page
them together into one single account. 180. For more information on the log threshold, see
Area options include exit tone and delay, separate Log Supervision Configuration on page 81.
fire and burglary outputs and auto opening and 8.11 EMI/Lightning Transient Suppression
closing skeds (see Skeds on page 143 for more
information). MOVs and spark gaps provide suppression from
lightning surges and static discharges.
Area 1 can be programmed as a common area.
A First to Open, Last to Close arming feature is
available (see Arming Options 2 on page 91 for
details).
8.12 Programming 11.0 Control/Communicator Assembly
Use either a DS7447i Text Keypad or the Remote The panel is pre-assembled from the factory. You
Programming Software (DSRPS 2000+) to program should receive the following parts with your panel:
the panel.
Literature Pack
Use a PK32 Programming Key to save system DS7240/DS7220 Reference Guide (P/N: 49720)
programming. The PK32 can be used for template
or backup purposes. DS7240 System Worksheet (P/N: 49721) or
DS7220 System Worksheet (P/N: 50508)
See Part IV: Panel Programming on page 71 for
programming information. DS7240/DS7220 Smoke Detector Compatibility
Technical Service Note (P/N: 49722)
9.0 SIA Control Panel Standard
DS7240 Technical Service Note (P/N: 49724) or
The DS7240 and DS7220 have been tested by UL DS7220 Technical Service Note (P/N: 50509)
to be fully compliant with the SIA Control Panel
Standard, Features for False Alarm Reduction, SIA SIA Quick Reference Guide (P/N: 49723)
CP-01-1994.02 (R2000.01). SIA features are noted DS7240/DS7220 Security System User Guide (P/N:
in the programming section of this manual. The 49211)
standard is available through the Security Industry
Assembly
Association (SIA), 635 Slaters Lane, Suite 110,
Alexandria, Virginia 22314. You can e-mail requests PC Board
for standards to Standards@SIAOnline.org. 18 VAC, 22 VA Class 2 Transformer (CX4010)
See the DS7240/DS7220 SIA Quick Reference
Two Mounting Clips
Guide (P/N: 49723) for SIA compliant quick start
instructions. This document is included in your Two #6 x in screws
panels literature pack. Eight 2.2 k EOL Resistors ( 8-pack P/N: 47819,
10.0 Other Features single resistor P/N: 25944B)
The panel has many programmable features. A short Eight 3.65 k Zone Doubling EOL Resistors (8-
list of these features follows. See Panel pack P/N: 47821, single resistor P/N: 38130B)
Programming Parameters on page 71 for a complete One 2.21 k Fire EOL Resistor (P/N: 25899)
list.
Two 14 in., #18 AWG (1.2 mm) color-coded battery
Supervision of AC (primary power), battery leads
(secondary power), Data Bus devices (keypads,
zone expanders, output modules, alternate Three PCB support standoffs (P/N: 30503B)
communication modules, etc.), CPU (Central Ordered Separately
Processing Unit) and telephone line (voltage only). Order the following separately to complete a basic 8-
Automatic system test reports zone installation:
Remote access for programming, diagnostics and Keypad (or keyswitch)
log uploads using the Remote Programming D118 Speaker (for PO 2 in supervised
Software (DSRPS 2000+) configuration) D118 not investigated by UL.
Fire Alarm Verification 12 V, 7 Ah Battery (see Secondary Power on page
Up to 20 programmable outputs on DS7240 (up to 46)
12 on DS7220), including a supervised siren driver
12.0 Listings and Approvals
Skeds (scheduled events)
Fire
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
Household Fire Warning UL985
CSFM
Approved by the California State Fire Marshall
(CSFM) for Control Units (Household) (pending)
Burglary
UL1023 Household
UL365 Police Connect
UL609 Local
UL1076 Proprietary
UL1610 Central Station
UL1635 Digital Alarm
13.0 System Options RF920 Wireless PIR Detector: The RF920 is a
high performance PIR Motion Sensor that uses
DS7445i LED Keypad: The DS7445i is a low- advanced signal processing to provide outstanding
profile, surface-mount, 4-wire LED Keypad. LEDs catch performance and unsurpassed false alarm
represent the first 16 zones of the system. It immunity. It contains an integral RF transmitter that
displays information on various control panel sends a battery report with every transmission and
functions. A built-in sounder is used as an interior transmits a supervisory signal to the control panel
warning device and to annunciate keystroke entries. every 65 minutes.
DS7447i LCD Keypad: The DS7447i is a low RF3224 RF Receiver: The RF3224 RF Receiver
profile, surface-mount, 4-wire LCD Keypad. It is an supervises the use of wireless devices. Up to 2
alphanumeric LCD keypad that displays information RF3224s can be installed on the panel.
on various control panel functions. A built-in
sounder is used as an interior warning device and to RF3332 RF Keyfob: The RF3332 is a two-button
annunciate keystroke entries. This keypad is RF keyfob that can arm and disarm the system. It
required for local programming. can also send a Panic code to the Security
DX2010 Input Expander: The DX2010 is an Input Company if the system is programmed to do so.
Expander that connects directly to the panels Data The LED flashes to indicate signals sent to the
Bus. This module provides an additional 8 input system. The RF3332 has not been investigated
loops for connection to the panel. Up to 5 DX2010s by UL.
can be installed on the DS7240, providing 40 zones; RF3334 RF Keyfob: The RF3334 is a four-button
up to 3 DX2010s can be installed on the DS7220, RF keyfob that can arm and disarm the system. It
providing up to 24 zones. Also available: DX2011 can also send a Panic code to the security company
(DX2010 with D203 Metal Enclosure); DX2012 if the system is programmed to do so. It can also
(DX2010 with AE20 ABS Plastic Enclosure).DX3010 control other devices. The LED flashes to indicate
Octo-Output Expander: The DX3010 provides 8 signals sent to the system. The RF3334 has not
Form C relay outputs. It connects directly to the been investigated by UL.
panels Data Bus. The outputs are fully
RF3341 RF Keypad: The RF3341 is a wireless
programmable. Each output operates individually
keypad that allows system control from a hand-held
from the other seven outputs for complete flexibility.
device. The user can turn the system on and off or
Up to 2 DX3010s can be installed on the DS7240,
operate outputs. Three additional programmable
providing 20 programmable outputs; only 1 DX3010
function keys allow sending optional reports to the
can be installed on the DS7220, providing 12
Central Station from the control panel. A built-in
programmable outputs. Also available: DX3011
sounder and LED indicate when transmissions are
(DX3010 with D203 Metal Enclosure); DX3012
sent. The RF3341 has not been investigated by
(DX3010 with AE20 ABS Plastic Enclosure).
UL.
DX3020 Module: The DX3020 is an X-10 Control
Module. It emulates two DX3010 Octo-Output RF3401 Point Transmitter: The RF3401 Point
Modules. One DX3020 per system allowed. The Transmitter features a supervised sensor loop and a
DX3020 has not been investigated by UL. magnetic reed switch. Use the supervised sensor
loop to monitor any device with a dry contact output.
DX4010 RS-232 Serial Interface Module: The When used with an external magnet assembly the
DX4010 can be used to connect a serial printer, or RF3401 reed switch allows for quick and easy
other serial devices, to the panel. It can also be installation on doors and windows.
used for a remote programming direct connection
using DSRPS 2000+. It connects directly to the Programming Key (PK32): The PK32
panels Data Bus. The DX4010 has not been Programming Key functions much like a blank
investigated by UL. floppy disk and can be used to copy a systems
RF280THS Wireless Smoke Detector: The programming to another system. This key can also
RF280THS is a wireless photoelectric smoke be used as a backup in the event the systems
detector with built-in 135F (57C) heat sensor and programming entries are lost. An on-board LED
85 db sounder. The patented chamber design blinks when the key is active. The PK32 has not
provides superior immunity to false alarms caused been investigated by UL.
by dust. An LED indicator flashes to verify that the DSRPS 2000+ Remote Programming Software:
detector has power and that the smoke sampling DSRPS 2000+ is a Windows based account
circuitry is functioning. management and panel programming utility
RF835 Wireless TriTech PIR/Microwave designed to remotely set up and program the panel
Detector: The RF835 wireless detector uses Control/Communicator. DSRPS 2000+ has not
passive infrared (PIR) technology, microwave (MW) been investigated by UL.
technology, and artificial intelligence to detect
motion. It can provide immunity to false alarms
caused by pets (a dog up to 100 lbs./45 kg; 2 dogs
at 60 lbs./27 kg; up to 10 cats). An integral RF
transmitter transmits low battery and tamper reports,
and regularly sends a supervisory signal to the
control panel. The RF835 has not been
investigated by UL.
14.0 Standby Battery Requirements
14.1 Standby Battery Calculation
Use Table 19 to calculate the standby battery capacity required by NFPA when using the DS7240/DS7220.
A B C
AC Power On AC Power Off In Alarm
Normal Current Minimum Current Maximum Current
Quantity Each Each Each

Model Number Used Unit* Total Unit Unit
DS7240/DS7220 _______ 85 x1 = 85 85 x1 = 85 100 x1 = 100
Keypads
DS7445i _______ 35 x Qty = _____ 35 x Qty = _____ 115 x Qty = _____
DS7447i _______ 100 x Qty = _____ 100 x Qty = _____ 100 x Qty = _____
Accessories
DX2010 _______ 35 x Qty = _____ 35 x Qty = _____ 35 x Qty = _____
DX3010 _______ 10 x Qty = _____ 10 x Qty = _____ 10 x Qty = _____
DX3020 _______ 10 x Qty = _____ 10 x Qty = _____ 10 x Qty = _____
DX4010 _______ 25 x Qty = _____ 25 x Qty = _____ 25 x Qty = _____
RF3224 _______ 30 x Qty = _____ 30 x Qty = _____ 30 x Qty = _____
Sounders connected to PO 2
D118 8
Speaker*** _______ 0 x Qty = _____ 0 x Qty = _____ 330 x Qty = _____
Ratings of other devices in the system which are not shown above:
__________ _______ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____
__________ _______ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____
__________ _______ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____
__________ _______ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____
__________ _______ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____ ____ x Qty = _____
Total A = _____ Total B = _____ Total C = _____
* Currents shown in milliamperes (1 ampere = 1000 milliampere)

** If the column C total exceeds 400 mA (600 mA for non UL applications), a D8132 is required to provide an additional 1400 mA. You
may also use a UL Listed external power supply for this purpose.
*** Not investigated by UL
Table 19: Standby Battery Calculation Table
14.2 Standby Battery Requirements
Household Burglary and Commercial Battery: 4 hours of standby battery capacity required.
Central Station or Local Fire Alarm: 24 hours of standby battery plus 4 minutes of alarm operation required. See Standby
Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications, for more information.
Household Fire Warning Equipment: 24 hours of standby battery plus 4 minutes of alarm operation required. See
Standby Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications, for more information.
14.3 Standby Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications
NFPA 72 Household Fire Warning Equipment: The NFPA Household Fire Warning Equipment Standard requires 24 hours
of standby plus 4 minutes (0.067 hours) of alarm operation at the end of the 24-hour period.
You must use battery ampere hour (Ah) calculations to verify compliance. The formula below includes a 10% contingency
factor for depletion of battery capacity with age.
NFPA 72 Ampere-Hour Calculation Formula
(Total B _____ x 24 hrs) + (Total C x 0.067 hrs) + (10% Contingency) = Total Ah required.
Total Ah requirements must not exceed Ah capacity of batteries.
15.0 Power Supply 15.2.4 Battery Charging Circuit
Float Charge: The float voltage for the battery
15.1 Primary Power
charging circuit is 13.5 to 13.9 VDC at a maximum
15.1.1 Primary (AC) Power Circuit current of 1.4 A.
An 18 VAC, 22 VA internally fused transformer 15.2.5 Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule
(Detection Systems model CX4010) is the primary
See Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule on page
power source. The AC power circuit provides 700 mA
41 for information.
of rectified AC power. The panel reserves 100 mA of
this power for internal operations leaving 600 mA for 15.3 System Status LED
powered devices.
See System Status LED on page 10 for a complete
Transient protectors and spark gaps suppress the description.
circuit from power surges. This suppression relies on
the panels earth ground connection. Make sure you 15.4 External Power Supply
connect the earth ground terminal to a proper ground. When using any external power supply, the
See Connect Earth Ground on page 7. negative (-) output must not be tied to earth
AC Power Failure: The system indicates an AC ground. A ground fault condition will be
power failure when the power at the terminals reported if negative (-) is grounded.
marked 18 VAC is interrupted. Power must be
missing for 120 seconds before the panel The external power supply (not supplied), may be
acknowledges the failure. Power must be used to power 12 volt peripheral initiating devices, but
maintained at those terminals for 120 seconds is not intended to provide power to indicating devices
before the panel acknowledges the restoral of for burglary and fire applications.
power. Burglary Applications: use a UL603 Listed burglar
alarm power supply with an operating voltage range
15.2 Secondary Power of 11.8 to 12.4 VDC for Bank Safe/Vault
15.2.1 Secondary (DC) Power applications (72 hours of standby battery required).
A 12 V, 7 Ah sealed lead-acid rechargeable battery Fire Applications: use a UL1481 Listed power
supplies secondary power for auxiliary and alarm supply operating voltage range of 11.8 to 12.4 VDC
outputs, and powers the system during interruptions for fire applications.
in primary (AC) power.
16.0 Power Outputs
Only use lead acid batteries. The charging
unit is calibrated for lead acid batteries. Do 16.1 Circuit Suppression
not use gel-cell or NiCad batteries. Three self-resetting thermal circuit breakers suppress
the panel from short circuits on both the continuous
To increase battery backup time, connect a larger and programmable power outputs. If the panel is
battery such as a 12 V, 18 Ah battery. programmed for power supervision and a short is
sustained on one of the power outputs, the panel
See below for compatible standby batteries:
transmits a BATTERY LOW or BATTERY MISSING
Power Sonic: PS-1270; PS-12180 report.
YUASA: NP7-12; NPG18-12 One breaker suppresses Auxiliary Power and the
Installers Keypad Connector. A short on one disrupts
15.2.2 Install the Battery the power to the other.
15.2.3 Battery Supervision One breaker suppresses the Alarm Power Output,
When the battery drops to 12.1 VDC, the panel, if (Alrm + Terminal) and one breaker suppresses the
programmed for power supervision, transmits a battery.
BATTERY LOW report. 16.2 Available Power
If the battery is missing or shorted and the panel is 16.2.1 Auxiliary Power
programmed for power supervision, it transmits a
BATTERY MISSING report. Use auxiliary power terminals to power devices
requiring continuous power. See pages 50 and 51 for
When battery voltage returns to 13.0 VDC, the panel, a location and description of these terminals.
if programmed for power supervision, transmits a
BATTERY RESTORAL report. 16.2.2 Installers Keypad Connector
Use the Aux/Data connector to connect an installers
Investigate low battery reports keypad to the panel for programming and diagnostics.
immediately. If primary (AC) power is off See pages 50 and 51 for a location and description of
and the discharge continues, the panel this connector. See Installers Keypad and Installer
becomes inoperative when the battery Mode on page 67 for instructions on using an
voltage drops below 10.2 VDC. installers keypad.
16.2.3 Alarm Power 16.5 Output Wiring
The Alarm Power (Alrm +) terminal provides positive The DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicator has four
12 VDC for Programmable Output 2 (PO 2) when it is on-board programmable outputs labeled PO 1 to PO
configured as a siren driver and PO 1 when it is 4. See Outputs on page 136 for programming
configured as the alarm output. See 50 and 51 for a details.
location and description of this terminal. See On-
board Outputs on page 58 for more information. Programmable Output 2 (PO 2) can be configured as
a supervised siren driver. When programmed as a
16.3 Continuous Power Output siren driver, PO 2 draws power from the Alrm +
16.3.1 Continuous Current Draw terminal. When connected to a 4 horn/speaker, PO
2 draws 380 mA of power. When connected to an 8
The continuous current draw for powered devices horn/speaker, it draws 330 mA of power. Use the
connected to the Aux Power terminals, the Installers appropriate current draw in your total alarm power
Keypad Connector and Outputs PO 1 to PO 4 (when calculation.
programmed for continuous output) are restricted as
follows: Programmable Output 1 (PO 1): PO 1 terminals
can be configured as an alarm power output (short
120 mA for Fire and Combined Fire/Burglary JP2-PO 1 Jumper). The default configuration for
systems Programmable Output 1 makes it a dry contact,
400 mA for UL Burglary systems Normally Open relay with PO 1 Jumper open.
600 mA for other applications (not investigated by Programmable Output 2 (PO 2): PO 2 can be
UL) used with Alarm+ as a supervised siren driver.
Connect an approved 4 or 8 siren. Alternatively,
16.4 Alarm Power PO 2 can sink up to 500 mA 12 VDC.
16.4.1 Available Power Programmable Outputs 3 & 4 (PO 3 & PO 4):
The system combines the 600 mA of primary power Outputs PO 3 and PO 4 can be configured for Alarm
produced by the power supply with the secondary Output. These outputs can sink up to 500 mA 12
power source (the battery) to produce a total of 1.5 A VDC each.
of alarm power at 11.5 to 12.4 VDC. Alarm power is
available at the Alrm + terminal. The panel uses PO 1 PO1 Jumper
through PO 4 to activate Alarm power. See On-board
Outputs on 58 for details.
JP2-PO1
Fire systems are prohibited from using the Select
battery to determine alarm power. Use the R

Y
Fire System Power Formula to calculate G
B
the current available for fire and combined
fire/burglary systems.
Fire System Power Formula Alrm
A
PO1
B
+
L-1
-
+
Use these steps to calculate the current available at
the Alarm Power (Alrm +) terminal for fire and
combined fire/burglary systems:
1. Add together the current draws for all devices Programmable Outputs 1-4
connected to the Aux terminals and the Installers
Keypad connector. This total is the total current Figure 16: On-board Outputs PO 1 PO 4
required for the Normal Standby Condition Fire systems are prohibited from using the
(NSC). battery to determine alarm power. Use the
2. The current available for Normal Standby Fire System Power Formula on page 47 to
Condition (NSC) is 600 mA. Subtract the NSC calculate the current available for fire and
current required calculated in Step 1 from the combined fire/burglary systems.
NSC current available, 600 mA. The difference is
the Alarm Current available the Alrm + terminal Unexpected Output at PO 1 to PO 4: If these
(480 mA maximum). outputs do not provide the alarm output you expect:
In formula format: Check the programming for Programmable Outputs
on page 136 of this manual.
600 mA NSC current required (Step 1) = Alarm
Current available (480 mA max.). Check the Zone Function Configuration section of
this manual on page 121 to verify the zones you are
See Standby Battery Calculation on page 45 for activating are programmed for alarm output.
module/accessory current requirements.
17.0 Telephone 17.6 Called Party Disconnect
17.1 Connections Telephone companies provide called party
disconnect to allow the called party to terminate a
See Connect the Telephone on page 9 for complete call. The called party must go on-hook (hang up) for a
instructions. fixed interval before a dial tone is available for a new
17.2 Registration call. This interval varies with telephone company
equipment. The panel provides called party
The DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicator panels disconnect by adding a 35-second on hook interval to
are registered with the Federal Communication the dial tone detect function. If the panel does not
Commission (FCC) under Part 68, for connection to detect a dial tone in 7 seconds, it puts the phone line
the public telephone system using an RJ31X or on hook for 35 seconds to activate called party
RJ38X jack installed by your local phone company. disconnect, goes off hook and begins a 7-second dial
17.3 Notification tone detect. If no dial tone is detected, the panel dials
the number anyway. Each time the number is dialed,
Do not connect registered equipment to party lines or the panel records this as an attempt.
coin-operated telephones. You must notify the local
Telephone Company and supply them with the 17.7 Communication Failure (Comm Fail)
following information before connecting the panel to The panel routes reports to two routing destinations.
the telephone network. Each of the destinations can be programmed with two
The particular line you are going to connect the phone numbers. See Comm Fail Event and Routing
panel to Dialing Tables on page 164 for details. The numbers
in [ ] are the numbers assigned to panel events. For
Make (Detection Systems) and model (DS7240 or more panel event information, see Panel Events and
DS7220) Reporting Formats on page 167.
FCC registration number: ESVMUL-46531-AL-E The Routing Dialing tables show the circumstances
Ringer equivalence for the panel: 0.1B when Communication Failure Events are created.
When a Comm Fail occurs, the panel responds as
17.4 Dialing Format follows:
You can program the system to use DTMF or pulse 1. Clear (dump) the initiating report and any
dialing. See DTMF/Pulse Dialing on page 73 for pending reports from the dialer buffer for the
programming details. destination where the Comm Fail event occurred.
17.5 Phone Line Fault 2. Create a Comm Fail [69] or AltComm Comm
The panel has a circuit that tests the phone line for Fail [70] report that includes the Destination
voltage. The normal voltage on a telephone line is Number (1 or 2). The Alternate Comm Fail report
approximately 48 VDC (24 VDC for some phone is used when an alternate communications path
systems). The phone line monitor senses trouble is used (SAFECOM for example).
when the voltage drops low enough (between 1 and 3
3. The Comm Fail, Comm Restoral [71],
volts).
Alternate Comm Restore [72] reports
If the panel senses trouble, it starts a phone line
follow the System Status Reports routing.
trouble timer. The timer continues to run as long as
the panel senses trouble. It resets to zero when the 4. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 1 and
panel senses a normal line. If the timer reaches 40 System Status Reports routing is set to
seconds, it begins a phone line trouble response. Destination 2 or set to Destination 2 on
Programming determines what the response is. See Destination 1 fail, then send Comm Fail report.
Phone Line Fault Response Options on page 75 for 5. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 1 and
details.
System Status Reports routing is set to
The panel stops monitoring the phone line during its Destination 1 then send a Comm Restore report
phone line trouble response. If the response includes with the next report for destination 1.
sending a report, the panel does not resume
monitoring until the report is acknowledged or it goes 6. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 2 and
into communication failure. System Status Reports routing is set to
Destination 1, then send Comm Fail report.
Bad line may test OK: The telephone line test
circuit uses the voltage level to test the status of the 7. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 2 and
phone line. In some instances, a given telephone System Status Reports routing is set to
line may be out of service without affecting the Destination 2 then send a Comm Restore report
voltage on the line. The phone line monitor cannot with the next report for destination 2.
recognize this trouble condition.
8. If a Comm Fail report is sent successfully to the
other destination, a Comm Restore event should
be sent when there is a successful
communication on the failed destination.
17.8 Ground Start
Some telephone systems require a momentary
ground input to initiate a dial tone. To interface with a
ground start system, you must wire PO 1 as shown in
Figure 17. The PO 1 Jumper must be open. Program
PO 1 for Ground Start. See Outputs on page 136 for
programming instructions.
You must connect a proper earth ground

reference to the earth ground terminal.
Ground Start is not intended for use in Fire

or combined Fire/Burglary applications.
JP1
AUXILIARY
Installer
R1
PO1 Jumper Open
JP2-PO1 T1
Select
R T
Y
G
B
Alrm PO1 + -
Figure 17: PO 1 Ground Start Connections
Part III: Panel Wiring and Setup
18.0 Control Terminal Wiring
Before servicing, remove all power including the transformer, battery and phone line. A complete functional
test must be performed after any modifications have been made.
Incorrect connections may result in damage to the equipment and/or personal injury.
All external connections are inherently Class 2 power-limited. All wiring in the panel enclosure must be power-
limited.
System Delay Chart

Circuit Control Unit Smoke Detector
(Zone) Delay - Sec Model Delay - Sec
1 16 sec (a)
(a) The delay (power-up) (start-up) time marked on the
installation wiring diagram of the smoke detector or
Do not connect to a receptacle on the installed smoke detector(s) is to be used.
controlled by a switch. Do not share
IMPORTANT
with other equipment.
Auxilliary Powered Devices 11.5 to 12.4 VDC. Installer Switch Auxiliary Connector
With 7.0Ah battery, Disables arming, reports Connection pins for
Use a CX4010 UL Listed 120mA for 24 hrs for Fire and Combined Fire/Burglary, and relays. Close for local
programming PK32 Programming
Class 2 Transformer. 18 400mA for 4 hrs for UL Burglary. Key.
VAC 22 VA 60 Hz. 600mA for other* JP1
Earth Ground AUXILIARY
Installer
Data (Green)
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Data (Yellow) The Power Supply provides a maximum of 600 mA for the Control Panel
and All Accessory Devices. For System loading, See Standby Battery Calculation in
Reference Guide P/N: 49720. Requirements for battery standby time may reduce allowable output.
Black (Aux Pwr -) CAUTION: See Reference Guide for power requirements relating to terminals [Alrm+] and [+Aux].
Red (Aux Pwr +)
Keypads, expanders, Alternate Communications Connector R Red (R)
Connector for alternate communications
printer modules & source. Available for future release.
communication modules R1 Gray (R1)
(up to 19 total devices)
Note 1: A supervisory alarm output module must be used on these T1 Brown (T1)
P P P P terminals for household fire applications. Premises
Note 2: Jumper JP2-PO1 must be in place for connection to NAC Phone
S S S S R Installers Keypad or other powered alarm devices. T Green (T)
Y Connector
A B C D G Close Installer Switch PO1 Terminals can be configured as an alarm
B to program panel. power output. JP2-PO1 Jumper must be closed.
Incoming
Supervised with 2.2 k Phone
EOL resistor (P/N: 47819). Line
Typical initiating devices
are Door Contacts, NO/NC, Alrm PO1 + -
Floor Mats, Motion
Sensors, Glass Break + 1 - 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Detectors, etc.
Outputs PO3 &
Max. charging current is 1.1 A. PO4 can sink up to
BATTERY: Replace every 3 to 500 mA 12 VDC.
5 years with a sealed lead acid
battery such as model P334 (12
V, 7 Ah, 6 cells). For additional
power, see standby battery
calculation table. Output PO2 can be used with Powered sensor loop suitable for
Alrm + as a supervised siren 2-wire smoke detectors. 2.2 k Supervised Loops (L2-L8)
Recommended Battery driver. Connect an approved EOL P/N EOL resistor required at End of Line. Open: 7.7 to 14.0 VDC
Manufacturers:
POWER SONIC: PS-1270, PS-12180
4 or 8 siren. Alternatively, 25899 For compatible detectors, see Normal: 6.3 to 7.3 VDC
YUASA: NP7-12, NPG18-12 PO2 can sink up to 500 mA Technical Service Note P/N: 49722. Short: 0.0 to 6.0 VDC
12 VDC. UL Panel Compatibility Identifier =
B. Also available for 4-wire smoke 2.2 k resistor (P/N: 47819)
Battery Capacity:
Minimum: 5.0 Ah Required at End of Line
Maximum: 18.0 Ah Use compatible NAC such as Wheelock MB-G6-12-R. detectors such as Detection
Systems DS284TH.
400 mA for Fire & Combined Fire/Burglary; 1500 mA for
UL Burglary; 1850 mA for other (not investigated by UL).
Applies to all 4 outputs combined.
Figure 18: DS7240/DS7220 Control Terminal Connections
PART III: PANEL WIRING AND SETUP
See Table 20 for a brief description of each terminal/connector on the panels PCB.
Term Silkscreen Label Description

1,2 18 VAC 18 V, 22 VA; up to 50 ft. (15.3 m), #18 AWG (1.2 mm), Stranded.
3 Earth Ground Symbol Earth Ground.
4 Data, Grn (Green) Data Bus data on Terminals 4 & 5. Panel supports up to 1,000 ft. (305 m) of #22 AWG (0.8 mm)
wire on these terminals (any configuration).
5 Data, Yel (Yellow)
6,7 Aux Power 12 VDC (-) Terminals 6-9 are auxiliary power. 600 mA. Include any programmable outputs (PO 1 to PO 4) not
configured for alarm output. PTC suppressed.
8,9 Aux Power 12 VDC (+)
JP3 Aux/Data (RYGB) 4-pin connector to Data Bus and auxiliary power. Use to connect an installer keypad for keypad
programming.
Red (Bat +) Battery (+) spade.
Black (Bat -) Battery (-) spade.
10 PO 4 Programmable Outputs 3 & 4, up to 500 mA (-). Include in Aux Power calculations for all except
Alarm output functions. PTC suppressed.
11 PO 3
12 PO 2 Programmable Output 2. 500 mA (-).Include in Aux Power calculations for all except Alarm
output functions. Supervised for Horn/Speaker alarm function. PTC suppressed.
13 Alrm + Alarm power. Up to 1,850 mA. PTC suppressed. Provides power for supervised siren driver (PO
2) and Alarm Output (PO 1, A).
14 PO 1, A Jumper sets PO 1 terminals A (14) and B (15) for dry Form A contact or for Alarm Output
15 PO 1, B (using PO 1, A as negative (-) terminal).
16 L-1 (+) Positive (+) terminal of powered loop. Supports up to 15 DS282THS smoke detectors (D132A
Reversing Module required). PTC suppressed.
17 L-1 (-) Negative (-) terminal of powered loop.
18 Com Common for Sensor Loop 2.
19 L-2 Sensor Loop 2 input. Wire length for Sensor Loops 2 to 8 are limited only by the resistance on the
loop and potential EMI problems. Resistance must be < 100 with EOL resistor shorted and
detection devices connected.
20 L-3 Sensor Loop 3.
21 Com Common for Sensor Loops 3 & 4.
29 T Tip of telephone line.
30 T1 Tip of house (premises) phones.
31 R1 Ring of house (premises) phones.
32 R Ring of telephone line.
JP2, PO 1 Select Configures PO 1 for Form A relay or Alarm Output.
Auxiliary Auxiliary Module and/or Programming Key (PK32) Header.
Installer Installer Switch. Close switch for keypad/local programming
Table 20: Quick Reference Terminal Descriptions
All wiring except battery terminal and primary AC power is power-limited. Primary AC and battery wires must
be separated from other wires by at least in. (6.4 mm) and tied to prevent movement. Primary AC and battery
wiring cannot share the same conduit, conduit fittings or conduit knockouts with other wiring. See Figure 19.
JP1
AUXILIARY
Installer
R1
JP2-PO1 T1
Battery wires Select
R T
Y
G
B
Output/zone
wires
Alrm PO1 + -
Maintain in. (6.4 mm) minimum distance

To enclosure knockout between power/battery wires and other wires.
Secure using tie-wraps or similar devices.
To enclosure knockout
Figure 19: Enclosure Wire Routing
19.0 On-board Sensor Loops 19.2 Two-wire Smoke Detector Configuration

19.1 Description Sensor Loop 1 can be used as a fire zone for
connection of two-wire smoke detectors. This zone
The panel provides eight on-board sensor loops. cannot be used for zone doubling and must be
Each sensor loop functions independently and does terminated with a 2.21 k EOL resistor (P/N: 25899).
not interfere with the operation of the others. The on-
board sensor loops can be configured as follows: See Technical Service Note P/N: 49722 for
compatible smoke detectors and the maximum
Single zone configuration with a 2.2 k End of Line number of devices allowed on Zone 1.
(EOL) resistor (default)
DS7240
Single zone configuration with 1 k EOL resistor
Single zone configuration with a 3.65 k EOL
resistor L-1 + L-1 -
Doubled zone configuration that utilizes two

resistors per sensor loop, one 2.2 k and one 3.65
k . The panel monitors two zones per sensor loop
in the doubled configuration, making 15 on-board
zones available (Zone 1 cannot be doubled) See
Doubled Zone Configuration on 54 for more
information.
The panel monitors the sensor loops for normal, 2.21 k
shorted, or open conditions. Zone programming EOL
Resistor
determines how the panel responds to those
conditions. See Zone Function Configuration on
page 121 for zone programming options. Figure 20: Typical 2-wire Smoke Detector Wiring
The panel ignores sensor loops (both On-Board and
Off-Board) for 60 seconds after power up to ensure
that any connected devices have stabilized.
19.3 Four-wire Smoke Detector Configuration 19.5 Single Zone Configuration (Loops 2-8)
A four-wire smoke detector can be connected to any When wiring the on-board sensor loops in the single zone
of the panels on-board sensor loops (L-1 to L-8). A configuration, install the resistor of the appropriate value (2.2 k
four-wire smoke detector requires the use of a relay and 3.65 k are provided) at the far end of the sensor loop
module to interrupt power to the detector in order for to provide a reference for supervision. You can connect dry
the detector to reset. contact sensing devices in series (Normally-Closed) and/or in
parallel (Normally-Open) to any of these loops (see Figure 23).
The output controlling the relay must be configured as
Output Function 1, 13 Fire Verification (see Outputs 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
on page 136 for more information). L2 to L8

ZONE INPUT
TERMINAL
If Sensor Loops 2-8 (L-2 to L-8) are used, make
positive (+) connections to L-X + (where X = Loop #) 2.2 k
COMMON
and negative (-) connections to the loops COM NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS
terminal. EOL Resistor P/N: 47819
ZONE INPUT
TERMINAL
Remove
Jumper Plug
from JP2 COMMON
COMBINATION: NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS
AND NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTS
Figure 23: Single Zone Sensor Loop Wiring

JP2-PO1
Select
R
Loop resistance limits the number of Normally-Open
Y and/or Normally-Closed detection devices that each
G
B sensor loop can supervise. The total resistance for
wire length and contacts, minus the end-of-line
resistor, must not exceed 100 .
Alrm PO1
+ A B + L-1 -
You can determine the condition of the on-board
Aux (+)
Aux (-) sensor loops in the default configuration (single zone,
DS250 w/
Smoke
Detector 2.2 k end-of-line resistor) by measuring the voltage
MB4W Base 2.21 k across the zone input terminal and one of the
EOL
Resistor common terminals. The sensor loops must be
EOL200 EOL Relay connected and the 2.2 k end-of-line resistor in
End-of-Line Module
place.
Figure 21: Typical 4-wire Smoke Detector Wiring EOL Open Normal Loop Shorted
Resistor Loop Loop
19.4 Sensor Loop 1 Configuration
2.21 k Greater than Greater than Less than
Sensor Loop 1 can be used for applications other
7.7 VDC 6.3 VDC, less 6.0 VDC
than a fire zone. This zone cannot be used for zone
than 7.3 VDC
doubling and must be terminated with a 2.21 k EOL
resistor (P/N: 25899). 3.65 k Greater than Greater than Less than
9.1 VDC 7.7 VDC, less 7.3 VDC
Loop resistance limits the number of Normally-Open than 8.6 VDC
and/or Normally-Closed detection devices that each
sensor loop can supervise. The total resistance for 1.0 k Greater than Greater than Less than
wire length and contacts, minus the end-of-line 5.0 VDC 3.8 VDC, less 3.5 VDC
resistor, must not exceed 100 . than 4.7 VDC
100 OHMS MAXIMUM Table 21: EOL States

L1
+
2.21 k EOL Resistor
(P/N: 25899)
-
COMBINATION: NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS
AND NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTS
Figure 22: Sensor Loop 1 Wiring
19.6 Doubled Zone Configuration 20.1 DX2010 Input Expander
When wiring the on-board sensor loops in the doubled zone 20.1.1 DX2010 Overview
configuration, install the resistors of the appropriate value (2.2
You can connect up to five DX2010 Input Expanders
k and 3.65 k ) as shown in Figure 24.
to the panel. In the single zone configuration, each
(Zone Doubling not available for Sensor Loop 1) DX2010 adds eight zones to the system. In the
Common L-2 to L-8 doubled zone configuration, each DX2010 adds 16
zones to the system. See Locations on page 115
Onboard Locations Onboard Locations for information on how the DX2010 sensor loops are
10 to 16 2 to 8
assigned to zone locations.
Open for alarm Open for alarm
otherwise otherwise Current Draw without Aux Output Terminals:
Normally Closed Normally Closed
35 mA Standby
Each loop is monitored Current Draw with Aux Output Terminals: 135
as a separate zone. mA maximum with connected accessories.
Review Power Outputs on page 41 to be sure you
2.2 k 3.65 k provide enough power for the Input Expanders and
any other powered devices you connect to the
Figure 24: On-board Doubled Zone Sensor Loop Wiring panel.
19.7 On-board Loop Response Time Refer to the DX2010 Installation Guide (P/N: 49533)
for complete installation, addressing and operating
The panel scans both on and off-board sensor loops instructions.
per Zone Function configuration. See Zone Function
Configuration on page 121. 20.1.2 DX2010 Installation
The panel scans sensor loops for pulses (electrically Failure to follow the mounting instructions
off normal events). The Zone Function determines the in this manual may result in damage to the
Loop Scan Time for each sensor loop. The panel module.
scans at either 50 ms (on-board zones only) or 160
ms (on- and off-board zones). This scan rate is user-
selectable. The DX2010 contains static-sensitive
The scan rates for off-board sensor loops are components and must be handled with
determined by the zone expanders they are care. Follow anti-static procedures when
associated with. handling this module.
The DX2010 can be mounted in a D203 Enclosure.
Detection Systems recommends using the Mount the module in the enclosure as shown in
default settings for On-board Loop Scan Figure 25.
Time.
20.0 Off-board Sensor Loops

You can expand the number of zones on the panel by
connecting modules to the panels Data Bus. Use the
DX2010 Input Expander to add wired zones. Use a
compatible Premises RF Receiver to add wireless
zones. See Locations on page 115 for a description
of the relationship between locations and zones.
The panel ignores sensor loops (both On-Board and
Off-Board) for 60 seconds after power up to ensure Install the
module in
that any connected devices have stabilized. the D203
housing
Figure 25: Installing the DX2010 in D203 Enclosure

You can also install the DX2010 in the control panels
enclosure, which can hold up to 5 DX2010 modules
(three on interior side walls of enclosure and two on
back wall of enclosure). See Figure 26 and Figure 27.
Control/Communicator PCB
20.1.3 DX2010 to Panel Data Bus Connections
Refer to the following Data Bus wire length
requirements:
Panel to DX2010 (DX2010 Aux Output not used
or External Power Supply used): 1,000 ft. (305
m) using #22 AWG (0.8 mm); 2,000 ft. (610 m)
using #18 AWG (1.2 mm).
Panel to DX2010 (DX2010 Aux Output
DX2010 Side supplying 100 mA): 100 ft. (30 m) using #22
Mounting Locations
AWG (0.8 mm); 250 ft. (76 m) using #18 AWG (1.2
mm).
All devices connected to the terminals must share the
wire lengths as specified above.
When wiring the DX2010, do not use twisted pair or
shielded cable. Do not share with keypad lines. The
maximum distance may be limited to 250 ft. (76 m) if
the Aux Output is used. See DX2010 Auxiliary
Output Connections for details.
Enclosure Wall
Connect the panels Data and Aux Power terminals to
the DX2010 as shown in Figure 28.
DX2010 DX2010
Terminals Mounting Hardware
(supplied w/ DX2010)
DS7240
Figure 26: Installing the DX2010 in Panel Enclosure

+OUT- TMPR R B G Y 1 COM
Control/Communicator PCB
Green (Data)
Yellow (Data)
Black (-)
Red (+)
NOTE: You may use either Aux

Power (-) or 12 VDC (+) terminal
when connecting devices to the R
DS7240. Y
DX2010 DX2010 G
B
Terminals Terminals
Figure 28: Wiring the DX2010 to the Panel
Optional mounting locations for DX2010

inside Control/Communicator Enclosure
Corner of
DX2010 PCB
Mounting Enclosure
Clip Standoff
Mounting Clip Assembly
Figure 27: Optional DX2010 Enclosure Mounting Locations
If you need to power the DX2010 with an external 12 If the DX2010s Aux Output (+Out-
VDC power supply, wire it as shown in Figure 29. terminals) is used as an auxiliary power
source, the DX2010s R and B wires
must be home-run to either the panel or
DX2010
DS7240
to an available power supply. Do not use a
Daisy-chain wire configuration. See
Figure 31.
20.1.5 DX2010 Tamper Input Connections
Each DX2010 module provides an input for tamper
devices. The tamper input is in addition to the zone
Green (Data)
sensor loops. Supervising an enclosure tamper does
Yellow (Data) not consume a zone. A fault on the tamper input is
reported as a tamper event to which the Data Bus
Black (-)
address the DX2010 is set.
NOTE: You may use either
Red (+) Aux Power (-) terminal when The tamper output may monitor external Normally
connecting devices to the Closed (N/C) tamper switches when wired as shown
DS7240.
in Figure 31. The tamper circuit must be closed to
(+) (-) provide proper DX2010 tamper supervision to the
R
External 12 VDC Y panel. Do not use an EOL resistor.
Power Supply G
B
The DX2010 also provides an on-board tamper
switch for use if the DX2010 is installed inside the
AE20 plastic enclosure. The cover tamper spring is
supplied with the DX2010.
Figure 29: DX2010 External Power Supply Connections The on-board tamper switch cannot be used if the
DX2010 is mounted inside the panels enclosure
When using any external power supply, the (wire the tamper input as shown in Figure 32 if
negative (-) output must not be tied to earth installed in the control panels enclosure).
ground. A ground fault condition will be
reported if negative (-) is grounded. If neither the tamper input nor the on-board tamper
switch is used, a wire jumper must be placed as
20.1.4 DX2010 Auxiliary Output Connections shown in Figure 32.
The DX2010 can provide 12 VDC at up to 100 mA Use either the tamper input or the on-board tamper
from the Auxiliary Output (-) OUT (+) terminals to switch. Both cannot be used simultaneously.
power external devices such as motion detectors. See
Figure 30.
On-board DX2010
tamper switch
DX2010
Black (-) Figure 31: DX2010 Tamper Input Wiring

Motion Detectors,
Photobeams, etc.
Red (+)
On-board DX2010
Figure 30: DX2010 Auxiliary Output Connections tamper switch
When using the DX2010s auxiliary output,

the maximum distance between the panel
and the DX2010 must be limited to 250 ft.
(76 m) when using #18 AWG (1.2 mm) wire,
or 100 ft. (30 m) when using #22 AWG (0.8 +OUT- TMPR R B G Y 1 COM
mm) wire. The maximum distance from the
DX2010 output terminals and the remotely
powered devices (PIRs, smoke detectors,
etc.) must be limited to 50 ft. (15 m) for #22
AWG (0.8 mm) or 100 ft. (30 m) for #18 Figure 32: DX2010 Wire Jumper
AWG (1.2 mm) wire.
20.1.6 DX2010 Sensor Loop (Zone) Connections 20.1.7 DX2010 Address Programming
The DX2010 supports both Normally Open and Each DX2010 module connected to the panel must
Normally Closed contacts in the standard sensor have its address jumpers set to the addresses shown
loop configuration. It supports Normally Closed in Table 24.
contacts in the doubled sensor loop configuration.
Location Standard Doubled
The DX2010s Loop Response Time is # Sensor Loop* Sensor Loop**
fixed at 150 ms. The Loop Response Time
setting in Zone Function Configuration 1 to 8 DBus Addr 101
has no effect on the DX2010s setting. 9 to 16 DBus Addr 102 DBus Addr 106
17 to 24 DBus Addr 103 DBus Addr 106
The DX2010 is not designed for use with
two-wire smoke detectors. DS7240 25 to 32 DBus Addr 104 DBus Addr 107
only
33 to 40 DBus Addr 105 DBus Addr 107
For standard sensor loop configuration, wire as
shown in Figure 33. Table 24: DX2010 Address Settings
* For Standard Sensor Loop, set Locations Device
parameter to 2. Set DX2010 Address as shown in
Table 22. See Locations on page 115 for
programming details.
** For Doubled Sensor Loop, set Locations Device
1 COM 2 3 COM 4 5 COM 6 7 COM 8
parameter to 3. Set DX2010 Address as shown in
Table 23.
See Section Locations on page 115 for
Use 2.2 k EOL (P/N: 47819)

DX2010 Programming Scenario
You want to use a DX2010 sensor loop for panel
Figure 33: DX2010 Single Loop Configuration Zone Location 9. You must connect a DX2010 and
For doubled sensor loop configuration, wire as shown in Figure set its address DIP switches to 102.
34. Any time the address DIP switches are
Input changed, you must cycle the power to the
Terminals
Common 1 to 8 module OFF and then ON for the changes
to take effect.
DX2010 Inputs DX2010 Inputs
(See Table 4) (See Tables 4 & 5)
Open for alarm Open for alarm
otherwise otherwise Set the address DIP switches as shown in Table 22.
Normally Closed Normally Closed See Figure 35 for proper DX2010 DIP switch
configuration.
Each loop is monitored

as a separate zone. DX2010 DIP Switch Settings
DIP Switches S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
3.65 k 2.2 k
Module 32 16 8 4 2 1
Figure 34: DX2010 Doubled Loop Configuration Address
101 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
DX2010 Sensor Loop 102 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
EOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 103 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
3.65 k 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 104 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
2.2 k 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 105 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Table 22: DX2010 Address 106 106 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
107 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
DX2010 Sensor Loop
EOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 25: DX2010 DIP Switch Setting
3.65 k 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ON
2.2 k 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Example: ON
Module Address 102 OFF
Table 23: DX2010 Address 107 (DS7240 only)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 35: DX2010 DIP Switch Configuration
20.1.8 DX2010 Status LED Short PO 1 Jumper
with Jumper Plug
One flash per second indicates normal operation.
LED steady ON can indicate any of the following:
JP2-PO1
G wire is not connected or there is a Select
R
communications problem between the Y
panel and the DX2010. G
B
No locations (zones) are assigned to the
DX2010 with this address. See
Locations on page 115 for details. Alrm
+ A
PO1
B
+
L-1
-
DX2010 address is not set correctly. (+) (-)

LED OFF indicates that there is no power to the
module.
Status LED PO 1 Wiring (with PO 1 Jumper shorted)
DIP switches
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
Alrm PO1 + -
+ A B L-1
(+) (+)
(-)
Figure 36: DX2010 Status LED Location
(+) (-)
DC Power Source
21.0 On-board Outputs
PO 1 Dry Contact Wiring (without PO 1 Jumper)
There are four on-board programmable outputs on the
panel (PO 1 to PO 4).
Programmable Output 2 (PO 2) can be configured as
a supervised siren driver. See Global Output
Configuration on page 135 for programming
instructions. When programmed as a siren driver, PO Alrm PO1 + -
+ A B L-1
2 draws power from the Alrm + terminal. When
connected to a 4 horn/speaker, PO 2 draws 380 (+)
mA of power. When connected to an 8
horn/speaker, it draws 330 mA of power. Use the
appropriate current draw in your total alarm power PO 1 Positive Alarm Trigger Wiring
calculation.
Figure 37: PO 1 Wiring
Programmable Output 1 (PO 1): PO 1 terminals
can be configured as an alarm power output (short
JP2-PO 1 Jumper). The default configuration for
Programmable Output 1 makes it a dry contact,
Normally Open relay with PO 1 Jumper open. See
Figure 37 for details.
Programmable Output 2 (PO 2): Output PO 2 can 22.2 DX3010 Octo-Output Expander
be used with Alarm+ as a supervised siren driver.
22.2.1 DX3010 Overview
Connect an approved 4 or 8 siren. Alternatively,
PO 2 can sink up to 500 mA 12 VDC. See Figure 38 The DX3010 Octo-Output Expander allows you to
for details. add outputs to your system in groups of eight. You
can add up to two DX3010 Octo-Output Expanders
Programmable Outputs 3 & 4 (PO 3 & PO 4): to the panel. Combining the four on-board
Outputs PO 3 and PO 4 can be configured for Alarm programmable outputs with two DX3010 Octo-
Output. These outputs can sink up to 500 mA 12 Output Expanders makes a total of 20
VDC each. See Figure 38 for details. programmable outputs available on the DS7240 and
Power is restricted for fire and combined up to 12 available on the DS7220. Review Power
fire/burglary systems. Use the Fire System Outputs on page 41 to be sure you provide enough
Power Formula on page 47 to calculate the power for the Octo-Output Expanders and any other
current available for fire and combined powered devices you connect to the panel.
fire/burglary systems. You can assign any of the programmable output
functions to the Octo-Output Expanders individual
If outputs PO 1 through PO 4 do not provide the alarm
outputs separately. See Outputs on page 136 for
output you expect:
Check the programming for Programmable Outputs
in Outputs on page 136. The DX3010 relay outputs are not
supervised and cannot be used in fire or
Check Zone Function Configuration on page 121 combined fire/burglary installations for
to verify the zones you are activating are primary indicating devices.
programmed for alarm output.
Current Draw: 10 mA Standby plus 40 mA for

each energized output (relay) for a total of 330 mA
maximum with all eight outputs energized.
JP2-PO1
Select Refer to the DX3010 Installation Guide (P/N: 49529)
R for complete installation, addressing and operating
Y
G
instructions.
B
22.2.2 DX3010 Configuration
Outputs may activate when setting the
Alrm
+ A
PO1
B
+
L-1
- DX3010s address DIP switches,
programming the panel, resetting the panel
(-) (+)
or applying power to the panel. Disconnect
equipment connected to outputs when
performing these functions.
Figure 38: PO 2 - PO 4 Wiring 22.2.3 DX3010 Relay Outputs
If PO 2 is configured as a supervised siren Each DX3010 output provides a Form C dry contact
driver (in combination with the Alrm + rated for 5.0 A at 28 VDC. Normally Open, Common,
terminal), you must connect a 4 or 8 and Normally Closed terminals are available for each
siren/speaker to PO 2 to clear the relay output. When an individual output is activated,
siren/speaker supervision trouble. there is continuity between the Normally Open and
Common terminals. When the output is not activated,
22.0 Off-board Outputs there is continuity between the Normally Closed and
22.1 Overview Common terminals.
You can expand the total number of DS7240

programmable outputs to 20 using the DX3010
Octo-Output Expander (two required for 20 outputs)
or DX3020 X-10 Control Module. The total number
of outputs on the DS7220 can be expanded to 12
using one DX3010 or one DX3020. Instructions for
the DX3010 Octo-Output Expander are included in
this manual (as well as with the module). The
DX3020 Module emulates two DX3010 Expanders.
DX3020 instructions are included with the DX3020.
22.2.4 DX3010 Installation Alternatively, you can mount the DX3010 remotely in
You can install the DX3010 in the panel enclosure its own D203 enclosure. See Figure 40.
with the mounting hardware supplied with the
DX3010. See Figure 39.
DS7240 PCB
JP1
AUXILIARY
Installer
R1
JP2-PO1 T1
Select
R T
Y
G
B
Alrm PO1 + -
Install the
module in
the D203
DX3010 Side housing
Mounting Locations
Figure 40: Installing the DX3010 in D203 Enclosure

Distance from the panel is determined by the total
combined wire length of all devices (including
keypads) connected to the panels Data Bus
terminals. The combined wire length must not exceed
1,000 ft. (305 m) using #22 AWG (0.8 mm) wire.
Enclosure Wall
22.2.5 DX3010 to Panel Data Bus Connections
Refer to Table 26 for Data Bus wire length
requirements.
DX3010 If the DX3010 is to be installed far from the
Terminals Mounting Hardware
(supplied w/ DX3010) control panel, the control panel cannot be
used to power the DX3010. An external
power supply must be used. See Table 26
for external power supply connections.
Power #22 AWG #18 AWG
Figure 39: Installing the DX3010 in Panel Enclosure Source (0.8 mm) (1.2 mm)
Panel to Panel 40 ft. (12.2 m) 80 ft. (24.4 m)
DX3010
Panel to External 1,000 ft. (305 m) 2,000 ft. (610 m)
DX3010 Power
Supply 40 ft. (12.2 m) 80 ft. (24.4 m)
External
Power
Supply to
DX3010
Table 26: DX3010 Wire Lengths
DS7240/DS7220 When using any external power supply, the
negative (-) output must not be tied to earth
DX3010 ground. A ground fault condition will be
reported if negative (-) is grounded.
22.2.6 DX3010 Address Programming
Each DX3010 module connected to the panel must
Y Yellow have its own address DIP switches set to either
Green
G Green address shown in Table 27.
Yellow
B Black
Output # Data Bus Address
R Red Black
5 to 12 Data Bus Address 150
13 to 20 Data Bus Address 151
Red
Table 27: DX3010 Addresses
NOTE: You may use
either Aux Power (-) or Any time the address DIP switches are
12 VDC (+) terminal R changed, you must cycle the power to the
when connecting devices Y
to the DS7240/DS7220. G module OFF and then ON for the changes
B to take effect.
NC C NO
8
Set the address DIP switches as shown in Table 28.
Output Activated State DN indicates that the DIP switch is CLOSED
(Down); UP indicates that the DIP switch is OPEN
NC C NO
(Up). See Figure 43 for DX3010 DIP switch
configuration.
Data Bus DX3010 DIP Switches
Output De-activated State Address 1 2 4 8 16 MODE
150 UP UP UP UP UP DN
NC C NO
151 DN UP UP UP UP DN
Table 28: DX3010 Address DIP Switch Settings
Figure 41: Wiring the DX3010 to the Panel
Example:
If you need to power the DX3010 from an external Module Address 150
power supply, connect it to the power supply and the
panel. See External Power Supply on page 46 for
OPEN = = Switch OPEN (Up)
external power supply restrictions.
DS7240/DS7220
1 2 3 4 5 6 = = Switch CLOSED (Down)
DX3010
Aux Power (-) terminal when
connecting devices to the
DS7240/DS7220. Figure 43: DX3010 DIP Switch Configuration
Y Yellow
Green
G Green
Yellow
B Black
R Black
R
Y
+ - G
B
External 12 VDC
NC C NO Power Supply
8
Figure 42: DX3010 External Power Supply Connections
23.0 Arming Devices Jumper Plug ON Jumper Plug OFF
(covers both pins)
23.1 Overview
or or
Keypads, maintained or momentary contact
keyswitches, premises RF arming devices or any
combination are used to arm and disarm areas. The
DS7240 may contain up to four areas (up to two Figure 44: Jumper Plug Configuration
areas in the DS7220) that can be armed and 23.2.3 Keypad Installation
disarmed individually.
Consult the DS7445i/DS7447i Installation Guide (P/N:
23.2 Keypads 49205) for complete installation instructions. Keypads
23.2.1 Keypad Overview connect to the panel in parallel as shown in Figure 45.
DS7240/DS7220
A Detection Systems keypad is a 4-wire Data Bus
device used to arm and disarm areas, annunciate
complete system status, initiate system tests, and
control many functions of the security system.
Terminal Strip
The panel can supervise up to eight wired keypads
and 4 RF keypads. The panel transmits a DBus Green
Missing [125] report if it loses communication with a Yellow

+12 VDC Red
wired supervised keypad. RF keypads are shown as Black
Com
missing by Data Bus address. Data In
SYSTEM FAULT appears in any keypad with text Data Out
display capability that loses communication with the

panel. A system trouble appears at all other keypads Power (-) or 12 VDC (+) terminal
connected to the system. when connecting devices to the R
DS7240/DS7220. Y
G
See System Options on page 44 for a summary of B
the keypads that are compatible with the panel.

DS7445i/DS7447i Keypad
See Keypads on page 110 for complete hard-wired
keypad programming details.
See RF Keypads on page 153 for complete wirelss Figure 45: Wiring a Keypad to the Panel
keypad programming details. See Table 30 for DS7240/DS7220 Data Bus to Keypad wire
23.2.2 Keypad Address Programming length requirements.
#22 AWG #18 AWG
Addresses are assigned by setting jumper pins.
(0.8 mm) (1.2 mm)
Keypads 1 to 8 are assigned to Data Bus Addresses
1 to 8. DS7240/DS7220 to Keypad 1,000 ft. 2,000 ft.
(305 m) (610 m)
Table 29 shows the correct address setting for each
keypad address. See Figure 44 for correct jumper DS7240/DS7220 to Keypad 1,000 ft. 2,000 ft.
plug orientation. using an External Power Supply (305 m) (610 m)
Keypad Address Pins Table 30: Keypad Wire Lengths
DBus 1 2 4 8 16 MODE If an external power supply is used, follow the lengths
Address as shown in Table 30.
0* OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF See Power Outputs on page 41 to determine the
total power output requirements for your system. You
1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
may need to add one or more external power supplies
2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON for the number of keypads you want to use. Figure 46
3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON shows an external power supply powering a keypad in
a stand-alone configuration
4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
For UL certificated accounts, use a UL
6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON Listed power supply.
7 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
See External Power Supply on page 46 for external
8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
power supply restrictions.
Table 29: Keypad Address Pin Settings
* Address 0 is reserved for the installers keypad. This
keypad is not intended for permanent installation and
should remain on-premises for future programming
sessions. See Installers Keypad and Installer Mode
on page 67 for more information.
Figure 46 shows the common from the external power Maintained Keyswitch
supply connected to both the keypads common and
the common on the panel. Common
A stand-alone power supply powering any device Open on
2.2 k Circuit
connected to the panel must also be connected to the
Arms Area
Aux (Aux negative) terminal on the panel.
Zone Input
DS7240/DS7220

connecting devices to the Momentary Keyswitch
Terminal Strip DS7240/DS7220.
Common
Green
Yellow 2.2 k Short on Circuit

+12 VDC Toggles Arming State
Com Black
Data In Zone Input
Data Out
Red
Figure 47: Keyswitches
(+) (-)
23.3.4 Keyswitch Operation
R
Y Arming/Disarming
External 12 VDC G
B
Power Supply
The panel offers a wide variety of keyswitch arming
DS7445i/DS7447i Keypad options. See page 126 for keyswitch arming
configuration options.
Silencing Alarms
Figure 46: Keypad External Power Supply Connections
Momentary Keyswitch: To silence alarms (stop
When using any external power supply, the Alarm output), operate the keyswitch. If the area is
negative (-) output must not be tied to earth armed, operating the keyswitch to silence the alarm
ground. A ground fault condition will be also disarms the area. If the area is disarmed,
reported if negative (-) is grounded. operating a momentary keyswitch to silence the
alarm does not arm the area.
23.3 Keyswitch
Maintained Keyswitch: If the area is armed, turn
23.3.1 Keyswitch Overview the keyswitch to the disarmed position. The panel
You can connect a maintained or momentary contact disarms the area and silences the alarm. If the area
arming station (UL Listed security device keyswitch) is disarmed, turn the keyswitch to the armed
to master arm/disarm any of the areas in the system. position (the panel does not arm) and then return to
The keyswitch is connected to an on-board or off- the disarmed position.
board zones sensor loop. Outputs can be
programmed to activate arming status LEDs for
24.0 Data (Option) Bus Devices
keyswitch arming stations. 24.1 Overview
See Outputs on page 136 for more information. The panel supports a variety of Data Bus devices,
23.3.2 Keyswitch Programming including keypads, the DX2010 Input Expander, the
DX3010 Octo-Output Expander and the DX4010
See Zone Options 1 for Keyswitch Zone Function RS-232 Serial Interface Module.
Type on page 126 for programming information.
Consult the installation guide for the specific Data
23.3.3 Keyswitch Installation Bus device for complete instructions.
For maintained switches, connect the EOL resistor for Data Bus devices may connect to the panel in parallel
the zone at the keyswitch so that the switch opens the as shown in Figure 48.
circuit when it operates. A short on the circuit
produces an alarm if the area is armed and a trouble Data Bus devices may share power with the control
if it is disarmed. See Figure 47. panel or be powered by a stand-alone external power
supply.
For momentary switches, connect the EOL resistor for
the zone at the keyswitch so that the switch shorts the See Power Outputs on page 41 to determine the
resistor when it operates. An open on the circuit total power output requirements for your system. You
produces an alarm if the area is armed and a trouble may need to add one or more external power supplies
if it is disarmed. See Figure 47. for the number of Data Bus devices you want to use.
Data Bus Device Data Bus Device
DS7240/DS7220
24.2 DX4010 RS-232 Serial Interface Module
R B G Y R B G Y
24.2.1 DX4010 Overview
The DX4010 RS-232 Serial Interface Module can be
used to connect a standard serial printer, or other
serial device, to the control panel. It can also be used
Green Green for a DSRPS 2000+ remote programming direct
Yellow Yellow connection. Refer to the DX4010 Installation Guide
Black Black (P/N: 49539) for complete installation, addressing and
operating instructions.
DB9 GND
Red Red Enable Pins (P1)
NOTE: You may use either Aux Data Bus
Power (-) or 12 VDC (+) terminal
DS7240/DS7220. Y
DB9 GND
ENABLE
G
B P1
P5
Figure 48: Data Bus Device Wiring

ON
For UL certificated accounts, use a UL P2

1 2 3
1 2 4 8 16 M
4 5 6
Listed power supply. LED ENABLE SER RXTX RXTX BUS
Figure 49 shows an external power supply powering DB9 Connector Diagnostic LEDs
Address DIP Switches
Data Bus devices. Diagnostic LED
Enable Pins (P2)
Data Bus Device
DS7240/DS7220 Figure 50: DX4010 PCB
R B G Y
24.2.2 DX4010 Installation
The intended installation location for the DX4010 is
in the plastic enclosure that it is shipped in. This is a
low-profile, aesthetically appealing housing that can
be placed on a desktop or similar surface.
Green
Distance from the panel is determined by the total
Yellow combined wire length of all devices (including
keypads) connected to the panels Data Bus
Black terminals. The combined total wire length must not
Red exceed 1000 ft. (305 m) for #22 AWG (0.8 mm), or
2,000 ft. (610 m) for #18 AWG (1.2 mm).
+ -
External 12 VDC
Power Supply
R
Y
G
NOTE: You may use either B
connecting devices to the
DS7240/DS7220.
Figure 49: External Power for Data Bus Devices
When using any external power supply the

negative (-) output must not be tied to
earth ground. A ground fault condition will
be reported if negative (-) is grounded.
Figure 49 shows the common from the external power
supply connected to the Data Bus devices common
and the common on the control panel.
24.2.3 DX4010 to Panel Data Bus Connections To connect directly to the panel for a DSRPS 2000+
See Figure 51 and Figure 52 for acceptable power session, use these steps:
wiring connections. 1. Make sure the address DIP switches are set
See External Power Supply on page 46 for external to Address 0 (zero). See Figure 53 for
power supply restrictions. correct DIP switch placement.
DS7240/DS7220 Address 0 (zero) Settings
ON
ON
OFF
DX4010
1 2 3 4 5 6
Data Bus
1 2 4 8 16 M
Red (+) O
D
E
Yellow
Green Figure 53: Direct Connect DIP Switch Setting

2. DX4010 to Com Port 1 or 2 (or an available
Black (-) Com Port) on your computer. The DX4010
has a DB9 male serial connector. If this does
not fit your computer, you will need an
Power (-) or 12 VDC (+) terminal adapter.
3. Wire the flying leads of the colored cable
DS7240/DS7220. Y
G connector (included with panel - P/N: 15-
B
04298-000) to the DX4010s Data Bus
terminals. See Figure 54.
DS7240/DS7220
AUX/Data Com Port
Connector Pin
Location Serial Port
JP2
Sel
Figure 51: Wiring the DX4010 to the Panel R

Y
G
B
Figure 52: DX4010 External Power Supply Connections

DX4010
When using any external power supply, the
DX4010 Data Bus
negative (-) output must not be tied to earth
Black (GND)
ground. A ground fault condition will be Green
reported if negative (-) is grounded. Yellow
Red
Null Modem Cable

24.2.4 DX4010 Remote Programming Direct Connection
The DX4010 can be used to connect directly to the
panel for remote programming via DSRPS 2000+. It Figure 54: Remote Programming Direct Connection
also allows the user to perform diagnostic and No additional panel programming is pre-required to
history retrievals in DSRPS 2000+. successfully communicate via the Direct Connection
method.
The panels Installer Switch must be
closed in order to perform a remote
programming direct connection.
24.2.5 DX4010 Configuration Jumpers DB9 GND
Enable Pins (P1)
P2 Diagnostic LED Pins Disabled Enabled
The diagnostic LEDs can be used for troubleshooting DB9 GND

ENABLE
purposes. See Figure 55 to enable/disable these P1
LEDs. P5
The DX4010 draws more current when the

diagnostic LEDs are enabled. Do not
enable the diagnostic LEDs under normal
operating conditions. ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 4 8 16 M
P2
DB9 GND
ENABLE
LED ENABLE SER RXTX RXTX BUS
P1
P5
Figure 56: DX4010 P3 Jumper Pin Settings

24.2.6 DX4010 Address DIP Switches
Set the DIP Switch address to 250 when using the
ON
DX4010 as a serial device interface.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 4 8 16 M
P2
Address 250 Settings
LED ENABLE SER RXTX RXTX BUS
ON
Diagnostic LED Diagnostic LEDs ON

Enable Pins (P2) OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
Disabled Enabled 1 2 4 8 16 M
O
D
Figure 55: DX4010 P2 Jumper Pin Settings E
Diagnostic LED Function

Figure 57: RS-232 Device DIP Switch Setting
BUS RX LED Data Bus receive data from panel.
24.2.7 DX4010 Supervision
BUS TX LED Data Bus transmit data to panel.
The panel supervises proper communication to the
SER RX LED RS-232 receive data from serial device. DX4010. If it fails to communicate with the DX4010,
SER TX LED RS-232 transmit data from serial device. the panel sends a DBus Missing [125] report.
24.2.8 DX4010 DB9 Connector
Table 31: DX4010 Diagnostic LED Functions
The DB9 pins are configured as shown in Table 32
P3 RS-232 Cable Ground Pins and Figure 58.
Some devices connected to the DB9 connector may
DB9 Pin Number Pin Configuration
cause a ground fault condition on the
control/communicator. If this occurs, removing the 1 DCD
plug across the P3 jumper pins may clear the ground 2 RxD
condition. 3 TxD
Some devices can cause a ground fault even if the P3 4 DTR
jumper plug is removed. 5 GND
P3 Jumper Pins Disabled: Isolate DB9 Shield from 6 DSR
Data Bus Common (Black) 7 RTS
P3 Jumper Pins Enabled: Connect DB9 Shield to 8 CTS
Data Bus Common (Black) 9 RI
Table 32: DX4010 DB9 Pin Configuration
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Figure 58: DX4010 DB9 Connector Layout
25.0 Installers Keypad and Installer Mode 3. Then enter [#] + [4] + [1]. The system then
displays the Installer Menu.
25.1 Installers Keypad
[#] + [4] + [1] accesses different menus
The Installers Keypad must be set to depending on the PIN entered. If the
Address 0 (set MODE to OFF) and the Installer Switch is closed and the Installer
Installer Switch must be closed to program PIN is entered, this sequence accesses the
the panel from the Installers Keypad. Installer Mode. If a User PIN is entered and
the Installer Switch is open, this sequence
Use the color-coded keypad wire assembly supplied accesses the System Test Menu.
with the panel to connect the Installers Keypad to the
panels Aux/Data pins. See Figure 59. After you enter the Installer PIN and press [#] + [4] +
DS7240 PCB [1], the panel sends a Service Start report. When you
exit the Installer Mode, it sends a Service End report.
25.2.1 Momentary Closure
The Installer Mode can also be accessed by
Terminal Strip
momentarily closing the Installer Switch (closing it
for less than one second then re-opening it). The
panel does not reset after a momentary closure.
Red
Black
If the Installer Switch is closed momentarily and
Green there are no other keypads currently in the Installer
Yellow Mode, the Installers Keypad automatically enters
the Installer Mode.
If the panel remains in the Installer Mode and no key
R
Y
is pressed for 20 minutes, the panel performs a reset.
G
B If the Installers Keypad is currently in use when the
DS7445i/DS7447i Keypad
Installer Switch is closed, the Installers Keypad
remains in the Installer Mode.
Use the following steps to enter the Installer Menu
Use Wire Assembly P/N: 15-04298-000 to connect the keypad to the DS7240.
using Momentary Closure:
Figure 59: Installers Keypad Connections 1. Enter the Installer PIN.
Close the Installer Switch (momentarily or locked). 2. Enter [#] + [4] + [1].
The keypad automatically enters the Installer Menu. 3. Close the Installer Switch momentarily as
If you are using an Installers Keypad, skip to Installer described above.
Menu.
25.2 Entering the Installer Mode Only the Installers Keypad can access the
Follow these steps to enter the Installers Mode from programming menu if any area is armed.
a keypad that is not set up as an Installers Keypad:
1. Close the Installer Switch by locking it closed. 25.3 Installer Menu
See Figure 60. The Installer Menu consists of the following scrolling
choices (the numbers preceding the descriptions
represent the keypad number key to press):
1: Bell Test
Installer Switch
Normal (Open) 2: Strobe Test
JP1
3: Battery Test
AUXILIARY
Installer
Installer Switch
Locked (Closed)
4: Test Report
5: Zone Status
6: Output Test
7: RF Menu
8: Keypad Program
Figure 60: Installer Switch 9: Program Key (PK32)
2. Enter the Installer PIN. The following sections explain each menu choice.
The default Installer PIN is 9876543. The PIN
length can be between 3 and 7 digits in length
(default length is 4 digits, which shortens the
default Installer PIN to 9876). To change the
default PIN length, see PIN Configuration,
Installer PIN on page 105.
25.3.1 Bell Test Adding RF ID Codes
To initiate a Bell Test, press the [1] key. Before a RF ID can be added, corresponding
The panel activates the Bell Time (Output Function locations must first be programmed as RF devices.
Type 1,5) and Alarm Output (Output Function Types 1. To add RF ID codes into the system, press [1]
1,8 to 1, 12) functions for three seconds. when Add RF ID? Press 1 scrolls across the
For a complete description of output functions, see display. The display then shows the following:
Outputs on page 136.
Zone
25.3.2 Strobe Test Location Area Number
To initiate a strobe test, press the [2] key.
The panel activates the Strobe Output functions and Loc9 A1 Zn9
waits for the installer to press the [#] key to end the To add push 9*.
test. If the installer fails to press [#] with 20 minutes,
the panel automatically terminates the strobe test.
Key sequence to press
25.3.3 Battery Test
To initiate a battery test, press the [3] key. Figure 61: Adding RF ID Codes Menu Display
The battery test causes the system to run on battery 2. To add the location shown in Figure 61 as a RF
for 4 minutes. If the battery voltage falls below 12.1 device to the system (Location 9 used as an
volts during the 4-minute test, or if the battery is example), press [9] followed by [*]. The following
missing, the system restores AC power and displays display appears:
a system trouble at all keypads.
25.3.4 Test Report Enter ID for
Loc9 A1 Zn9
To send a test report, press the [4] key.
The panel attempts to send a test report. If there is a Figure 62: RF ID Code Display
system trouble at the time of the test, the panel sends 3. Enter the 9-digit ID code found on the back of the
a Test, Off Normal report. RF device and then press [#]. ID added. Press
If the test communication is unsuccessful, the panel # appears on the second line of the display,
creates a system trouble and a communication failure. indicating that the code has been successfully
This test report is the only report sent when the entered and accepted. Press [#].
Installer Switch is closed. If an error message appears instead of #,
25.3.5 Zone Status make sure you enter the code as printed
on the back of the device and that you
To display zone/sensor loop status for the first
only enter nine digits.
location in the system, press the [5] key.
The location, zone number and electrical status 4. Press [#]. The display returns to the first location
(Open, Short or Normal) are shown. See Locations designated as a RF device and scrolls through
on page 115 for a complete description of the other RF device locations (if any). You may enter
relationship between locations, areas and zones. the desired location number and add the ID code
as described above.
Press the [*] key to advance to the status for the next
zone. 5. When all RF ID codes have been entered, press
[#] twice. The display shows Configuring RF
Press the [#] key to exit the Zone Status mode. Please Wait. During this period, the RF
25.3.6 Output Test Receivers LED blinks approximately once every
When you press [6] for Output test, the display shows second until all ID bytes have been recognized. If
Output 1, Hold [*] for ON. If the output is the devices are successfully configured, the
already on, then the display shows Output 1, display returns to the scrolling RF Menu.
Hold [*] for OFF. If an error message appears, make sure
Press and hold the [*] key to toggle the output state. the RF Receivers transmit lines are
properly connected to the panel and that
Press the [*] key (without holding) to end current no shorted conditions are present.
output test and to advance to next output.
25.3.7 RF Menu
To enter the RF Menu, press the [7] key.
This menu consists of three scrolling choices that
allow you to add RF ID codes, test RF devices or
view/remove RF ID codes.
6. From the RF Menu, press [1] to enter additional P08: Message packet transmission.
RF ID codes or select one of the other RF Menu
Alarm, Panic and Restoral messages are
choices. If you are finished with the RF Menu,
transmitted with 8 packets (Alarm and Restoral
press [#] to return to the main programming
refer to the transitions in and out of alarm
menu.
conditions).
Locations 41-44: RF Keypads (4 max 1 per
Supervisory and Test transmissions (smoke
Location)
detectors) consist of 4 packets.
Locations 45-76: RF Keyfobs (Location 45
RF keypads transmit 4 packets for all keys
User 1; Location 76 User 32)*
except the Emergency keys, which transmit 8
* For the DS7240, 32 RF Keyfobs are available if packets.
BOTH RF Receivers 1 and 2 are connected to
RF key fobs transmit 4 packets for normal
system. For the DS7220, all 32 RF Keyfobs are
always available. operation and 8 packets for the Panic button
(Arm and Disarm pressed simultaneously).
Testing RF Devices
RF receivers need to receive 7 or 8 data packets from
To test RF devices that have been added to the a transmitter in order for that transmitter to be
system, press [2] when Test RF Devices? Press 2 considered Good. When testing RF keypads or key
scrolls across the display. The display shows the fobs, the panic functions must be used, otherwise the
following: units will only transmit 4 packets (see packet count
Zone above). When testing the installation of a smoke unit,
Location Area Number the test button should not be used. Doing so will result
in a 4-packet transmission. Instead, tamper the unit or
cause it to alarm (canned smoke).
Loc9 A1 Zn9
Test? Press 9*. When you have finished testing a device, press [#].
The list of RF devices will begin to scroll beginning
Key sequence to press
with the first (lowest) location assigned to a RF
device. You may select another location to test by
Figure 63: Test RF Devices Display entering the location number followed by the [*] and
repeating the procedure described above. If you are
The display scrolls through all of the properly finished testing, press [#] again and the RF Menu will
configured devices (Figure 63 shows Location 9 as an be displayed.
example) and asks if you wish to test. Using Location
9 as an example, press [9] followed by [*] to test the View/Remove RF ID Codes
RF device at Location 9. The first line of the display To view or remove RF ID codes that have been
shows Activate device!, indicating that the device added to the system, press [3] when View or
must be activated in order to test it. Once the device Remove RF ID? Press 3 scrolls across the display.
is activated, the following display appears: The display then scrolls through the properly
configured RF devices:
L03 M01 P08
Loc9 A1 Zn9 Zone
Location Area Number
Figure 64: RF Device Test Status Display
The first line in Figure 64 shows the RF devices test Loc9 A1 Zn9
status: ID: XXXXXXXXX
L03: System recognizes the device and that the
device is operating properly. Other status displays ID Code (see back of device)
include:
L02: System recognizes the device and that the Figure 65: RF ID Code Entry Display
device operation is fair. After each ID code is shown, the display toggles to
L01: The device must be relocated to allow for the following message before moving to the next ID
proper operation. code: To remove ID press 9* (the number 9
represents the location number and is used as an
M01: Counts the number of device activations. For example here and in Figure 65).
example, an RF3401 Zone Transmitter is the device
being tested. When the magnetic assembly is To remove the ID code, press the number key(s) that
removed from the zone transmitter base, the corresponds with the location number (for this
activation counter will count one activation. When example, [9]). Then press the [*] key. The display then
the magnetic assembly is returned to the zone asks you to confirm your removal. Press the
transmitter base, the counter will count a second appropriate number key(s) followed by the [*] key.
activation. Opening and closing the zone The display then shows Removed ID on the first line
transmitters case are also considered activations. with the location, area and zone numbers of the
removed ID on the second line.
If you wish to remove additional ID codes, press [#]. 25.3.9 Programming Key (PK32)
The scrolling list of RF devices returns. Press [#]
again to return to the RF Menu when you have A panel program stored on a PK32 key
finished removing all ID codes. Pressing [#] a third can only be used on like panel types
time returns you to the Installer Menu. (DS7240 to DS7240, DS7220 to DS7220).
25.3.8 Keypad Program
To access the PK32 Programming Key Menu, press
Programming from a local keypad can [9] from the Installer Menu.
only be accomplished if the Installer The PK32 Programming Key functions much like a
Switch is locked closed (see Figure 60 on blank floppy disk and can be used to copy a systems
page 67), or momentarily closed (see programming to another system. This key can also be
below for details), and the Installer PIN used as a backup in the event that a systems
has been entered. programming entries are lost.
To enter into the keypad-programming mode, press The Programming Key Menu contains the following
the [8] key. selections:
See How to Program on page 11 for complete Key to Panel: Press [1] to send information from
instructions for programming from a text (LCD) the Programming Key to the DS7240/DS7220.
keypad.
Panel to Key: Press [2] to send information from
Momentary Closure the DS7240/DS7220 to the Programming Key.
The Installer Mode can also be accessed by Check Key: Press [3] to perform a functional
momentarily closing the Installer Switch (closing it diagnostic on the Programming Key. The on-board
for less than one second then re-opening it). The status LED blinks during the check. When the
panel does not reset after a momentary closure. display shows Check OK, the Programming Key is
If the Installer Switch is closed momentarily and OK for use. Press [#] to abort the check.
there are no other keypads currently in the Installer Erase Key: Press [4] to erase the contents of the
Mode, the Installers Keypad automatically enters Programming Key.
the Installer Mode.
The Programming Key connects to the pins marked
If the panel remains in the Installer Mode and no key AUXILIARY (JP1) on the panels PCB. See Figure 66.
is pressed for 20 minutes, the panel performs a reset. Status LED
If the Installers Keypad is currently in use when the
Installer Switch is closed, the Installers Keypad
remains in the Installer Mode.
Use the following steps to enter the Installer Menu
using Momentary Closure:
4. Enter the Installer PIN.
5. Enter [#] + [4] + [1].
6. Close the Installer Switch momentarily as Programming Key (PK32)
described above.
Only the Installers Keypad can access the

programming menu if any area is armed.
JP1
AUXILIARY
Figure 66: PK32 to Panel Connections

25.3.10 Exiting the Installer Menu
When you are ready to exit the Installer Menu, open
the Installer Switch. The panels model number
(DS7240 or DS7220) and installed firmware revision
along with Please Wait message appears for
approximately 10 seconds. After the 10-seconds wait
period, the display returns to normal (disarmed, no
fault/trouble conditions).
Part IV: Panel Programming
This section contains programming parameter information pertaining to the DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicator. It also
contains information on programming the panel. For an overview of how to program the panel from a DS7447i Text Keypad,
see How to Program on page 11.
The DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicators comply with the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm
Reduction. Throughout the programming section are features marked with the SIA logo. For more information,
see the DS7240/DS7220 SIA Quick Start Guide (P/N: 49723) and the Control Panel Standard Features for
False Alarm Reduction (ANSI/SIA CP-01-2000, 1994-2000 Security Industry Association).
Make sure to mark the keypad function checkboxes appropriately in the DS7240/DS7220 Users Guide (P/N:
49211).
Numbers enclosed in brackets (for example, [137]) that appear throughout this manual refer to the panels
event numbers. See Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167 for panel event descriptions.
26.0 Panel Programming Parameters

26.1 Routing Destinations
The panel has two routing destinations for the routing of reports. The panel routes by zone and report group to the
destinations. For example, you can send alarm reports for one zone to Destination 1 and for another zone to Destination 2.
You can program two phone numbers for each destination.
Communication Fail events are by destinations and not by phone number.
See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables on page 164 for a complete description of the routing/dialing process.
Routing Destination 1 Routing Destination 2
Phone 1 Phone 2 Phone 1 Phone 2
Figure 67: Routing Destinations
26.1.1 Phone Number 1 (2) for Destination 1 (2)

1 1 9 9
2 2 0 10
3 3 * 11
4 4 # 12
7 7 Reserved 15
8 8 T (Terminate) 0
Parameter Description
When entering phone numbers, use 10 ([1] + [0] from the keypad) to enter 0; use 0 to terminate the
phone number.
If less than 32 digits are entered into the Phone Number Address range, the panel dials digits until it reaches a terminator (0).
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: ROUTING DESTINATIONS
Entering Phone Numbers from the Keypad
The panel can dial up to 32 digits per phone number. Each digit occupies one Address.
Terminate telephone numbers with less than 32 digits by entering a zero (0) in the Address after the last digit
to be dialed.
If you program Phone Number 1 with a sequence to cancel Call Waiting (typically *70 pause) followed by the
phone number, you should program Phone 2 without the Call Waiting cancel sequence. If the subscriber
cancels Call Waiting without notifying their alarm installing company, the panel can still send reports using
Phone 2. Dialing a Call Waiting sequence on a non-Call Waiting line prevents the system from dialing the
Central Station receiver successfully.
Alternate Communication Path
The panel can send reports using alternate communication paths (other than phone). To use an alternate communication path:
1. Connect and configure the appropriate alternate communication module. See the installation manual provided with the
module for installation instructions.
2. Enter the Terminate selection (0) as the first digit of the Phone Number for the alternate communication module.
3. Follow the zero (0) with the number for an alternate communication path as shown in Table 33.
4. Alternate Communication modules generate the following reports: AltComm Cond [166], AltComm Fail [167], AltComm
Rstrl [16]. See Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167 for a description of each report.
Alternate Communication Path Number to Enter after Termination Zero (0)

Alternate Communication Paths will be TBD
defined in a later revision
Table 33: Alternate Communication Selections
26.1.2 Format for Destination 1 (2)

Parameter Address
Default
Reporting Format Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Reserved
Contact ID
SIA 300
Basic Pager
Use this parameter to select a reporting format. All reports for this destination will be sent in the format chosen here.
Leave this parameter at the default setting to transmit reports in Contact ID format.
Check panel communications (from panel to Central Station) to verify that the panel is communicating
properly in the selected reporting format at least once a year.
See Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167 for a description of each reporting format and a listing of the specific
panel reports.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: ROUTING DESTINATIONS
26.2 Phone, Auto-Forward and RPS Configuration
Use the parameters in this section to set the dialing format for the panel and to configure the Auto-Forward and RPS (Remote
Programming Software) features.
26.2.1 DTMF/Pulse Dialing
Parameter Address
Dialing Format 0132
Default
Dialing Format Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DTMF
Pulse
The panel dials in the format selected here (DTMF or Pulse). This format is used for all dialing attempts.
26.2.2 Call Forwarding Auto On/Off Digits
Call Forwarding Auto On Digits 0133-0164 All zeros (0)
Call Forwarding Auto Off Digits 0165-0180 All zeros (0)
1 1 9 9
2 2 0 10
3 3 * 11
4 4 # 12
7 7 Reserved 15
8 8 T (Terminate) 0
This parameter configures the panels Call Forwarding Auto On/Off feature.
In order to use this feature, the premises must have Call Forwarding service from the local telephone
company. The Call Forwarding Auto On/Off feature does not forward calls; it turns the telephone companys
Call Forwarding service on or off by dialing digits just as the user would.
phone number.
The Call Forwarding Auto On/Off feature is only available for Area 1.
If the Call Forwarding Auto On/Off feature is enabled ([#]+[8]+[2]) and a user turns the system All On, the panel dials the Call
Forwarding Auto On digits to activate the telephone companys Call Forwarding service.
If the Call Forwarding Auto On/Off feature is enabled ([#]+[8]+[2]) and a user turns the system off (from All On), then the panel
dials the Call Forwarding Auto Off digits to turn off the Call Forwarding service.
See the DS7240/DS7220 Users Guide (P/N: 49211) for more information on the Call Forwarding Auto On/Off feature.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: PHONE, AUTO-FORWARD & RPS CONFIGURATION
A typical dialing sequence might be:
two-digit telephone company feature code (72*)
pause
phone number to forward to (Example: 315-555-1212)
flash (on-hook, pause, off-hook)
terminate (t)
For this sequence, the entry at this parameter would be 7 2 * p 3 1 5 5 5 5 1 2 1 2 f t.
26.2.3 Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number
Remote Programming Call Back Number 0181-0212 All zeros (0)
1 1 9 9
2 2 0 10
3 3 * 11
4 4 # 12
7 7 Reserved 15
8 8 T (Terminate) 0
The phone number you enter here is the number the panel dials to initiate DSRPS 2000+ remote programming sessions. A
session can be started by:
DSRPS calls the panel, the panel answers and determines it is DSRPS calling, then the panel hangs up and calls DSRPS
back.
If a DSRPS Call Back phone number is entered, [#] + [4] + [3] can be used to initiate a panel call to DSRPS.
If a DSRPS Call Back phone number is not entered, the panel must receive an incoming call before using [#] + [4] + [3].
The panel can be programmed to call this number automatically at test report time (see Automatic Test Report Options on
page 86 for more information).
phone number.
26.2.4 RPS Answer Ring Count, Answering Machine Bypass
RPS Answer Ring Count, 0213 0 = Panel will not answer phone
Answering Machine Bypass 1-13 = Ring Count 7 (rings)
14 = Answering Machine Bypass 1
15 = Answering Machine Bypass 2
The ring count sets the number of rings the panel waits before picking up and seizing the phone line for a remote programming
session, or for remote arming with a telephone (see Arming Options 1 on page 90).
The panel will not seize the phone line for remote programming or remote arming with telephone when this parameter is set to
zero (0).
This ring count is used for any panel arming state, armed or disarmed.
The Answering Machine Bypass function can be restricted to only operate when the system is armed All On or Perimeter Only
(see Arming Options 1 on page 90). When the Answering Machine Bypass function is restricted to only operate when the
system is armed Normal or Perimeter Only, the panel will not answer the phone for a remote arming session when it is
disarmed (Off). However, [#] + [4] + [3] can still initiate a remote programming session.
Answering Machine Bypass 1
1. Call the premises; let the phone ring no more than two (2) times. Then hang up/disconnect the remote programmer.
2. Wait at least eight (8) seconds to call back, but call back within 45 seconds.
3. The panel will then pick up after the first ring.
Answering Machine Bypass 2
1. Call the premises; let the phone ring no more than four (4) times. Then hang up/disconnect the remote programmer.
2. Wait at least eight (8) seconds to call back, but call back within 45 seconds.
3. The panel will then pick up after the first ring.
26.2.5 Phone Line Fault Response Options
Parameter Address
Phone Line Fault Response Options 0220
Default
Phone Line Fault Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Phone Line Supervision
Enable Supervision (System Trouble at Keypad)
Burg Alarm & Strobe Functions, All On/Perimeter Only
Burg Alarm & Strobe Functions, Off
The panel monitors the phone line for voltage only. If the voltage drops low enough (between 1 and 3 volts) for 40 seconds,
the panel declares a phone line fault. If the phone line voltage remains above 3 volts for at least 40 seconds, the panel
declares the phone line restored.
When enabled, the Phone Line Fault event appears at all keypads for all areas. The panel sends a Phone Line Restore [100]
report when a phone line fault event restores.
If the phone line fails (as described above), but restores before a Comm Fail event:
1. System detects phone line fail and puts Event [99] in the log.
2. System starts dialing attempts if programmed for Phone Fail report.
3. Phone line restores before comm fail event.
4. System sends phone line fail and phone line restore reports.
If the phone line fails (as described above), but does not restore:
1. System detects phone line fail and puts report in the event in the log.
2. System starts dialing attempts if programmed for Phone Fail report.
3. Dialing attempts end with comm fail event, phone fail report is flushed.
4. System detects phone line is restored and puts restoral report in buffer.
5. System starts dialing attempts and sends phone fail restoral and comm restoral reports.
If an alternate communication path is enabled, the panel can send a Phone Line Fail [99] report via the alternate
communication path when a phone line fault event occurs.
Parameter Options
No Phone Line Supervision: If selected, the panel will not monitor the phone line voltage. Phone Line Fault events will not
appear at keypads. The other Phone Line Fault Response options are also disabled if No Phone Line Supervision is
selected.
Enable Supervision (System Trouble at Keypad): If a phone line fault occurs as described above, the keypad displays a
phone line trouble message. To enable the keypad to emit a trouble tone on system troubles, see Keypad Options on page
110 for details.
Burg Alarm & Strobe Functions, All On or Perimeter Only: If a phone line fault occurs as described above, the systems
burglary alarm and strobe function as configured when the system is armed All On or Perimeter Only. See Outputs on page
136 for burglary alarm/strobe output configuration.
Burg Alarm & Strobe Functions, Off: If a phone line fault occurs as described above, the systems burglary alarm and
strobe function as configured when the system is off (not armed). See Outputs on page 136 for burglary alarm/strobe
output configuration.
For UL Listed installations, phone line supervision must be turned on (enter Data Digit 1 at Address 0220).
26.3 Global Reporting Options
These parameters configure the reporting for all areas, all zones and all users.
26.3.1 Global Reporting Options
Parameter Address
Global Reporting Options 0221
Default
Global Reporting Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Local Only
Enable Reporting
Extend Handshake
Delay Alarm Output
Burg Alarm After Two Failed Attempts
Parameter Options
Local Only: The panel sends no reports.
Enable Reporting: The panel will send reports as programmed provided that at least one phone number has been
programmed for at least one Routing Destination (see Routing Destinations on page 71). Reporting options can be enabled
and disabled in other parameters. See Open/Close Reporting Options on page 92; Area # Open/Close Reporting Options
on page 96; Authority Level Option 6 on page 100; and Reporting Enable, Trouble Response Options, Zone Function ##
on page 128.
Extend Handshake: When the panel finishes dialing the central station receiver it waits for a handshake tone from the
receiver. The handshake is the first thing the receiver sends after answering the phone. Typically each reporting format the
receiver supports has its own handshake tone. If a receiver supports several formats it sounds the handshake tones one at
time. Choosing this option extends the time the panel waits for a handshake from the central station receiver from 45 to 60
seconds.
Detection Systems recommends that you only extend the handshake wait when advised by Detection
Systems Technical Service.
Delay Alarm Output: The panel delays burglary alarm output until communication to the central station receiver is complete
or there are two failed dialing attempts. The delayed alarm output functions are 1-8, 1-9 and 1-10 (see Table 41 on page 138
for descriptions of output types). Bell Time is not delayed, and begins at the alarm event. If Bell Time is set at three minutes
or less, alarm output delayed by this feature may be very short (less than 1 minute), or the alarm output may not activate at
all. See Outputs on page 136 for a complete description of output functions. The keypad sounder is not delayed by this
option.
Burg Alarm After Two Failed Attempts: Setting this option to Yes provides a steady alarm output after two failed attempts
to transmit a burglary alarm report from any zone when the system is armed. Alarm output is provided even if the zone is not
programmed for alarm output. Bell Time must be programmed with at least 3 minutes to use this option. Set this option to No
if you want to prevent an alarm output from silent zones even when the system fails to communicate with the receiver. This
option only applies to output types 1,8 (Alarm All On, Perimeter Only & Partial On; non-fire 24-hr alarms); 1,9 (Alarm
Perimeter Only & Partial On Modes; non-fire 24-hr alarms) and 1,10 (Alarm zones, 24-hr zones-fire & non-fire). See
Outputs on page 136 for alarm configuration.
The burg alarm output will still activate after two failed communication attempts even if it is set for silent
operation.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: GLOBAL REPORTING OPTIONS
26.3.2 Ack Wait Time
Ack Wait Time 0222 0 = 1 second 5 (seconds)
1-15 = 1-15 seconds (1-second increments)
Use this parameter to set the amount of time the panel waits for an acknowledgment tone from the Central Station receiver.
Detection Systems strongly recommends that the default value be used unless otherwise instructed by
Detection Systems Technical Service.
26.3.3 AC Power Supervision Options

Parameter Address
AC Power Supervision Options 0223
Default
AC Power Supervision Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Selected
AC Fail Report is Tag-along
Disable AC Fail Local Annunciation (at Keypad)
Enable Arm/Disarm/Bypass Tracking
Enable Internal Crystal to Keep Time
Use this parameter to configure the panels local response to AC power failure.
AC power must be failed for a minimum of two (2) minutes before the panel responds to the failure. It must be restored for a
minimum of two (2) minutes before the panel responds to the AC restoral.
The trouble tone for AC fail events sounds at all command centers in all areas. However, the trouble tone
must be silenced in each area (silencing the trouble tone in one area does not silence it in the other areas.
Parameter Options
AC Tag-along: AC Fail and Restoral reports are not sent at the time of the event, but are sent as tag-along reports with the
next report to be sent.
Disable AC Fail Local Annunciation (at Keypad): If the control is only powered from a DC power source (through battery
connections), select Option 2, Disable AC Fail AC Fail Local Annunciation. This prevents the panel from annunciating AC
failures locally at the keypad. You must also disable AC Fail reporting at the next parameter, AC Fail, Low Battery Report
Options.
Enable Arm/Disarm/Bypass Tracking: If Option 4, Enable Arm/Disarm/Bypass Tracking, is not selected, the panel always
powers up in the disarmed state (Off), even if the panel was armed before powering down. Zones that were bypassed before
powering down are not bypassed at power-up.
Enable Internal Crystal to Keep Time: Not selecting this option keeps time by looking at the 60 Hz in AC power. Enable if
running on DC only (for example, if you are generating your own power or power cycles are not consistent), otherwise leave
set to default.
26.3.4 AC Fail [1], Low Battery [22] Report Options
Parameter Address
AC Fail, Low Battery Report Options 0224
Default
AC Fail, Low Battery Reporting Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No AC Fail Reports, No Low Battery Reports
AC Fail Reports
AC Restoral Reports
Low & Missing Battery and Restoral Reports
Ground Fault and Restoral Reports
AC Fail, Low Battery and Ground Fault events occur at all keypads for all areas.
Use this parameter to enable reporting of AC power and battery supervision events, and ground fault events. You must also
program at least one phone number for at least one Routing Destination (see page 71), and enable reporting at the Global
Reporting Options parameter (see page 77).
The battery is considered low if the nominal voltage on the battery terminals drops below 12.1 volts.
If the nominal voltage on the battery terminals drops below 10.2 volts, the low battery will be considered a missing battery.
26.3.5 System Status Report Swinger Count
Address Data Digit Selections Default
0225 0 (disabled), 1-15 0
Set this parameter to zero (0) to disable the System Status Report Swinger feature. System Status reports are sent as they
occur.
Entering a value from 1 to 15 enables the System Status Report Swinger feature and sets the swinger count. Each system
status report has its own swinger counter. When the count is reached that report is no longer transmitted during the arming
cycle.
For example, if you entered 1 at this parameter, the panel would only transmit one AC fail report, no matter how many times
AC failed and restored during the arming cycle.
Not all System Status Reports follow this Swinger Count. System Status reports that follow the count set in this parameter are
marked with an S in Reporting Formats Table found in Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167.
26.3.6 System Status Reports Routing
Parameter Address
System Status Reports Routing 0226

System Status reports routed by this parameter are marked with an R in Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167.
Comm Fail 1 (2) reports follow System Status Reports routing. Comm Fail reports for either destination are only sent if the
other destination is the System Status Reports destination. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables on page 164
for the dialing sequence and description of the Comm Fail event.
26.3.7 Call for Service Interval
Call for Service Interval 0227-0228 0, 0
Use this parameter to determine the interval in weeks (7 days), (00 to 99). For example, if you enter 0,2, the panel waits 2
weeks (14 days) between displaying service messages.
At this interval, the keypad displays a Call for Service fault and/or sends a Call for Service [37] report (per the Call for
Service/System Inactive Options parameter on page 81). The display appears at all keypads in all areas. The report is sent
for Area 1 only and follows System Status Report routing.
Pressing the [System Reset] key resets the fault in the area the keypad is assigned to.
Entering 0,0 disables this parameter.
26.3.8 System Inactive Interval
System Inactive Interval 0229-0230 0, 0
If an area is not armed (All, Perimeter Only or Partial On) in this interval, the panel sends a System Inactive [136] Report for
that area. A System Inactive Display is optional, see Call for Service/System Inactive on page 81.
Interval is in weeks (00 to 99).
Entering 0,0 disables this parameter.
26.3.9 Call for Service/System Inactive Options
Parameter Address
Call for Service/System Inactive Options 0231
Default
Call for Service/System Inactive Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options
Call for Service Display at Call for Service Interval
Call for Service Report at Call for Service Interval
Call for Service Display at System Inactive Interval
Enable Weekly Test Reminder
Parameter Options
Call for Service Display at Call for Service Interval: At the Call for Service Interval, the keypad displays a Call for Service
trouble at all keypads in all areas and/or sends a report for Area 1. Pressing the [System Reset] key resets the fault in the
area the keypad is assigned to. There is no trouble tone for the Call for Service Interval event.
Call for Service Report at Call for Service Interval: The Call for Service [37] Report follows System Status routing. The
interval is in weeks (00 to 99). See Call for Service Interval on page 80.
Call for Service Display at System Inactive Interval: At the System Inactive Interval, the keypad displays a Call for
Service trouble at all keypads and/or sends a System Inactive [136] report for that area. See System Inactive Interval on
page 80.
Enable Weekly Test Reminder: if you select this option, the system keypads display System Test Due, Press 1 to test. A
reminder is generated eight (8) days after the last user test. There is no trouble tone for this trouble reminder event.
When the user enters [#] + [4] to view the trouble, the system displays System Test Due, Press 1 to test.
26.3.10 Log Supervision Configuration
Parameter Address
Log Supervision Configuration 0232

0 No Log Threshold Events or Reports, No Log Overflow Events or Reports
1 Overflow Event & Report [85]; Threshold Event & Report [85] at 50% full
Default 2 Overflow Event & Report [85]; Threshold Event & Report [85] at 75% full
3 Overflow Event & Report [85]; Threshold Event & Report [85] at 90% full
4 Overflow Event; Threshold Event at 50% full; Local Events, No Reports
The panel can store up to 254 events in its event log (history). On startup, a new panel has 100% of its log available for new
events. It is 0% full. As the panel begins storing events, the capacity for new events is reduced. When Event 254 is stored, the
panel is 100% full. On the 255th event, the panel begins overwriting events (beginning with the oldest).
DSRPS 2000+ Remote Programming Software can access the panel log. The history pointer can be reset and the number of
events in the history log would be set to 0 (zero).
To help avoid overwriting events that have not been received by DSRPS 2000+, this parameter configures the system for
supervision of its event log (history).
Setting this parameter to 0 disables supervision. No log threshold or overflow events are entered in the log. No log reports are
sent.
Setting this parameter to 1, 2, or 3 creates log overflow and threshold events in the log. A threshold event is created when the
panel writes the first event to the log that exceeds the threshold (50%, 75%, or 90% full). A threshold report reminds the
central station to access the event log with DSRPS 2000+, freeing log space, before the panel reaches 100% full (log
overflow) and begins overwriting events.
If this parameter is set to 75% threshold (default setting), the threshold event reoccurs when 191 new events have occurred
since the last history pointer reset.
Resetting the history pointer does not clear any events. The most recent 254 events are always available.
Overflow events are created when the log reaches 100% of capacity and begins writing over events that have not been
received by DSRPS 2000+.
Setting this parameter to 4, 5, or 6 creates the threshold and overflow events, but no reports are sent. The events are local
only.
Log events (threshold and overflow) only ever appear in the log. They are not system troubles. They are viewed by pressing
[#] + [8] + [5], or remotely with DSRPS 2000+.
26.3.11 Auto On Pre-Alert Time
0233 0-15 (Time = Selection x 5 minutes) 3 (15 minutes)
Multiply the value entered in this parameter by five (5) minutes to determine the duration of the Auto On Pre-Alert. The pre-
alert sounds before the Auto On Sked to warn users to exit or extend ([#] + [5] + [1]) the auto arming. See Authority Level
Option 12 on page 103 to configure the Authority Levels for [#] + [5] + [1].
At the Auto On time, the panel starts exit delay. See Skeds on page 143 for a complete description of the Auto On Skeds.
If the area is armed according to the scheduled arming state (All On or Perimeter Only) during Auto On Pre-Alert Time and
then disarmed before the scheduled arming, auto arming will not occur.
26.3.12 Cancel Event Enabled
Parameter Address
Cancel Event Enabled 0234
Default
Cancel Event Enabled Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Cancel Reports
Cancel Reports Enabled
If the Cancel Event is enabled (enter Data Digit 1 at Address 0234), a Cancel Window starts with the initiation of alarm
events. The Cancel Window is equal to Bell Time. If the user acknowledges the alarm inside the cancel window, a Cancel
Event is created. If reporting is enabled, a Cancel [38] or Fire Cancel [39] report is sent.
If the Abort feature is enabled, the Cancel report is sent if the user acknowledges the alarm after the Abort Window has
expired but before the Cancel Window expires. See Alarm Event Abort Window on page 134 for more information.
If a user acknowledges a non-fire alarm event by entering their passcode before the Alarm Event Abort Window expires:
1. The alarm event is aborted. Alarm, Cancel* and Restoral reports associated with the alarm are not transmitted. The alarm
event becomes a local only event.
2. The user hears a unique three long beep tone at the keypad.
3. The text keypad indicates the aborted alarm on the display. The LED keypad indicates the aborted alarm with a slow flash
in Alarm Memory.
* A Cancel Window starts with the initiation of the alarm event and follows Bell Time. If the user acknowledges the alarm inside
the cancel window (bell time), a Cancel [38] or Fire Cancel [39] report is sent. If the Abort feature is enabled, the Cancel report
is sent if the user acknowledges the alarm after the Abort Window has expired but before Bell Time expires.
Alarm Event Abort is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
26.3.13 Date Format and Enable PIN Trouble
Parameter Address
Date Format and Enable PIN Trouble 0235
Default
Date Format & Enable PIN Trouble Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options
International Date Display (DD/MM/YY)
Enable Default PIN Trouble
Reserved
Reserved
This parameter controls the display of the date on the keypad and logged on the printer.
This parameter can also enable the System Trouble event that is generated if the default values for the Installer PIN and
User PIN are left unchanged. See Installer PIN on page 106 and PIN, User # on page 107 for more information.
If either the default Installer PIN or the default User 1 PIN is changed using remote programming, the panel
must be reset at the end of the remote programming session.
The default setting of 0 (zero) sets the Date Format to the U.S. format (MM/DD/YY) and disables the system trouble message
if the Installer PIN and User PIN defaults are left unchanged.
26.4 Tests
26.4.1 System Test Configuration Options
Parameter Address
System Test Configuration Options 0244
Default
System Test Configuration Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
System Test Disabled
Test Bell
Test Strobe
Test Battery
Send Test Report
This is a global (affects all areas) option.
When the user enters the System Test key sequence ([#] + [4] + [1]) at the keypad, the system performs a self-test that
includes the options selected at this parameter. The configuration applies to all areas.
For UL 1023, Household Fire Systems, you must select Test Bell, Test Strobe (if installed) and Test Battery
(enter 7 for this parameter).
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: TESTS
Parameter Options
Test Bell: Makes a bell test part of the system test. The panel activates the Bell Time (15) and Alarm Output (1-8, 1-9, 1-
10, 1-11, and 1-12) functions for three (3) seconds. See Outputs on page 136 for a complete description of output
functions.
Test Strobe: Makes a strobe test part of the system test. The panel activates the Strobe Output function (1-6) and waits for
the user to press the [] key to end the test. If the user fails to press the [] key within 20 minutes, the panel automatically
terminates the strobe test and proceeds to the next programmed test.
Test Battery: Makes the battery test part of the system test. The battery test causes the system to run on battery power
only for four (4) minutes. If the battery voltage falls below 12.1 volts during the four-minute test, or if the battery is missing,
the system restores AC power and displays a system trouble at all keypads. If programmed for battery reports, the panel
sends a low battery or missing battery report. Users can end the test by pressing [#] on the keypad.
Send Test Report: Makes a communications test part of the system test. If selected, this option causes the panel to
attempt to send a Test [137] report when the user initiates a System Test ([#] + [4] + [1]). If there is a system trouble present
at the time of the test, the panel sends a Test, Off Normal [138] report. The test report follows the routing for the Automatic
Test [137] report. If the test communication is unsuccessful, the panel creates a system trouble communication failure.
26.4.2 System Test Enable Options
Parameter Address
System Test Enable Options 0245

System Test Enable Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
System Test Disabled
Enable System Test for Area 1
Enable System Test for Area 2
Enable System Test for Area 3 (DS7240 only)
Enable System Test for Area 4 (DS7240 only)
This option enables the System Test function ([#] + [4] + [1]) for each of the areas. Although the configuration of System Test
is global, the function is only enabled for keypads in the areas selected here, and only for users with the proper Authority
Level. See Authority Level Option 9 on page 102.
If the System Test is not enabled in the previous parameter (Address 0244 is set for Data Digit 0), then this
parameter is not functional and does not need to be programmed.
26.4.3 Walk Test Configuration Options
Parameter Address
Walk Test Configuration Options 0246
Default
Walk Test Configuration Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Walk Test Disabled
Start with System Test
Include Fire Zones
Include 24-hour Zones
Include Zones
When a user enters the Walk Test key sequence ([#] + [4] + [4]) at a keypad to start a walk test, the system includes the
option(s) selected in this parameter. If included, the System Test follows its own configuration. See System Test Configuration
Options on page 83 and System Test Enable Options on page 84. No reports are sent from zones included in the test.
If a Zone Function type is not included, those zones remain active during the test.
A Walk Test Start [158] report, with user number, is sent at the start of the test. A Walk Test End [159] report, with User
Number 0 (zero), is sent at its conclusion.
Entering Walk Test mode starts a 20-minute timer. After 15 minutes with no activity from the included zones, a warning tone
(same as Auto-arm warning) begins. After 20 minutes, the test automatically terminates with User Number 0 (zero).
Any fire or 24-hour zone faulted at the termination of the test will generate a trouble response, not an alarm
response. If programmed for alarm reports but not trouble reports, trouble reports are sent as part of the
trouble response in this instance.
26.4.4 Walk Test Enable Options

Parameter Address
Walk Test Enable Options 0247

Walk Test Enable Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Walk Test Disabled
Walk Test Enabled for Area 1
Walk Test Enabled for Area 2
Walk Test Enabled for Area 3 (DS7240 only)
Walk Test Enabled for Area 4 (DS7240 only)
Use this parameter to choose which areas have the Walk Test function ([#] + [4] + [4]) enabled. Although the configuration of
Walk Test is global, the function is only enabled for keypads in the areas selected here, and only for users with the proper
Authority Level. See Authority Level Option 9 on page 102.
26.4.5 Walk Test Start [158]/Walk Test End [159] Report Routing
Parameter Address
Walk Test/End Report Routing 0248

Default 5 No reports, Events to Log/Printer
This is a global (affects all areas) parameter. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables on page 164 for the dialing
sequence and a description of a Comm Fail Event.
26.4.6 Automatic Test [137] Report Options
Parameter Address
Automatic Test Options 0249
Default
Automatic Test Report Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Automatic Test Options
Test Report Only If System Is Armed
Defer Test Report If Other Report Sent in Test Interval
Test Reports for All Areas (else Area 1 only)
Call RPS at Test Time (After Test Report)
Use these options to configure the Automatic Test [137] report. If Call RPS at Test Time is enabled, a variety of tasks could
be accomplished at this time, including downloading the log to the Central Station.
Parameter Options
Test Report Only If System is Armed: This option sends a test report only if the system is armed.
Defer Test Report if Other Report Sent in Test Interval: If another report is sent during the test interval, this option defers
the test report until the end of the test interval.
Test Reports for All Areas (else Area 1 only): If selected, this option generates a test report for all enabled areas. For the
DS7240, this feature applies to Areas 1-4. For the DS7220, this feature applies to Areas 1 and 2.
Call RPS at Test Time (After Test Report): If selected, this option calls DSRPS 2000+ at test time after the system sends
the test report. The Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number should be programmed. See page 74 for more
information.
26.4.7 Automatic Test [137] Report Time
Address Range Data Digit Selections Default
0250-0253 0-9 0000 (Test reports disabled)
Enter the time of day for the Automatic Test. Use 24-hour format (HHMM) where midnight is 2400, noon is 1200 and 12:01 am
is 0001. Enter one digit in each of the four Addresses so that Addresses 0250 and 0251 are the hour and 0252 and 0253 are
the minutes. An entry of 0000 (the default setting) disables the Automatic Test [137] report.
26.4.8 Automatic Test [137] Report Interval
Parameter Address
Automatic Test Report Interval 0254
Default
Automatic Test Report Interval Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Automatic Test
1 Hour
1 Day
7 Days
28 Days
Entering zero (0) at this parameter disables the Automatic Test [137] report feature.
The one-hour interval is incremented on the minute. For example, if you set the Automatic Test Time parameter to 1020 (10:20
am), the Automatic Test Interval is one hour, and left programming mode at 11:10, then the panel would send a test report at
11:20 am (less than one hour after leaving programming mode). The next test report would come at 12:20 pm.
The one-day, seven-day and 28-day intervals are incremented at midnight (2400). For example, if you set the Automatic Test
Time parameter to 1020 (10:20 am), the Automatic Test Interval is one day and left programming mode at 10:10 am, then the
panel would not send a test report until 10:20 the next day (after the one-day interval increment at midnight).
If the Automatic Test report is disabled in Automatic Test Report Options, page 86, this parameter becomes meaningless for
the Automatic Test.
26.4.9 Test Report Routing
Parameter Address
Test Report Routing 0255

This is a global (affects all areas) parameter.
Test reports include the System Test [137] [138] reports. The Walk Test Start [158] and Walk Test End [159] reports follow
their own routing.
Reporting must be enabled at the Global Reporting Options parameter (page 77) and at least one phone
number must be entered for one routing destination (page 71).
26.5 Programming Options
26.5.1 Remote Programming (DSRPS 2000+) Options
Parameter Address
Remote Programming (DSRPS 2000+) Options 0256
Default
Remote Programming Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disable Remote Programming
Enable Remote Programming
Enable Remote Programming Callback
Terminate Remote Programming Session on Alarm
Reserved
Parameter Options
Enable Remote Programming: The system answers the phone at the programmed ring count for remote programming
sessions. [#] + [4] + [3] can also be used to start a remote programming session or answer the phone if Address 0213 is set
to 0. See RPS Answer Ring Count, Answering Machine Bypass on page 75.
If the programming session is completed successfully, the panel sends a Valid Remote Access [103] report.
If you change the panel parameters during the programming session, the panel sends a Parameters Changed
[98] report.
If the programming session is terminated with a reset panel from DSRPS 2000+, the panel sends a Reboot [104]
report.
If the programming session is not successfully completed, the panel sends an Invalid Remote Access [102]
report.
Enable Remote Programming Callback: The system answers the phone at the programmed ring count for remote
programming sessions (see RPS Answer Ring Count, Answering Machine Bypass on page 75). If it determines that the
remote programmer is calling, it will hang up and call the remote programmer back using the programmed call-back phone
number (see Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number on page 74). When this is enabled, [#] + [4] + [3] can also be
used to start a programming session. When a user enters [#] + [4] + [3] at the keypad, the panel calls DSRPS 2000+.
If the callback to DSRPS 2000+ is not successful, the DS7240/DS7220 sends a Bad Call [101] report.
For this option to operate properly, Option 1, Enable Remote Programming, must be selected.
Terminate Remote Programming Connection on Alarm: An alarm on any zone or any keypad terminates the remote
programming session.
For this option to operate properly, Option 1, Enable Remote Programming, must be selected.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: PROGRAMMING OPTIONS
26.5.2 Programming and Daylight Savings Time Options
Parameter Address
Programming & Daylight Savings Time Options 0257
Default
Programming and Daylight Savings Time Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Selected
Reserved
Auto Adjust for Daylight Savings Time Enabled
Keypad Programming Enabled
PK32 (Programming Key) Enabled
Parameter Options
Auto Adjust for Daylight Savings Time Enabled: The panel automatically sets its clock ahead one hour at 2:00 am on the
first Sunday in April, and sets its clock back one hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October.
Keypad Programming Enabled: All panel parameters can be programmed from any system text keypad or an Installer
Keypad. See page 67 for a description of the Installer Mode.
The Installer Switch must be locked closed (or momentarily closed, see page 67) for local (keypad)
programming. A closed Installer Switch disables most panel functions, including:
Panel reporting with alarms (sends only installer-initiated test reports and service start reports)
A, B and C Key functions
Alarm output
A closed Installer Switch activates a Call for Service system trouble at all keypads.
The disabled reporting characteristic of the Installer Switch can be used for service tasks (for example, replacing hold-up
buttons). It could also be used to allow the panels battery to charge during the installation process.
If Keypad Programming or PK32 are not enabled, access to the panel via a keypad will not be possible. Remote
programming (DSRPS 2000+) will be the only programming method available.
PK32 (Programming Key) Enabled: The PK32 Programming Key can be used to send or receive a program record (the
panels parameter settings). See page 70 for more information regarding the Programming Key.
If the Keypad Programming and Remote Programming options are not enabled, there will be no way to access
panel programming.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: PROGRAMMING OPTIONS
26.6 Global Open/Close Options
26.6.1 Arming Options 1
Parameter Address
Arming Options 1 0258
Default
Arming Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Enabled
Enable All On No Exit Feature
Answering Machine Bypass Only When All/Perimeter Only On
Remote Arming with Telephone, Area 1
Reserved
Parameter Options
Enable All On No Exit Feature: If this feature is selected and the system is turned All On and no Entry or Exit zones are
faulted during Exit Delay, the system automatically shifts to Perimeter Only. Perimeter Only (not All On) appears in the log
and reports. This feature can only be used if the panel is armed with delay. This feature does not apply when arming with
keyswitches or RF keyfobs.
Enable All On No Exit is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
Answering Machine Bypass Only When All On/Perimeter Only On: The Answering Machine Bypass function is activated
at the RPS Answer Ring Count, Answering Machine Bypass parameter (see page 75). If activated there, this option can be
used to restrict its function so that it only operates when the system is All On or Perimeter Only On. The system will not
answer if disarmed.
Remote Arming with Telephone, Area 1: Controls the built-in telephone arming feature for Area 1. When enabled, the
panel answers the phone on the ring count for remote programming.
When the panel answers the phone:
If the panel is All On or Perimeter Only On, it sounds three beeps and starts the handshake tone for remote
programming.
If the panel is Off, it sounds one short beep, waits approximately three seconds and then starts the handshake
tone for remote programming (one long beep). Press and hold the [5] key* for two seconds immediately after the
first short arming beep and before the handshake tone begins.
The panel will arm if it detects a [5] key press from the telephone (All On with Delay, faulted zones are force-
armed like keyswitch arming). The panel sounds three beeps (new armed state) and then hangs up.
* If arming from a cell phone, quickly press the [5] key three times. If pressing and holding the [5] key for two seconds from a
house (landline) phone does not produce a tone long enough to arm Area 1, retry by quickly pressing the [5] key three times.
Remotely disarming the panel cannot be done with a telephone.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: GLOBAL OPEN/CLOSE OPTIONS
26.6.2 Arming Options 2
Parameter Address
Arming Options 2 0259
Default
Enter This to Data Digit to Select Options
Arming Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Enabled
First Area to Open / Last Area to Close Reporting
Make Area 1 Common Area
Enable All Areas All On ([#] + [8] + [0])
Enable All Areas Off ([#] + [8] + [1])
Parameter Options
First Area to Open [164]/Last Area to Close [165] Reporting: The system transmits one Closing [165] report when all
areas are turned On and one Opening [164] report when any area is turned Off.
User PIN Authority Level (see Authority Level Configuration Option 6 on page 100) must be enabled, and
Opening/Closing reports must be enabled for all areas.
Open and Close reports are for Area 1 using Area 1s account numbers.
All area account numbers must be the same in order to send Area 1s Account Numbers. See Areas on page
95 for information on programming account numbers.
Make Area 1 Common Area (DS7240): All other areas are made common to Area 1. Area 1 arms when all the other areas
are armed All On, and Area 1 disarms when any other area is disarmed.
Make Area 1 Common Area (DS7220): Area 2 is made common to Area 1. Area 1 arms when Area 2 is armed All On, and
Area 1 disarms when Area 2 is disarmed.
Enable All Areas All On Function ([#] + [8] + [0])*: Faulted zones are force-armed. See Authority Level Option 8 on page
101 to configure the Authority Level for the All Areas All On function.
Enable All Areas Off Function ([#] + [8] + [1])*: This function always requires a passcode. See Authority Level Option 8
on page 101 to configure the Authority Levels for the All Areas Off function.
* All = All areas in which the user has the appropriate authority level.
26.6.3 Bypass/Force Arm Limit
0260 0-15 7
The parameter configures all areas.
This parameter sets the maximum number of zones that can be force-armed or bypassed for any one area. The area will not
arm if this limit is reached and zones remain faulted.
Entering zero (0) allows an unlimited number of zones to be force-armed or bypassed.
The Zone Function determines which zones are bypassable.
Force arming is not permitted in UL installations.
26.6.4 Open/Close Reporting Options
Parameter Address
Open/Close Reporting Options 0261
Default
Open/Close Reporting Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Open, Close, Exit Error or Recent Close Reports
Opening [89 96, 164] Reports Enabled
Closing [42 - 67, 165] Reports Enabled
Exit Error [18] Report Enabled
Recent Closing [19 20] Reports Enabled
This is a global parameter that affects all zones, all areas and all PINs.
Once enabled and configured here, Opening and Closing reports can be restricted by area (see Area
Open/Close Reporting Option, page 96) and by Authority Level (see Authority Level Option 6, page 100).
Reporting must be enabled at the system level first (see Global Reporting Options, page 77).
Parameter Options
Opening Reports Enabled: If selected, this option enables Opening [89-96, 164] reports.
Closing Reports Enabled: If selected, this option enables Closing [42-67, 165] reports.
Exit Error: Only the Exit Error [18] report is enabled and disabled by this parameter. By default, the event is always enabled.
If an Entry or Exit zone (Zone Function Types 11 and 12) is violated at the end of Exit Delay, these events will occur in this
order:
1. Local alarm annunciation is started (keypads and alarm outputs)
2. Entry Delay starts (the keypad can either sound an alarm or initiate Entry Delay).
The alarm transmission procedure begins if the system is not turned off at the end of Entry Delay. An Exit Error [18]
report is included if programmed. The Exit Error report follows the Alarm Report routing.
Exit Error is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
Recent Closing: An Alarm Recent Closing [19 20] report (including the user number) is sent for any alarm within two (2)
minutes of the end of the Exit Time.
Recent Closing is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
26.6.5 Opening/Closing Report Routing
Parameter Address
Opening/Closing Report Routing 0262

This is a global parameter that affects all zones, all areas and all PINs.
The Exit Error [18] and Recent Closing [19 20] reports follow alarm routing. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing
Tables on page 164 for the dialing sequence and a description of a Comm Fail event.
You must enable reporting at the Global Reporting Options prompt (page 77) and enter at least one phone
number for one routing destination (page 71).
26.6.6 Exit Time Restart

Parameter Address
Exit Time Restart 0263
Default
Exit Time Restart Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Exit Time Restart
Exit Time Restart
If this parameter is set to Restart (1), a violation, restoral, second violation of an Entry/Exit zone (before the end of Exit Delay)
restarts Exit Delay. One restart is allowed per arming cycle. Violation, restoral, second violation must all occur at the same
Entry/Exit zone.
Exit Time Restart is required for SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
26.6.7 Entry Delay Time 1 (2)
Parameter Address Range Data Digit Selections Default
Entry Delay Time 1 0264-0265 0,0 to 15,15 (Range: 30 to 255 seconds) 1,14 (30 seconds)
Entry Delay Time 2 0266-0267 0,0 to 15,15 (Range: 30 to 255 seconds) 7,8 (120 seconds)
The shortest possible Entry Delay is 30 seconds, regardless of the values entered in this parameter.
Entry Delay is the time the system allows the user to turn the system off before an alarm initiates.
If the user fails to turn off the system before Entry Delay expires, an alarm event occurs. Users must enter through a zone
programmed for Entry Delay to start the Entry Delay timer.
The panel provides two Entry Delays. Only Zone Function types programmed to initiate Entry Delay 1 use the Entry Delay time
you set at the Entry Delay Time 1 parameter. Zone Function types programmed to initiate Entry Delay 2 use the Entry Delay
time you set at the Entry Delay Time 2 parameter.
If the system is on and a user enters through a zone assigned to Entry Delay 2, the system initiates Entry Delay 2. If the user
enters through a zone assigned to Entry Delay 1, and then through a zone assigned to Entry Delay 2, the system will not
switch from Entry Delay 1 to Entry Delay 2.
The system sounds an Entry Delay tone at the areas keypad during Entry Delay.
Programming from the Keypad
Programming two Addresses for each sets the Entry Delay Time 1 and Entry Delay Time 2 parameters. The system multiplies
the first entry in the first Address by 16 and adds it to the entry in the second Address. For example, to set Entry Delay Time 1
to 50 seconds you would enter 3 in the first Address (3 x 16 = 48) and then enter 2 in the second Address (48 + 2 = 50). Use
the formula below to calculate the delay time for programming this parameter.
3 x 16 = 48 +2= 50
(Address 0264) (Address 0265) (Entry Delay Time)
26.6.8 Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time

Address Range Data Digit Selections Default
0268-0269 0,0 to 15,15 (Range: 30 to 255 seconds) 0,0 (use assigned Entry Delay)
The shortest possible Perimeter Only Delay is 30 seconds, regardless of the values entered in this parameter.
Making an entry in the Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time parameter creates an Entry Delay time that only applies when the
system is armed Perimeter Only.
If the system is Perimeter Only or Partial On and any armed zone is faulted (fire and 24-hour zones excluded), the system
starts a Perimeter Only Mode Entry Delay timer. It uses this Perimeter Only Mode timer for zones that are assigned to either
Entry Delay 1 or Entry Delay 2, and zones that are not assigned Entry Delay.
Setting the Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time to zero (0, 0) disables the Perimeter Only Mode delay feature. When the system
is turned on Perimeter Only and 0,0 is entered for Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time, the armed entry zones follow the Entry
Delay assigned to them (Entry Delay 1 or Entry Delay 2).
Programming two Addresses sets the Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time. The system multiplies the number entered in the first
Address by 16 and adds that total with the number entered in the second Address. For example, to set Perimeter Only Mode
Delay Time 1 to 50 seconds, you would enter 3 in the first Address (3 x 16 = 48) and then enter 2 for the second Address (48
+ 2 = 50). Use the formula below to calculate the delay time for programming this parameter.
3 x 16 = 48 +2= 50
(Address 0268) (Address 0269) (Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time)
26.6.9 Exit Delay Time 1 (2)
Parameter Address Range Data Digit Selections Default
Exit Delay Time 1 0270-0271 0,0 to 15,15 (Range: 45 to 255 seconds) 3, 12 (60 seconds) UL Listed
Exit Delay Time 2 0272-0273 0,0 to 15,15 (Range: 45 to 255 seconds) 7,8 (120 seconds)
The shortest possible Exit Delay is 45 seconds, regardless of the values entered in this parameter.
Exit Delay is the time the system allows users to exit the premises. Users must leave the premises before Exit Delay expires.
The panel provides two Exit Delays. When a user turns the system All On or Perimeter Only On with Delay, the system always
starts Exit Delay 1. Exit Delay is set to the time you enter at the Exit Delay Time 1 parameter.
If a zone assigned to Exit Delay 2 is faulted when Exit Delay is running, the system switches from Exit Delay 1 to Exit Delay 2
(the time you enter at the Exit Delay Time 2 parameter).
If a user force-arms an Exit Delay 2 zone, the system uses Exit Delay 2 and Entry Delay 2.
Programming two Addresses for each parameter sets Exit Delay Time 1 and Exit Delay Time 2. The system multiplies the
number entered in the first Address by 16 and adds that total with the number entered in the second Address. For example, to
set Exit Delay Time 1 for 50 seconds, you would enter 3 in the first Address (3 x 16 = 48) and then enter 2 for the second
Address (48 + 2 = 50). Use the formula below to calculate the delay time for programming this parameter.
3 x 16 = 48 +2= 50
(Address 0270) (Address 0271) (Exit Delay Time)
26.7 Areas
Use the parameters in this section to configure Areas. Along with the parameters in this section, each Area has 16 characters
of programmable text for an Area name and 16 characters of programmable Area Idle text. All panel text is programmed from
the LCD keypad in a special text-programming mode. See Programming Text Entry Parameters on page 11 for text
programming instructions.
26.7.1 Area # Account Number for Routing Destination 1 (2)

Default Account #
Account # for Routing Account # for Routing
Area (for both Routing
Destination 1 Destination 2
Destinations)
1 Address 0276-0281 Address 0286-0291 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
2 Address 0298-0303 Address 0308-0313 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
DS7240 only 3 Address 0320-0325 Address 0330-0335 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
DS7240 only 4 Address 0342-0347 Address 0352-0357 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0
For This Selection Press This at the Keypad For This Selection Press This at the Keypad
0 10 8 8
1 1 9 9
2 2 B 11
3 3 C 12
4 4 D 13
5 5 E 14
6 6 F 15
7 7 Terminate 0
Each Area uses the account number entered here to report to the Central Station receiver. Different account numbers can be
programmed for two routing destinations. See Routing Destinations on page 71 for a complete description of how the panel
directs reports to the routing destinations.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: AREAS
Account numbers can contain up to six (6) digits. If less than four digits are entered, the panel adds zeros to the end to make a
four-digit account number.
The panel automatically truncates the account number to the maximum length supported by that format. See Panel Events
and Reporting Formats on page 167 for a complete description of the reporting formats available to the panel.
Entering Account Numbers from the Keypad
One account number digit occupies each address. Use a zero (0) to terminate the account number entry if it is less than six
digits in length.
For example, to set an account number of 1234, enter 1 2 3 4 0 (0 = Terminate).
When entering account numbers, use 10 ([1] + [0] from the keypad) to enter 0; use 0 to terminate the
account number.
26.7.2 Area # Opening [89-96]/Closing [42-67] Reporting Options

Parameter Area Address
Area # Opening/Closing Reporting Options 1 0296
2 0318
3 0340 DS7240 only
4 0362
Default
Area # Open/Close Reporting Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Open or Close Reports for Area #
Open/Close Reports (for All On) for Area # Enabled
Restrict Open/Close Reports; Open After Alarm, Close
on Force Arm
Open/Close Reports for Perimeter Only (and Partial On)
Mode Must also select Open/Close Reports (for All On)
1 Second Bell Test on Closing Rpt Acknowledgement
Parameter Options
Open/Close Reports for Area # Enabled: This parameter configures Opening/Closing reports for each area. This also
includes the report for the Extend Auto event (Event 21) (see Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page 167). Opening
[89-96] and Closing [42-67] reports must be enabled at the system level (see Panel Events and Reporting Formats on page
167). Opening and Closing reports are also enabled by Authority Level (see Authority Level Option 6 on page 100).
Reporting must also be enabled at the system level (see Global Reporting Options on page 77).
Restrict Open/Close Reports; Open From Alarm, Close on Force Arm: When selected and Bell Time has expired, the
panel only sends opening reports when the user disarms the system after an alarm. The panel only sends closing reports
when a zone is force-armed. Force arming is set by authority level (see Authority Level Option 7 on page 101) and by Zone
Function configuration (see Options 2, Zone Function ## on page 127).
Open/Close Reports for Perimeter Only Mode: When selected, the panel sends closing reports when users arm the
system Perimeter Only. If any zones are bypassed, bypass reports are also sent. The panel sends opening reports when
users disarm the system. Perimeter Only arming is set by authority level (see Authority Level Option 2 on page 98) and by
Zone Function configuration (see Options 1, Zone Function ## on page 125).
1 Second Bell Test on Closing Ack: Outputs assigned to Alarm Output Functions 1-8, 1-9 and 1-10 activate for one
second. See Function, Output ## on page 138 for output function descriptions.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: AREAS
26.7.3 Lock Area # Reporting
Parameter Area Address
Lock Area # Reporting 1 0297
2 0319
3 0341
4 0363
Default
Lock Area # Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Lock Area Disabled
Use this parameter to lock area reporting to either Routing Destination 1 or Routing Destination 2. If you enable this feature for
an area, all reports for that area are sent to the selected destination. Routing parameters for the individual reports are ignored.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, all reports in the area are sent to Destination 1. If you set this parameter to 2, all
reports in the area are sent to Destination 2.
26.8 Authority Level Configuration
The Authority Level determines which functions are available to system users. Each user is assigned an Authority Level. Use
the parameters in this section to configure each of the four authority levels available in the panel.
Authority Level defaults consists of the following options:
Authority Level 1 (Master): All options except for Option 5.
Authority Level 2 (Unlimited): All options except for Option 5 & 14.
Authority Level 3 (General): All options except for Options 5, 8-15.
Authority Level 4 (One-Time): All options except 7-15.
Authority Function(s)
Level Options
1 All On Arming
2 Perimeter Only Arming
3 Partial On Arming
4 Disarming the System
5 One-Time Disarm
6 Send Open/Close Reports
7 Force Arm/Bypass
8 All Areas On/Off
9 View Alarm Memory, System Test, View System Trouble, Remote Program, Walk Test, Reset Sensors,
View Zone Trouble
10 Set Time/Date, Change Skeds, Renew One-Time PINs, /Add/Delete Other PINs, Set Chime Tone/Zones,
Set Partial On Zones, Auto Call Forwarding Enable (Digits to dial at All On)/Disable (Digits to dial at Disarm)
11 Move to Area
12 Extend Auto On Time
13 Adjust Keypad Settings, Change/Reset Outputs, Turn Chime On/Off, Turn Auto-Forward On/Off
14 Change PINs
15 View Log
Table 34: Authority Level Configuration Functions
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: AUTHORITY LEVEL CONFIGURATION
26.8.1 Authority Level Configuration Option 1: All On Arming
Parameter Address
Authority Level Configuration Option 1 0364
Default
Authority Level Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No PIN Required (Quick Arm)
Assign to Authority Level 1
This parameter enables/restricts the following functions by Authority Level:
[#] + [1]: All On with Entry Delay
[#] + [1]: All On with Entry Delay, No Exit Tone*
[#] + [1]: All On with No Entry Delay
[On] Key: All On with Entry Delay
[On] Key: All On with Entry Delay, No Exit Tone*
[On] Key: All On with Entry No Delay
If a PIN is required and not entered, the system asks for one after the function is entered.
* Exit Time is doubled when arming the system All On with Entry Delay, Silent (no Exit Tone).
To Quick Arm the panel All On, set Authority Level Config Option 1 to 0. A user PIN will not be required for All On arming.
26.8.2 Authority Level Configuration Option 2: Perimeter Only Arming
Parameter Address
Default
[#] + [2]: Perimeter Only with Entry Delay
[#] + [2]: Perimeter Only with Entry Delay, No Exit Tone*
[#] + [2]: Perimeter Only with No Entry Delay
[Perimeter Only] Key: Perimeter Only with Entry Delay
[Perimeter Only] Key: Perimeter Only with Entry Delay, No Exit Tone*
[Perimeter Only] Key: Perimeter Only with No Entry Delay
Zones must be configured for Perimeter Only arming. See Options 1, Zone Function ## on page 125.
* Exit Time is doubled when arming the system Perimeter Only with Delay, Silent (no Exit Tone).
To Quick Arm the panel Perimeter Only, set Authority Level Config Option 2 to 0. A user PIN will not be required for
Perimeter Only arming.
26.8.3 Authority Level Configuration Option 3: Partial On Arming
Parameter Address
Default
[#] + [3]: Partial On Arming with Entry Delay
[#] + [3]: Partial On Arming, No Exit Tone*
[#] + [3]: Partial On Arming with Entry No Delay
* Exit Time is doubled when Partial On Arming the system with Entry Delay, Silent (no Exit Tone).
To Quick Arm the panel Partial On, set Authority Level Config Option 3 to 0. A user PIN will not be required for Partial On
arming.
26.8.4 Authority Level Configuration Option 4: Disarming the System
Parameter Address
Default
Disarm Not Assigned (See Warning below)
This parameter enables/restricts disarming of the system by Authority Level.
If 0 (Disarm Not Assigned) is selected for Authority Level Option 4 (Address 0367), you will not be able to
disarm the system from a keypad or RF keyfob.
26.8.5 Authority Level Configuration Option 5: One-Time Disarm
Parameter Address
Default
One-Time Disarm Not Assigned
If an authority level can disarm the system, use this parameter to restrict that authority level to One-time Disarm (can only
disarm the system once).
26.8.6 Authority Level Configuration Option 6: Send Open/Close Reports
Parameter Address
Default
Send Open/Close Reports for Authority Levels 1-4
Authority Level 1 does not send Open/Close Reports
No Open/Close reports are sent for the Authority Level(s) selected at this parameter.
For example, if Open/Close Reports are enabled for an area and Open/Close reports are disabled for Authority Level 1 in this
parameter, the panel will send Open/Close reports for users assigned to Authority Levels 2, 3 and 4. It will not send
Open/Close reports for users assigned to Authority Level 1, even though Open/Close reports are enabled for the area.
See the following parameters to properly enable/disable Open/Close Reporting: Routing Destinations, page 71; Global
Reporting Options, page 77; Open/Close Reporting Options, page 92; and Area # Open/Close Reporting Options, page
96.
When Authority Level Config Option 6 is set to 15, Closing reports will be sent even if the arming key (On,
Perimeter Only, [#] + [2], [#] + [1], or [#] + [3]) does not require a PIN. Closing reports will send a user ID of 255.
Opening reports will not be sent.
26.8.7 Authority Level Configuration Option 7: Force Arm/Bypass
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
Force Arm
[#] + [0]: Selective Bypass
[Bypass] Key
Zones must be configured for Bypass/Force Arm operation. See Options 2, Zone Function ## on page 127.
26.8.8 Authority Level Configuration Option 8: All Areas On/All Areas Off
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
[#] + [8] + [0]: All On with Delay, All Areas
[#] + [8] + [1]: Off, All Areas
Both of these functions must be enabled at the system level first. See Arming Options 2 on page 91.
For [#] + [8] + [0] to work as described, the Authority Level assigned to Authority Level Configuration Option 8 must match the
Authority Level assigned to Authority Level Configuration Option 1 (All On Arming).
For [#] + [8] +[1] to work as described, the Authority Level assigned to Authority Level Configuration 8 must match the
Authority Level assigned to Authority Level Configuration Option 4 (Disarming the System).
26.8.9 Authority Level Configuration Option 9
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
View Alarm Memory ([#] + [4] + [0])
System Test ([#] + [4] + [1])
View System Trouble ([#] + [4] + [2])
Remote Program ([#] + [4] + [3])*
Walk Test ([#] + [4] + [4])
Reset Sensors ([#] + [4] + [7])
View Zone Trouble ([#] + [4] + [8])
* To enable the Remote Program function, see Remote Programming (DSRPS 2000+) Options on page 88.
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
Set Time and Date (send Date/Time Change [73] report) ([#] + [4] + [5])
Change Skeds ([#] + [5] + [2]) (see page 143 for more information on Skeds)
Renew One-Time PINs ([#] + [5] + [3])
Change (Add) Other PINs ([#] + [5] + [6])
Delete PINs ([#] + [5] + [8])
Set Chime Tone ([#] + [6] + [2])
Set Chime Zones ([#] + [6] + [3])
Set Partial On Zones ([#] + [6] + [5])
Auto-Call Forwarding Enable, Digits to dial at All On ([#] + [8] + [3])
Auto-Call Forwarding Disable, Digits to dial at disarm ([#] + [8] + [4])
26.8.11 Authority Level Configuration Option 11: Move to Area Function
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
This parameter enables/restricts Move to Area function ([#] + [5] + [0]) by Authority Level.
The Move to Area function allows the user to control multiple areas from one keypad when the system is split into two to four
areas.
See the DS7240/DS7220 Users Guide (P/N: 49211) for more information.
26.8.12 Authority Level Configuration Option 12: Extend Auto On Time Function
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
This parameter enables/restricts the Extend Auto On Time function ([#] + [5] + [1]) by Authority Level.
The Extend Auto On Time function delays the auto-on time by one hour if entered during the Auto On Pre-Alert Time.
See the DS7240/DS7220 Users Guide (P/N: 49211) and Auto On Pre-Alert Time on page 82 for more information.
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
Adjust keypad sounder volume and lighting ([#] + [4] + [9])
Change or reset outputs ([#] + [5] + [4])
Chime toggle Off/On ([#] + [6] + [1])
Auto-Forward Enable/Disable ([#] + [8] + [2])
26.8.14 Authority Level Configuration Option 14: PIN Change Function
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
This parameter enables/restricts the PIN Change function ([#] + [5] + [5]) by Authority Level.
26.8.15 Authority Level Configuration Option 15: View Log Function
Parameter Address
Default
No PIN Required
This parameter enables/restricts the View Log function ([#] + [8] + [5]) by Authority Level.
26.9 PIN Configuration, Installer PIN
26.9.1 PIN Length
Address PIN Length Default
0379 3 to 7 digits long 4 digits long
This parameter determines the number of digits in a PIN. All user PINs and the Installer PIN follow this length.
If the PIN length is shortened after PINs are entered, duplicate PINs could be created (for example, PINs 1235
and 1238 would both become 123).
If the PIN is lengthened, some PINs may be disabled (for example, PIN 396, if lengthened to five digits, would
become 396FF [F=blank] thus disabling the PIN since F cannot be entered at a keypad).
26.9.2 User Tamper Options

Parameter Address
User Tamper Options 0380
Default
User Tamper Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No User Tamper Alert Options
User Tamper [156] Reports Enabled
User Tamper Activates Burg Alarm Output
Reserved
Reserved
A user tamper event is:
A user entering a PIN that is not in the system (the user must enter the invalid PIN the number of times shown in User
Tamper Retry Count, page 106).
A user entering a PIN that is in the system but does not have the authority for the desired function.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: PIN CONFIGURATION, INSTALLER PIN
Parameter Options
User Tamper Reports Enabled: User Tamper events appear at all keypads assigned to the area where the user is
accessing the system. User Tamper [156] reports and user tamper activated alarm outputs are tied to the keypads area. If
only the User Tamper [156] Reports Enabled option is selected and there is a user tamper event, the text keypad where the
event occurs shows Keypad Locked!
User Tamper Activates Burg Alarm Output: If the burglary alarm output (steady alarm output) is selected and there is a
user tamper event, the text keypad where the user tamper occurred shows Keypad Locked! Other text keypads in the area
show Usr Tamper Alarm, Enter PIN to silence. While the keypad is locked out, any key pressed produces an error tone (for
text and LED keypads). Selecting User Tamper Activates Burg Alarm Output specifically activates output functions 1-8, 1-9
and 1-10. See Table 41, Output Function Types, on page 138, for descriptions of these output functions.
26.9.3 User Tamper Retry Count
User Tamper Retry Count 0381 0 = User Retry Count Disabled
1-15: # of attempts allowed before a 4 attempts
User Tamper event occurs
Entering zero (0) disables this feature. The panel creates a User Tamper event when a user enters an invalid PIN the number
of times programmed in this parameter.
For example, 5 is entered in this parameter. When an invalid PIN is entered five times, a User Tamper event occurs.
26.9.4 User Tamper Lockout Time
User Tamper Lockout Time 0382 0-15 (minutes) 1 minute
This parameter determines how long a keypad is locked out when a User Tamper event occurs (selections are in minutes).
26.9.5 Installer PIN
Installer PIN 0383-0389 3 to 7 digits long 9876543
Do not use digits 10-15 when creating the Installer PIN. Entering these digits makes the PIN unusable and locks
the installer out of the panel.
The Installer PIN length is the same as all other system PINs (see PIN Length, page 105). The default Installer PIN is
9876(543) depending on the PIN length.
The Installer PIN cannot disarm the system, but it can access all other functions.
The Installer PIN reports as User 0.
If the Installer PIN is left at its factory default, the panel generates a System Trouble event. Make sure to change
the default value. This event is Local Only and is stored in the history buffer. See Date Display and Enable PIN
Trouble on page 83 for information on disabling the System Trouble message.
This feature is disabled by default.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: PIN CONFIGURATION, INSTALLER PIN
26.10 Users
This section details configuring each users PIN, authority level and area assignment. The DS7240 and DS7220 systems
support up to 32 users. See page 107 for User programming parameters.
The panel reserves the following User IDs for automated functions: 252 (Sked operation); 253 (remote telephone
communication); 254 (DSRPS 2000+ communication); 255 (keyswitch operation or any local operation that does not require a
PIN entry, such as Quick Arming).
26.10.1 PIN, User #
Personal Identification Number (PIN) Addresses
User # Digit 1 Digit 2 Digit 3 Digit 4 Digit 5 Digit 6 Digit 7 PIN Default
1 Addr 0390 Addr 0391 Addr 0392 Addr 0393 Addr 0394 Addr 0395 Addr 0396 1234567
Use the PIN parameter to enter a PIN for each user. The PIN length parameter determines the number of digits in the PINs.
The default PIN for User 1 is 1234. If the PIN length is increased to five digits, the default PIN for User 1 becomes 12345. If six
digits are selected, the default PIN becomes 123456, and if the maximum number of digits is programmed, the default PIN
becomes 1234567.
Do not use digits 10-15 when creating a User PIN. Entering these digits makes the PIN unusable and locks the
user out of the panel.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: USERS
26.10.2 Authority Level, User #
User # Authority Level Address User # Authority Level Address
1 Addr 0397 17 Addr 0541
2 Addr 0406 18 Addr 0550
3 Addr 0415 19 Addr 0559
4 Addr 0424 20 Addr 0568
5 Addr 0433 21 Addr 0577
6 Addr 0442 22 Addr 0586
7 Addr 0451 23 Addr 0595
8 Addr 0460 24 Addr 0604
9 Addr 0469 25 Addr 0613
10 Addr 0478 26 Addr 0622
11 Addr 0487 27 Addr 0631
12 Addr 0496 28 Addr 0640
13 Addr 0505 29 Addr 0649
14 Addr 0514 30 Addr 0658
15 Addr 0523 31 Addr 0667
16 Addr 0532 32 Addr 0676
Users 2-32 Default User 1 Default

User # Authority Level Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Authority Level Assigned (Disabled)
This parameter assigns an authority level to each user. The Authority Level assigns functions to the users PIN and RF keyfob
(see Authority Level Configuration on page 97). See RF Devices on page 153 for a description of RF keyfobs and how to
assign them to users.
26.10.3 Area Option, User #
User # Area Address User # Area Address
1 Addr 0398 17 Addr 0542
2 Addr 0407 18 Addr 0551
3 Addr 0416 19 Addr 0560
4 Addr 0425 20 Addr 0569
5 Addr 0434 21 Addr 0578
6 Addr 0443 22 Addr 0587
7 Addr 0452 23 Addr 0596
8 Addr 0461 24 Addr 0605
9 Addr 0470 25 Addr 0614
10 Addr 0479 26 Addr 0623
11 Addr 0488 27 Addr 0632
12 Addr 0497 28 Addr 0641
13 Addr 0506 29 Addr 0650
14 Addr 0515 30 Addr 0659
15 Addr 0524 31 Addr 0668
16 Addr 0533 32 Addr 0677

DS7240 Area Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Assigned to Area 1
Assigned to Area 2
Assigned to Area 3
Assigned to Area 4

DS7220 Area Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Assigned to Area 1
Assigned to Area 2
Reserved
Reserved
Assigning PINs to multiple areas allows users to view and operate multiple areas from a single keypad.
26.11 Keypads
Wired Keypads 1 to 8 are fixed at Data Bus Addresses 1 to 8.
All keypads (and other Data Bus devices) are fully supervised. Supervision reports (missing, tamper, etc.) follow the System
Status Report routing.
Keypad Address Jumper Settings*
Address 1 2 4 8 16 MODE
1 X X
2 X X
3 X X X
4 X X
5 X X X
6 X X X
7 X X X X
8 X X
Table 35: Keypad Data Bus Addresses
* The settings listed in this column are the Address jumper pins that must be covered by a jumper plug. See Keypad Address
Programming on page 62 for more information.
26.11.1 Keypad # Options
Parameter Keypad Keypad # Options Address
Keypad # Options 1 0678
2 0680
3 0682
4 0684
5 0686
6 0688
7 0690
8 0692
Default
Keypad Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Keypad Options
Beep Keypad on System Trouble
Enable Exit Tone
Enable Area Display (DS7446i Keypad)
Dont Show Zone Status on Keypads
Parameter Options
Beep Keypad on System Trouble: Sounds a tone at the keypad when a System Trouble occurs.
For UL Listed installations, Beep Keypad on System Trouble must be turned on.
Enable Exit Tone: Sounds the Exit Delay tone at this keypad when Exit Delay is active.
Page 110 P/N: 49720DCopyright 2004 Detection Systems, Inc. DS7220/DS7240 Reference Guide
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: KEYPADS
Enable Area Display (DS7446i Keypad): If selected, the DS7446i Keypad shows the current state of each area using its
four Area LEDs.
Function Condition
LED flashes fast Area is in alarm
LED is on steady Area is armed, but not in alarm
LED flashes slow Trouble condition exists, or zone is bypassed in area
LED is off Area is disarmed, no alarm/trouble conditions exist, no zones are bypassed
Table 36: DS7446i Keypad LED Functions
If Enable Area Display is disabled, the DS7446i Keypad displays the area it is currently assigned to. If the keypad
is assigned to another area, the LED for the new area lights steady (for example, if the keypad is initially assigned
to Area 1, the Area 1 LED lights steady. If it is reassigned to Area 2, the Area 1 LED is off and the Area 2 LED
lights steady). This also applies if the user uses the Move to Area function ([#] + [5] + [0]) to reassign a DS7446i
Keypad.
Dont Show Zone Status on Keypads: If not selected (no in option box for this feature), the text keypad displays OK for
All On or OK for Perimeter across the second line. This indicates that all zones are normal and the system is ready to arm
All On or Perimeter Only.
If a controlled zone is faulted (either open or shorted), the Area Idle Text for this zones assigned area replaces
the OK for All On message.
If Dont Show Zone Status on Keypads is selected, the default Area Idle Text (Not Ready) should be
changed. See Programming Text Entry Parameters on page 11 for text entry instructions.
If a zone not configured for Perimeter Only arming is faulted (either open or shorted), OK for Perimeter replaces
OK for All On on the text keypads display. The system may be armed Perimeter Only, but cannot be armed All
On until the faulted zone is restored. See Options 1, Zone Function ## on page 125 for Zone Function
configuration details.
This option configures the LED keypad to not show zone status when its area is Off (disarmed). Users must press
the [*] key to see zone status.
26.11.2 Keypad # Area
Parameter Keypad Keypad # Area Addresses
Keypad # Area 1 Address 0679
2 Address 0681
3 Address 0683
4 Address 0685
5 Address 0687
6 Address 0689
7 Address 0691
8 Address 0693
Keypads 2-8 Default Keypad 1 Default

Keypad Area Assignment 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Area Assigned (Keypad Disabled)
Assign only one area to each keypad. Users (PINs) can be assigned to multiple areas.
The Move to Area function ([#] + [5] + [0]) allows users (PINs) assigned to multiple areas to view those areas from one keypad.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: KEYPADS
26.12 ABC Keys and Duress Parameters
The parameters in this section configure the ABC keys and the Duress function for all keypads and areas. Each key has 16
characters of programmable text that is displayed when the key is activated (press twice to activate). See Text Entry
Parameters on page 150, and Programming Text Entry Parameters on page 11, for information on System Text
programming and Text Parameter entries.
26.12.1 Area Options for ABC Keys
Parameter Address
[A] Key Area Option 0694
[B] Key Area Option 0696
[C] Key Area Option 0698

Area Options for ABC Keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled for All Areas
Use this parameter to assign areas to the ABC Keys. The keys report as follows:
[A] Key reports as Zone 100 for all Areas
[B] Key reports as Zone 101 for all Areas
[C] Key reports as Zone 102 for all Areas
26.12.2 Alarm Response for ABC Keys
Parameter Address
[A] Key Alarm Response 0695
[B] Key Alarm Response 0697
[C] Key Alarm Response 0699
Default
ABC Key Alarm Response Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm Response
Activate Fire Alarm Response
Activate Panic Alarm Response
Activate Emergency Alarm Response
This parameter determines the alarm response for the ABC Keys.
Parameter Options
Fire Alarm Response: Displays Fire Alarm Key # at the text keypads. If programmed, the panel sends a Fire Alarm [75]
report and activates the Fire Alarm output.
Panic Alarm Response: Nothing is displayed and no sounds are emitted at the keypads. If programmed, a Panic [6] report
is sent and the Burglary Alarm output is activated.
Emergency Alarm Response: Displays Alarm Key # at the text keypads. If programmed, an Emergency Alarm [4] report
is sent and the Burglary Alarm output is activated.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: ABC KEYS & DURESS PARAMETERS
26.12.3 Alarm Output Option for ABC Keys
Parameter Address
ABC Key Alarm Output Option 0700
Default
Alarm Output Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm Output for ABC Keys
Alarm Output for [A] Key
Alarm Output for [B] Key
Alarm Output for [C] Key
Reserved
Use this parameter to assign an alarm output option to the ABC keys. The alarm output will activate for the response type
assigned to each key. See Alarm Response for ABC Keys. This is a global parameter that affects all areas.
26.12.4 ABC Key Reports, Acknowledgement Beep at Keypad Options
Parameter Address
ABC Key Reports, Ack Beep at Keypad Options 0701
Default
ABC Key Report & Ack Beep Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm Report for ABC Keys
Enable ABC Key Reporting (A=100, B=101, C=102)
Acknowledgement Beep for [A] Key
Acknowledgement Beep for [B] Key
Acknowledgement Beep for [C] Key
This is a global parameter that affects all areas.
Parameter Options
Enable ABC Key Reporting: If enabled, the [A] Key reports as Zone 100, the [B] Key reports as Zone 101 and the [C] Key
reports as Zone 102.
Acknowledgement Beep for ABC Keys: The keypad beeps when the Central Station receiver acknowledges a report. If
the key is not programmed for reports, the beep occurs on activation.
26.12.5 Duress Reporting Options
Parameter Address
Duress Reporting Options 0702
Default
Duress Reporting Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No User Emergency Function Reporting
This parameter creates up to four (4) Duress users (and PINs). Creating a Duress user does not change any other
functionality programmed for that user.
Whenever a user enters a Duress PIN (PIN assigned to a Duress user), the panel sends a Duress [74] report and executes
functions per the Duress users authority level.
DS7240 Procedure
To create a unique Duress user (and PIN) for each area, select Option 15 and then assign each of the four users (User 29
through 32) to only one area.
To create one Duress user (and PIN) for all areas, select Option 1, 2, 4 or 8 and then assign that user (User 29 through 32) to
all four areas.
DS7220 Procedure
To create a unique Duress user (and PIN) for both areas, select Option 3, 5, 6, 9, 10 or 12 and then assign the two
corresponding users (User 29 through 32) to only one area.
To create one Duress user (and PIN) for all areas, select Option 1, 2, 4 or 8 and then assign that user (User 29 through 32) to
both areas.
26.12.6 ABC Key and Duress Report Routing
Parameter Address
ABC Key & Duress Report Reporting 0703

4 Reports to Destination 2 only on Destination 1 Comm Fail Event, Events to
Log/Printer
The [A] Key reports as Zone 100 for all areas, the [B] Key reports as Zone 101 for all areas and the [C] Key reports as Zone
102 for all areas.
This is a global parameter that affects all areas. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables on page 164 for the
dialing sequence and a description of Comm Fail event.
You must enable reporting at the Global Reporting Options prompt (see page 77) and enter at least one phone
number for one routing destination (see page 71).
The RF Keyfob Panic feature follows this routing.
26.12.7 Enable Keypad Tamper Response
Parameter Address
Enable Keypad Tamper Response 0704
Default
Enable Keypad Tamper Response Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disable Keypad Tamper Response
Enable Keypad Tamper Response
This is a global parameter that affects all keypads.
If this parameter is enabled, the panel checks for a keypad tamper response from each keypad. If this parameter is disabled,
the panel ignores the keypad tamper response.
This feature must be enabled at the panel by setting Address 0704 to 1 and by enabling the keypads tamper
jumper pins. See the installation instructions accompanying the keypad for information.
26.13 Locations
The DS7240 supports up to 40 Locations; the DS7220 supports up to 24 Locations. Locations are configured through the
following parameters: Device, Zone Function, Area and Zone Number. All four of these parameters must be configured for
each Location being used in the system.
26.13.1 Location ##, Device
Location # Address Location # Address Location # Address Location # Address
1 0706 11 0756 21 0806 31 (DS7240 only) 0856
2 0711 12 0761 22 0811 32 (DS7240 only) 0861
3 0716 13 0766 23 0816 33 (DS7240 only) 0866
4 0721 14 0771 24 0821 34 (DS7240 only) 0871
5 0726 15 0776 25 (DS7240 only) 0826 35 (DS7240 only) 0876
6 0731 16 0781 26 (DS7240 only) 0831 36 (DS7240 only) 0881
7 0736 17 0786 27 (DS7240 only) 0836 37 (DS7240 only) 0886
8 0741 18 0791 28 (DS7240 only) 0841 38 (DS7240 only) 0891
9 0746 19 0796 29 (DS7240 only) 0846 39 (DS7240 only) 0896
10 0751 20 0801 30 (DS7240 only) 0851 40 (DS7240 only) 0901
Locations 9-40 Default Locations 1-8 Default

Location ##, Device Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Device Assigned (Disabled)
On-board Zone (L1 to L8)
Wired Zone Expander (DX2010)
Doubled Wired Zone Expander (DX2010)
Each Location in the panel can be assigned to one of three types for devices:
The panels on-board sensor loops (L-1 to L-8)
A DX2010 Input Expander (Zone Doubled or non-Zone Doubled)
A Data Bus RF Zone Expander
Use each Locations Device parameter to assign the Location to a Device type.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: LOCATIONS
Table 37 and Table 38 show the selections for the Device parameter. The Device parameter tells the panel where to find the
sensor loop (or transmitter) status for each Location. The cells in these tables tell you which loop to use on each Device. Each
cell also tells you which EOL resistor value to use for each loop.
Device Parameter Selections
Location # On-Board DX2010 DX2010, RF Receiver 1 RF Receiver 2
(L-1 to L-8) Doubled
1 2.2 k only DBus* Addr 101 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
Loop 1, 2.2k Xmitter** 1 Xmitter 1
2 3.65 k only when DBus Addr 101 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
doubled with 10 Loop 2, 2.2k Xmitter 2 Xmitter 2
9 Not available as DBus Addr 102 DBus Addr 106 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
double zone. Loop 1, 2.2k Loop 1, 3.65 k Xmitter 9 Xmitter 9
10 Doubled with 2, DBus Addr 102 DBus Addr 106 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
2.2k Loop 2, 2.2k Loop 2, 3.65 k Xmitter 10 Xmitter 10
17 DBus Addr 103 DBus Addr 106 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
Loop 1, 2.2k Loop 1, 2.2k Xmitter 17 Xmitter 17
Table 37: Device Parameter Settings, DS7240/DS7220

* DBus = Data Bus; ** Xmitter = Transmitter.
Device Parameter Selections
Location # On-Board DX2010 DX2010, RF Receiver 1 RF Receiver 2
(L-1 to L-8) Doubled
25 DBus* Addr 104 DBus Addr 107 DBus Addr 50 DBus Addr 51
Loop 1, 2.2k Loop 1, 3.65 k Xmitter** 25 Xmitter 25
Loop 2, 2.2k Loop 2, 3.65 k Xmitter 26 Xmitter 26
Table 38: Device Parameter Settings, DS7240 only

* DBus = Data Bus; ** Xmitter = Transmitter.
RF Transmitters and Zone States
With the exception of the door/window transmitter, all RF transmitters show only two zone states (Normal and Shorted).
When a location is assigned to a RF zone expander, the door/window transmitter (RF3401) has the ability to
monitor both a reed switch (magnet) and a supervised sensor loop. After the ID for a door/window transmitter
is added, the panel shows the status for the zone as normal. If the first message from the transmitter is no
magnet and open loop, the panel reports the zone as faulted. If a normal magnet message is received, the
magnet is supervised. If a normal loop message is received, the loop is supervised.
For this example, the door/window transmitter is mounted on a doorjamb and its magnet on the door. Closing the door places
the magnet next to the reed switch. Now the panel has seen the reed switch in a normal (not faulted) state. From this point
forward, it will show the zone (door/window transmitter) as faulted whenever it sees the reed switch faulted. It will show the
zone as normal when the reed switch returns to normal, even though the sensor loop remains faulted.
To continue with this example, we have attached a contact on a window near the door. We have wired in the contact and the
EOL resistor to the Door/Window transmitters sensor loop and closed the window. Now the panel has seen the sensor loop in
a normal (not faulted) state. From this point forward, it will show the zone (door window transmitter) as faulted whenever it
sees either the sensor loop or the reed switch faulted. It will only show the zone as normal when both the reed switch and the
sensor loop return to normal.
When only the reed switch is monitored, only the Normal and Shorted zone states are shown.
When both the reed switch and sensor loop are monitored, only the Normal and Shorted zone states are shown.
When only the sensor loop is monitored, Normal, Shorted, and Open zone states are shown.
Cut out reed switch if not used.
26.13.2 Location ##, Zone Function
Location # Address Location # Address
1 0707 21 0807
2 0712 22 0812
3 0717 23 0817
4 0722 24 0822
5 0727 25 (DS7240 only) 0827
6 0732 26 (DS7240 only) 0832
7 0737 27 (DS7240 only) 0837
8 0742 28 (DS7240 only) 0842
9 0747 29 (DS7240 only) 0847
10 0752 30 (DS7240 only) 0852
11 0757 31 (DS7240 only) 0857
12 0762 32 (DS7240 only) 0862
13 0767 33 (DS7240 only) 0867
14 0772 34 (DS7240 only) 0872
15 0777 35 (DS7240 only) 0877
16 0782 36 (DS7240 only) 0882
17 0787 37 (DS7240 only) 0887
18 0792 38 (DS7240 only) 0892
19 0797 39 (DS7240 only) 0897
20 0802 40 (DS7240 only) 0902
Location # Zone Function Type Default

1 1 (24-hour Fire)
4 13 (Follower)
5 13 (Follower)
6 14 (Instant)
7 15 (Instant Perimeter)
8 4 (24-hour Tamper)
9-40 0 (Not Configured)
The Zone Function determines how the system responds to faults on the sensor loop assigned to the location. See Zone
Function Configuration on page 121 for complete details.
26.13.3 Location ##, Area
Location # Address Location # Address
1 0708 21 0808
2 0713 22 0813
3 0718 23 0818
4 0723 24 0823
5 0728 25 (DS7240 only) 0828
6 0733 26 (DS7240 only) 0833
7 0738 27 (DS7240 only) 0838
8 0743 28 (DS7240 only) 0843
9 0748 29 (DS7240 only) 0848
10 0753 30 (DS7240 only) 0853
11 0758 31 (DS7240 only) 0858
12 0763 32 (DS7240 only) 0863
13 0768 33 (DS7240 only) 0868
14 0773 34 (DS7240 only) 0873
15 0778 35 (DS7240 only) 0878
16 0783 36 (DS7240 only) 0883
17 0788 37 (DS7240 only) 0888
18 0793 38 (DS7240 only) 0893
19 0798 39 (DS7240 only) 0898
20 0803 40 (DS7240 only) 0903
Locations 1-40 Default

Location ##, Area Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Area Assigned (Disabled)
The Area assignment parameter determines which area a location is assigned to. Each location can only be assigned to one
area.
26.13.4 Location ##, Zone Number
1 0709-0710 01 5 0729-0730 05
2 0714-0715 02 6 0734-0735 06
3 0719-0720 03 7 0739-0740 07
4 0724-0725 04 8 0744-0745 08
9 0749-0750 09 25 0829-0830 25
10 0754-0755 10 26 0834-0835 26
11 0759-0760 11 27 0839-0840 27
12 0764-0765 12 28 0844-0845 28
13 0769-0770 13 29 0849-0850 29
14 0774-0775 14 30 0854-0855 30
DS7240 only
15 0779-0780 15 31 0859-0860 31
16 0784-0785 16 32 0864-0865 32
17 0789-0790 17 33 0869-0870 33
18 0794-0795 18 34 0874-0875 34
19 0799-0800 19 35 0879-0880 35
20 0804-0805 20 36 0884-0885 36
21 0809-0810 21 37 0889-0890 37
22 0814-0815 22 38 0894-0895 38
23 0819-0820 23 39 0899-0900 39
24 0824-0825 24 40 0904-0905 40
This parameter determines the Zone Number that appears on keypad displays, the panel event log and at the optional printer.
This is also the zone number reported to the Central Station.
This parameter can be used to create a Zone 1 for each Area.
26.14 Zone Function Configuration
The panel can monitor any combination of up to 40 sensor loops and/or RF transmitters (up to 24 for the DS7220). Each
sensor loop or transmitter is assigned to a location. Each location is assigned to one of 15 Zone Functions so that the panel
knows how to respond to sensor loop or transmitter changes.
26.14.1 Zone Function Type, Zone Function
Zone Function Zone Function Type Address Zone Function Type Default
1 Addr 0906 1 (24-hr Fire)
2 Addr 0914 2 (24-hr Fire w/ Alarm Verification)
3 Addr 0922 3 (24-hr, Voice Active)
4 Addr 0930 4 (24-hr, Tamper)
5 Addr 0938 5 (24-hr, Emergency)
6 Addr 0946 6 (24-hr, Visible Panic)
7 Addr 0954 7 (24-hr, Invisible Panic)
8 Addr 0962 8 (24-hr, Burglary)
9 Addr 0970 8 (24-hr, Burglary)
10 Addr 0978 10 (Keyswitch)
11 Addr 0986 11 (Entry/Exit Delay 1)
12 Addr 0994 12 (Entry/Exit Delay 2)
13 Addr 1002 13 (Follower)
14 Addr 1010 14 (Instant)
15 Addr 1018 14 (Instant)
This parameter defines what type of zone each Zone Function is associated with. See Table 39 for a description of each type
of zone and the events and reports associated with that Zone Function type.
Zone: Zones are turned on and off when the user turns the system on (armed) and off (disarmed).
24-hour Zone: 24-hour zones are always on and cannot be turned off by the user. Faults on 24-hour zones do not have to
be cleared or bypassed to turn the system on (armed).
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: ZONE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION
Zone Function Description Events/Reports [See page 167]
Type
0 Chime Mode No alarm or trouble response to opens or shorts (Chime
Only Mode Only).
1 24-hour, Short on sensor loop starts Fire Alarm response. Fire Alarm [75-77], Fire Missing [78], Fire
Fire Open on sensor loop starts trouble response. Restore from Alarm [79], Fire Restore from
Activates Fire Alarm Output (Temporal Code 3). Missing [174], Fire Trouble [80], Fire Trouble
Restore [81], Fire Bypass [26-27], Swinger
Do not assign doubled locations (zones) to a Fire Shunt [33], Restoral from Swinger Shunt [173],
Zone Function. Fire Unbypass [34]
2 24-hour, Short on sensor loop starts the verification process: Fire Alarm [75-77], Fire Missing [78], Fire
Fire with 1. Panel removes power to Zone 1 (and activates Fire Restore from Alarm [79] , Fire Restore from
Alarm Verification output function if programmed) for 15 Missing [174], Fire Trouble [80], Fire Trouble
Verification seconds to reset smoke detectors. See Table 41 Restore [81], Fire Bypass [26-27], Fire
for Fire Verification Output Function information. Unbypass [34]
2. Short on sensor loop within 120 seconds of reset
starts alarm response. If zone remains normal or
open for the 120-second verification window, there
is no alarm response.
Open on sensor loop starts trouble response.
Activates Fire Alarm Output (Temporal Code 3).
Do not assign doubled locations (zones) to a Fire
Zone Function.
3 24-hour, The Voice Verification Module shorts a Voice Active Trouble [139], Trouble Restore [146]
Voice Active zone to tell the panel a 2-way Voice Verification session
is active. Only trouble on open option is available. See
Voice Verification, Option 1 on 125 for a complete
description of the Voice Verification function.
24-hour Zone Types
4 24-hour, Short or open causes alarm response if no Trouble Alarm [3], Cross Alarm [10], Unverified Cross
Tamper Option. [17], Bypass [30-31], Swinger Shunt [33],
Unbypass [36], Swinger Shunt Restore [173],
Trouble [139], Trouble Restore [146], Missing
Trouble [88], Restore from Alarm [112], Restore
from Missing Trouble [176]
Emergency Option. [17], Bypass [30-31], Swinger Shunt [33],
Visible Panic Option. [17], Bypass [30-31], Swinger Shunt [33],
from Missing Trouble [176] reports.
Invisible Option. [17], Bypass [30-31], Swinger Shunt [33],
Panic No alarm tones or alarm display at keypad even if Unbypass [36], Swinger Shunt Restore [173],
the Alarm Output option is enabled. Trouble [142], Trouble Restore [149], Missing
8 24-hour, Short or open causes alarm response if no Trouble Burglary [7], Cross Alarm [14], Unverified Cross
Burglary Option. Trouble option generates alarm response when [17], Bypass [30-31], Swinger Shunt [33],
Area is armed All On/Perimeter Only/Partial On, Trouble Unbypass [36], Swinger Shunt Restore [173],
response when area is Off. Trouble [143], Trouble Restore [150], Missing
Alarm [87], Missing Trouble [88], Restore from
Alarm [116], Restore from Missing Alarm [175],
Restore from Missing Trouble [176]
9 Reserved Reserved for future use.
Table 39: Zone Function Type Options
Zone Function Description Events/Reports [see Page 167]
Type
10 Keyswitch See page 126, Zone Options 1 for Keyswitch Zone Alarm [9], Bypass [28,29], Forced Pt [32],
Function Type, for more information. Can be Swinger Shunt [33], Unbypass [35], Swinger
programmed for a momentary or maintained keyswitch. Shunt Restore [173], Trouble [145], Trouble
Restore [152], Missing Alarm [87], Missing
from Missing Alarm [175], Restore from Missing
Trouble [176]
11 Entry/Exit When panel is On, short or open starts Entry Delay 1 if Alarm [08], Cross Alarm [15], Unverified Cross
Delay 1 no Trouble Option. [17], Bypass [28,29], Forced Pt [32], Swinger
Follows Entry Delay 1 or 2. Follows Exit Delay. Shunt [33], Unbypass [35], Swinger Shunt
If this Zone Function type is programmed for Trouble Restore [173], Trouble [144], Trouble Restore
and a trouble condition occurs when the panel is armed, [151], Missing Alarm [87], Missing Trouble [88],
an alarm event is generated. If a trouble condition Restore from Alarm [117], Restore from Missing
occurs when the panel is disarmed, a trouble event is Alarm [175], Restore from Missing Trouble [176]
generated. Entry/Exit Delay and Start Entry Delay
settings are ignored for trouble events.
12 Entry/Exit When panel is On, short or open starts Entry Delay 2 if Alarm [08], Cross Alarm [15], Unverified Cross
Delay 2 no Trouble Option. [17], Bypass [28,29], Forced Pt [32], Swinger
Follows Entry Delay 1 or 2. Follows Exit Delay. Shunt [33], Unbypass [35], Swinger Shunt
Restore [173], Trouble [144], Trouble Restore
If this Zone Function type is faulted or bypassed at the
[151], Missing Alarm [87], Missing Trouble [88],
start of Exit Delay or during Exit Delay, Exit Time is set
Restore from Alarm [117], Restore from Missing
to Exit Delay 2.
Alarm [175], Restore from Missing Trouble [176]
If this Zone Function type is programmed for Trouble
Zone Types
and a trouble condition occurs when the panel is armed,

an alarm event is generated.
If a trouble condition occurs when the panel is disarmed,
a trouble event is generated.
Entry/Exit Delay and Start Entry Delay settings are
ignored for trouble events.
13 Follower Follows Exit Delay. Alarm [9] reports, Cross Alarm [16], Unverified
Follows, but cannot start Entry Delay. Cross [17], Bypass [28,29], Forced Pt [32],
Swinger Shunt [33], , Unbypass [35], Missing
Instant if first.
Alarm [87], Swinger Shunt Restore [173],
If this Zone Function type is programmed for Trouble Trouble [145], Trouble Restore [152], Missing
and a trouble condition occurs when the panel is armed, Trouble [88], Restore from Alarm [118], Restore
an alarm event is generated. from Missing Alarm [175], Restore from Missing
If a trouble condition occurs when the panel is disarmed, Trouble [176]
Entry/Exit Delay and Start Entry Delay settings are
ignored for trouble events.
14 Instant Does not follow Entry or Exit Delay. Alarm [9] reports, Cross Alarm [16], Unverified
Faulting an Instant zone during Entry/Exit Delay creates Cross [17], Bypass [28,29], Forced Pt [32],
an instant alarm, which terminates the Entry/Exit Delay Swinger Shunt [33], , Unbypass [35], Missing
period. Alarm [87], Swinger Shunt Restore [173],
If this Zone Function type is programmed for Trouble
and a trouble condition occurs when the panel is armed, Trouble [88], Restore from Alarm [118], Restore
an alarm event is generated. from Missing Alarm [175], Restore from Missing
Trouble [176]
If a trouble condition occurs when the panel is disarmed,
15 Reserved Reserved for future use.
Table 39 (cont.): Zone Function Type Options
26.14.2 On-board Loop Response Time
Zone Function On-board Loop Response Time Address
1 Addr 0907
2 Addr 0915
3 Addr 0923
4 Addr 0931
5 Addr 0939
6 Addr 0947
7 Addr 0955
8 Addr 0963
9 Addr 0971
10 Addr 0979
11 Addr 0987
12 Addr 0995
13 Addr 1003
14 Addr 1011
15 Addr 1019
Default
On-board Loop Response Time Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
160 ms
50 ms
Setting the On-board Loop Response Time to 0 tells the panel to look for a pulse that lasts at least 160 ms before declaring
the zone faulted.
Setting the On-board Loop Response Time to 1 tells the panel to look for a pulse that lasts at least 50 ms before declaring
the zone faulted.
This parameter does not affect off-board zones. Off-board zones have a fixed response time. See the off-board devices
installation guide for this time.
Detection Systems recommends leaving On-board Loop Response Time at the default setting (0).
26.14.3 Options 1, Zone Function ##
Zone Function Options 1 Address Options 1 Default
1 0909 0
2 0917 0
3 0925 1
4 0933 1
5 0941 1
6 0949 1
7 0957 1
8 0965 1
9 0973 0
10 0981 8
11 0989 5
12 0997 5
13 1005 1
14 1013 1
15 1021 5

Options 1, Zone Function 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Enabled
Enable Alarm Event Abort
Voice Verification
Armed for Perimeter Only Mode
Sensor Trouble Monitor
Parameter Options
Alarm Event Abort (Non-Fire Zones Only): Assigns the abort feature to a Zone Function. See Alarm Event Abort Window
on page 134 to learn how to set the Alarm Event Abort Window.
If a user acknowledges a non-fire alarm zone event by entering their PIN before the Alarm Event Abort Window
expires:
The alarm event is aborted. Alarm, Cancel* and Restoral reports associated with the alarm are not
transmitted and the event becomes a Local Only event.
The user hears a unique three long beep tone at the keypad.
The text keypads indicate that the alarm was aborted on the display. It appears as a slow flash in Alarm
Memory at LED keypads.
Alarm Event Abort is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
* A Cancel window starts with the initiation of the alarm event and follows the Bell Time. If the user acknowledges
the alarm inside the Cancel window (Bell Time), a Cancel [38] or a Fire Cancel [39] report is sent. If the Abort
feature is enabled, the Cancel report is sent if the user acknowledges the alarm after the Abort window has
expired, but before the Bell Time expires.
The Cancel Window is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
Alarm Event Abort has no effect on Fire and Fire with Verification Zone Function types.
This feature does not apply to alarm events initiated by the ABC Keys, the Duress PIN or the keyfob Panic
function.
Voice Verification: Allows the panel to control a 2-way Voice Verification Module. This module allows the Central Station
personnel to verify alarms with a two-way voice session with the premises. The premises phone line runs from the panel to it
and then to the premises phones. There are two other module connections to the panel: the programmable relay output (-12
VDC) programmed with the Voice Request output function, and a zone programmed as a Voice Active zone. The panel must
also have one or more zones with the Voice Verification option selected.
When a zone with Voice Verification generates an alarm event:
1. The panel transmits the alarm report to the receiver at the Central Station.
2. When the Central Station receiver acknowledges the report, the panel activates the Voice Request
output function and starts a 30-second report delay time. All reports are delayed. The Voice Verification
Module has 30 seconds to start a two-way voice session.
3. An operator at the Central Station picks up the phone line from the receiver with a DTMF telephone and
presses [2].
4. At the premises, the Voice Verification Module picked up the phone line when the panel activated the
Voice Request output function. When it hears the DTMF tone from the operator pressing [2], it begins a
two-way voice session by first shorting the panels Voice Active zone.
5. When the Voice Active zone is shorted, the panel silences the non-fire alarm output (sets the Bell Timer
to zero). Only the user can silence a fire alarm output.
6. As long as the Voice Active zone is shorted, the panel continues to keep reports buffered.
7. The Voice Verification Module ends the voice session by removing the short from the Voice Active
zone. The panel resets the Bell Time and Alarm Event Abort Window (assuming a user at the premises
did not change the arming state of the panel during the voice session). Normal reporting
(communication) resumes.
Armed for Perimeter Only Mode: Determines the zones that arm when the user arms the system Perimeter Only. Only
those zones assigned to a Zone Function (Zone Function types only) with this option enabled are armed.
Sensor Trouble Monitor: Enables/disables reporting the sensor trouble monitor fault condition. This feature does not apply
to fire zone types or non-fire 24-hour zone types. See Sensor Monitor Time on page 133 for a complete description of the
Sensor Trouble Monitor feature.
26.14.4 Options 1 for Keyswitch Zone Function Type
Parameter Address
Keyswitch Zone Function Type Options 1 0981
Data Digit Selection

0 Maintained, All On, Off from Any
1 Maintained, All On, No Off
2 Maintained, No On, Off from Any
4 Maintained, Perimeter Only, Off from Any
5 Maintained, Perimeter Only, No Off
6 Maintained, No On, Off from Perimeter Only or Partial On Arming
Default 8 Momentary, All On, Off from Any
9 Momentary, All On, No Off
10 Momentary, No On, Off from Any
12 Momentary, Perimeter Only, Off from Any
13 Momentary, Perimeter Only, No Off
14 Momentary, No On, Off from Perimeter Only or Partial On Arming
Use this parameter to assign a keyswitch zone function to a zone. For more information on keyswitches, see Keyswitch on
page 63.
Keyswitch Zone Function Type selections 3, 7, 11 and 15 are reserved for future use.
26.14.5 Options 2, Zone Function ##
Zone Function Options 2 Address Options 2 Default
1 0910 2
2 0918 2
3 0926 0
4 0934 7
5 0942 7
6 0950 7
7 0958 7
8 0966 7
9 0974 0
10 0982 2
11 0990 7
12 0998 7
13 1006 7
14 1014 7
15 1022 7

Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Enabled
Swinger Shunt
Alarm Output
Can Be Bypassed or Force Armed
Cross Zone
Parameter Options
Swinger Shunt: Activates both Swinger Shunt functions for Alarm Output (Functions 1-5, 1-8 to 1-12) and Zone Reporting.
See Swinger Count for Zone Reports on page 133 for additional Swinger information.
Swinger Shunt and Cross Zone are required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
Alarm Output: Activates the alarm output functions (Output Function 1-8 to 1-12, see Outputs on page 136) for alarm
events.
Can Be Bypassed or Force Armed: Only zones assigned to a Zone Function with this option enabled can be bypassed or
force armed. Bypassed zones remain bypassed for the arming cycle. Force armed zones return to the system automatically
if they restore during the arming cycle. 24-hour zones (fire and non-fire) can be made bypassable with this option. They
cannot be made to force arm since they are always armed.
Force Arming is not permitted for UL applications.
Cross Zone: Creates a Cross Zone Zone Function type:

When any zone assigned to the Cross Zone Function detects a pulse, the panel starts a 60-second timer.
If a second zone assigned to the same Cross Zone Function detects a pulse, the panel creates a Cross Zone
Alarm event for both zones.
A second pulse on the first zone does not create an alarm event.
If a single pulse on a Cross Zone lasts 20 seconds, the panel creates an alarm event for that zone only; it is not a
Cross Zone event.
If programmed for unverified event reporting (see Zone Response Options on page 131), the panel sends an
Unverified Cross [17] or a Fire Unverified [77] report zone when a pulse is detected without another cross zone
pulse to verify it. The Unverified event is not sent until the 60-second timer that starts when the first zone is
violated has expired.
RF Transmitters and Zone States
For more information on RF transmitters and zone states, see page RF Transmitters and Zone States on page 117.
26.14.6 Reporting Enable, Trouble Response Options, Zone Function ##
Zone Function Address Default
1 0911 11
2 0919 11
3 0927 10
4 0935 9
5 0943 9
6 0951 9
7 0959 9
8 0967 9
9 0975 9
10 0983 11
11 0991 9
12 0999 9
13 1007 9
14 1015 9
15 1023 9

Reporting Enable, Trouble Response Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Alarm or Trouble Reports
Alarm Reports Enabled
Trouble Response on Open
Trouble Response on Short
Alarm Restoral Reports Enabled
The trouble response for non-24-hour zones and 24-hour burglary Zone Function types occurs only when the zones are
disarmed. When armed, any zone fault generates an alarm response.
Other 24-hour zone types (Tamper, Emergency, Panic and Invisible) always have trouble response as programmed.
Fire zone types always have Trouble Response on Open and Alarm Response on Short regardless of
programming.
Parameter Options
Alarm Reports Enabled: If enabled, the system generates Alarm reports.
Trouble Response on Open: If enabled, an open circuit generates a Trouble response.
Trouble Response on Short: If enabled, a shorted circuit generates a Trouble response.
Alarm Restoral Reports Enabled: If enabled, the system generates Alarm Restoral reports.
26.14.7 Alarm Report Routing, Zone Function ##
Zone Function Address
1 0912
2 0920
3 0928
4 0936
5 0944
6 0952
7 0960
8 0968
9 0976
10 0984
11 0992
12 1000
13 1008
14 1016
15 1024

Reports for Alarm, Cancel and Exit Error events follow Alarm report routing. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing
Tables on page 164 for dialing sequence and a description of Comm Fail event.
Restoral reports are routed as shown in Restoral Reporting, Zone Function ## on page 130. Trouble reports are routed
globally. See Global Reporting Options on page 77.
To enable reporting at the Global Reporting Options prompt (see page 77), at least one phone number must be
entered for one routing destination (see page 71).
26.14.8 Restoral Report Routing, Zone Function ##
Zone Function Address
1 0913
2 0921
3 0929
4 0937
5 0945
6 0953
7 0961
8 0969
9 0977
10 0985
11 0993
12 1001
13 1009
14 1017
15 1025

The panel sends Restoral from Alarm, Restoral from Fire Alarm message [79]. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing
Tables on page 164 for dialing sequence and a description of Comm Fail event.
Alarm reports are routed as shown in Alarm Report Routing on page 129. Trouble reports are routed globally. See Global
Reporting Options on page 77.
26.15 Global Zone Configuration
26.15.1 EOL Resistor Value for On-board Locations 2 to 8
Parameter Address
EOL Resistor Value for On-board Locations 2-8 1026
Default
EOL Resistor Value Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No EOL Resistor
1 k EOL Resistor
2.2 k EOL Resistor
3.65 k EOL Resistor
Zone Doubled, 2.2 k & 3.65 k EOL Resistors
On-board Location 1 always requires a 2.2 k for EOL resistor for supervision. If zone doubling is turned on, the locations are
paired (see Table 40).
If no EOL is selected, then the input connected to COM is normal, and an open input reports as Open.
Location (Sensor Loop)
EOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.65 k X 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.2 k 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Table 40: EOL Resistor Location Pairing
Both 2.2 k and 3.65 k EOL resistors are included in the panels hardware pack. See Control/Communicator Assembly on
page 43 for EOL part numbers.
26.15.2 Zone Response Options (for all zones)
Parameter Address
Zone Response Options 1027
Default
Zone Response Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Selected
Enable Smart Swinger
Unverified Events Send Trouble Reports
Reserved
Reserved
Parameter Options
Smart Swinger: Allows zones that were Swinger Shunted to report new alarm events if they are faulted when Bell Time is
running. The Central Station receives alarm reports from zones that previously reported that they were Swinger Shunted.
When Bell Time is running, the Swinger Count applies to these zones. They only send reports until Bell Time expires or until
the swinger count is reached again at which time they will Swinger Shunt again. If these bypassed zones are faulted while
Bell Time is not running, they remain Swinger Shunted and do not send reports.
Unverified Events Send Trouble Reports: When enabled, Fire Alarm with Verification zones that have single, unverified
events generate an Unverified Event report. Also when enabled, zones with the Cross Zone option enabled that have a
single pulse generate an Unverified Event report.
SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction recommends that Unverified Events Send Trouble
Reports be enabled.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: GLOBAL ZONE CONFIGURATION
26.15.3 Bypass/Force Arm Report Routing
Parameter Address
Bypass/Force Arm Report Routing 1028

This parameter sets the routing for Bypass and Forced reports. See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables on page
164 for dialing sequence and a description of Comm Fail event.
26.15.4 Swinger Count for Alarm Output

Swinger Count for Alarm Output 1029 0 (Swinger disabled); 1-15 1
Each individual zone has a swinger count for alarm output.
Swinger Shunt reports are not sent for Swinger Shunt for Alarm Output. Swinger Shunt reports have their own swinger count
(see Swinger Count for Zone Reports on page 133). The Swinger Count is reset on both arming and disarming of the
system, allowing the Swinger Shunt feature to work for both non-24-hour and 24-hour zones. A trouble condition occurs after
Swinger Shunt.
Example: Assume the Swinger Shunt option is enabled, the panel is armed, no zones are in alarm and the Swinger Count for
Alarm Output is set to 2. Zones 1, 3 and 5 go into alarm. At the end of Bell Time, the Swinger Count for Alarm Output for
Zones 1,3 and 5 decrements from 2 to 1. Since the counter does not reach zero, no zones are bypassed. A second alarm
event for any of those zones bypasses that zone.
When the Swinger Count is set to zero (0), the Swinger Count for Alarm Outputs feature is disabled. The alarm
outputs activate on every new alarm.
Swinger Count for Alarm Output is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
26.15.5 Swinger Count for Zone Reports (Alarm, Trouble, Restore)
Swinger Count for Zone Reports 1030 0 (Swinger disabled); 1-15 1
Swinger shut down for the dialer is a global function that affects all zones.
Swinger Shunt [33] reports are sent for Swinger Shunt of zones.
The Swinger Count is reset on both arming and disarming, allowing the Swinger Shunt feature to work for both non-24-hour
and 24-hour zones.
Example: Assume the Swinger Shunt option is enabled, the panel is armed and there are no alarms. When the zone sends an
Alarm or Trouble event to the dialer, the swinger count for zone reports is checked. If the counter is at zero, the zone is
already Swinger Shunted and no report is sent. If the counter is not at zero, the panel decrements the counter. If the counter
then goes to zero after the report is sent, the Swinger Shunt [33] report is sent. The zone is then swinger shunted.
If the swinger count is set to zero (0), the Swinger Count for Zone Reports feature is disabled. The dialer sends all alarm or
trouble events.
Swinger Count for Zone Reports is required for SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
26.15.6 Bypass, Swinger Shunt, Sensor Trouble Report Options

Parameter Address
Bypass, Swinger Shunt, Sensor Trouble Report Options 1031
Default
Bypass, Swinger Shunt, Sensor Trouble Report Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Selected
Zone Bypass and Swinger Shunt Reports Enabled
Bypass and Swinger Shunt Restoral Reports Enabled
Sensor Trouble Reports Enabled
Sensor Trouble Restoral Reports Enabled
This is a global parameter that affects all areas.
Use this parameter to enable Zone Bypass, Swinger Shunt and Sensor reports (and their respective restoral reports are
enabled).
26.15.7 Sensor Monitor Time
Parameter Address Range Data Digits Default
Sensor Monitor Time 1032-1033 0-9 0,7
This parameter determines the number of days (00 to 99) that the panel can function without sensor (zone) activity (time
accumulates only when the area is off/disarmed).
This feature is assigned by Zone Function in Zone Options 1. This feature does not apply to fire zone types or non-fire 24-hour
zone types.
If there is no sensor activity after the entered time period, a trouble report is sent. See Options 1, Zone Function ## on page
125 to enable/disable the sensor trouble monitor fault condition.
26.15.8 Alarm Event Abort Window
1034 0-1 = 15 seconds; 2 = 30 seconds; 3-15 = 45 seconds 2 (30 seconds)
This parameter sets the length of the window. See Options 1, Zone Function ## on page 125 for more information on
applying the Alarm Event Abort feature to a Zone Function.
This option only affects non-fire zones. Fire and Fire with Verification zones are not affected by enabling this
option.
See Alarm Event Abort (Non-Fire Zones Only on page 125 for information when a user acknowledges a non-fire alarm zone
event by entering their PIN before the Alarm Event Abort Window expires.
Alarm Event Abort Window is required by the SIA Control Panel Standard for False Alarm Reduction.
26.15.9 Zone Trouble, Restoral from Trouble Report Routing

Parameter Address
Zone Trouble, Restoral from Trouble Report Routing 1038

Zone Trouble report events include the following:
RF Low Battery [121]
RF Tamper Trouble [121]
Trouble Events [139 145].
Restoral from Trouble report events include Restoral from Trouble [146 152].
See Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables on page 164 for dialing sequence and a description of Comm Fail event.
26.16 Global Output Configuration
The DS7240 supports a total of 20 programmable outputs including four on-board (PO 1 to PO 4) and up to 16 off-board.
The DS7220 supports a total of 12 Programmable Outputs (four on-board; up to eight off-board).
Outputs 5 through 12 are on an off-board Data Bus device (DX3010 Octo-Output Expander or DX3020 X-10 Control
Module), Data Bus Address 150.
Outputs 13 through 20 are on an off-board Data Bus device (DX3010 Octo-Output Expander or DX3020 X-10 Control
Module), Data Bus Address 151. Outputs 13 through 20 are available only on the DS7240.
26.16.1 Global Output Options
Parameter Address
Global Output Options 1039
Default
Global Output Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Selected
Output 2 Is Supervised Horn/Speaker Output
Send Output Set/Reset Reports
Enable Strobe Arming Flash to Indicate RF Keyfob and
Keyswitch Arm/Disarm
Enable Alarm Output Arming Beep to Indicate RF
Keyfob and Keyswitch Arm/Disarm
This parameter affects all programmable outputs.
Parameter Options
Output 2 Is Supervised Horn/Speaker Output: Programmable Output 2 (PO 2) becomes a supervised siren driver. If a
siren or speaker is not connected, the panel generates a Siren Trouble event that can include a Siren Trouble [160] report.
The restoral event is reported with Siren Trouble Restore [161]. See On-board Outputs on page 58 for more information.
Compatible speakers include D118 and D119 Speaker Drivers.
Send Output Set/Reset Reports: The panel sends Output Set [109 111] and Output Reset [106 108] reports when
Outputs are operated by a user, a Sked or DSRPS 2000+ (Remote Programming Software).
Enable Strobe Arming Flash to Indicate RF Keyfob and Keyswitch Arm/Disarm: The Strobe Output Function indicates
RF and keyswitch arming and disarming as follows:
3 seconds = transition to Off (disarmed)
6 seconds = transition to All On or Perimeter Only
Enable Alarm Output Arming Beep to Indicate RF Keyfob and Keyswitch Arm/Disarm: Any Alarm Output Functions (1-
8, 1-9, 1-10) indicate RF and Keyswitch arming and disarming as follows:
1 Beep = transition to Off (disarmed)
2 Beeps = transition to All On
3 Beeps = transition to Perimeter Only
The Enable Alarm Output Arming Beep to Indicate RF Keyfob and Keyswitch Arm/Disarm feature is only
available for RF Keyfobs (not RF Keypads).
26.16.2 Bell Time

1040 0-15 (1-minute increments) 5
Bell Time determines how long, 0 to 15 minutes, the Alarm Output, Fire Alarm Output and Silent Alarm Output functions
remain activated when triggered by an alarm event.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: GLOBAL OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
26.16.3 Siren Warble Frequency (Non-Fire Alarm Output Functions)
1041 0 (lowest tone/frequency) to 15 (highest tone/frequency) 7
Programmable Output 2 (PO 2) can be configured as a supervised horn/speaker output (see Global Output Options on page
135).
This parameter sets the warble frequency for the alarm output functions (1-8, 1-9, 1-10). The setting chosen here does not
apply to other output functions.
Lowering the frequency effectively raises the perceived volume.
26.16.4 Alarm Output Arming Beep Volume
1042 0 (no sound) to 15 (loudest); 1 = quiet 7
PO 2 can be configured as a supervised horn/speaker output (see Global Output Options on page 135).
This parameter sets the perceived volume for the Alarm Output Arming Beep only. No other siren sounds or output functions
are affected by this parameter.
26.16.5 Strobe Output Type Options
Parameter Address
Strobe Output Type Options 1043
Default
Strobe Output Type Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bell Time Activates Strobe Output Type
Alarm Output Type 1,8 Activates Strobe
This parameter configures the Strobe Output Type (see Output Function Type 1,6 Strobe in Table 41 Output Function Types
on page 139). Choose any combination of these options to activate the strobe output type. PIN entry resets the function.
If no strobe output type is selected (0 is selected for this option), the strobe output follows Bell Time (see page
135 for Bell Time information).
Parameter Options
Bell Time Activates Strobe Output Type: The Strobe Output Type 1,6 activates when an alarm event starts Bell Time. PIN
entry resets the function.
Alarm Output Type 1,8 Activates Strobe: Any event that activates Alarm Output Type 1,8 will also activate the Strobe
Output Type 1,6. PIN entry resets the function.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: GLOBAL OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
26.17 Outputs
The DS7240 supports a total of 20 programmable outputs including four on-board (PO 1 to PO 4) and up to 16 off-board
outputs. The DS7220 supports a total of 12 Programmable Outputs (four on-board; up to eight off-board). PO 2 can be
configured as a supervised siren output (8 ohm, 10 watt). See On-board Outputs on page 58 for more information.
PO 1-PO 4: On-board outputs
PO 5-PO 12: Off-board Data Bus device (DX3010 Octo-Output Expander or DX3020 Module) set to Address 150
PO 13-PO 20: Off-board Data Bus device (DX3010 Octo-Output Expander or DX3020 Module) set to Address 151 (Ouputs
13 through 20 available only on the DS7240).
26.17.1 Area, Output #
Output Area Address Output Area Address
DS7240 only
1 1044 13 1128
2 1051 14 1135
3 1058 15 1142
4 1065 16 1149
5 1072 17 1156
6 1079 18 1163
7 1086 19 1170
8 1093 20 1177
9 1100
10 1107
11 1114
12 1121
Default
Area Output Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3 (DS7240 only)
Area 4 (DS7240 only)
The Area assignment determines the scope of the output. Functions are only activated by keypads or zones assigned to the
same area. Outputs can be assigned to multiple areas.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: OUTPUTS
26.17.2 Function, Output ##
Output Digit 1 Digit 2 Default Function Output Digit 1 Digit 2 Default Function
1 1045 1046 1,10 (Alarm: Zones, 24-hr Fire/Non- 13 1129 1130 0,0 (Disabled)
fire Zones)
2 1052 1053 1,13 (Fire Verification) 14 1136 1137 0,0 (Disabled)
3 1059 1060 0,1 (Armed: All On/Perimeter 15 1143 1144 0,0 (Disabled)
DS7240 Only
Only/Partial On)
4 1066 1067 2,13 (Ready to Arm-No Zones 16 1150 1151 0,0 (Disabled)
Faulted)
5 1073 1074 0,0 (Disabled) 17 1157 1158 0,0 (Disabled)
9 1101 1102 0,0 (Disabled)
10 1108 1109 0,0 (Disabled)
11 1115 1116 0,0 (Disabled)
12 1122 1123 0,0 (Disabled)
This parameter assigns each output to a specific function. The function determines when the output activates. The Mode, Time
and Multiplier parameters, in combination with this Function parameter, determine when the output deactivates.
All output functions can be reset using [#] + [5] + [4] except Alarm Outputs that follow Function Types 1, 8 to 1, 12 and 2,11,
and those functions that can be reset by pressing [System Reset].
Digit 1 Digit Function Type Description
2
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Armed All, Perimeter Output activates when the system is armed All On, Perimeter Only, or Partial On. For Steady or Pulse
Only, or Partial On modes, the output remains activated until the system is turned off.
0 2 Armed Perimeter Output activates when the system is armed Perimeter Only, or Partial On. For Steady or Pulse modes,
Only or Partial On the output remains activated until the system is turned off, or moved to another armed state.
0 3 Armed All Output activates when the system is turned All On. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains
activated until the system is turned off, or moved to another armed state.
0 4 Auto Arm Pre-Arming Output activates at the start of the Auto Arm Pre-Alert. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains
Alert activated for the duration of the alert. See the Auto On Pre-Alert Time parameter, page 82.
0 5 Exit Delay or Entry Output activates at the start of Exit Delay or Entry Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output
Delay. remains activated until entry or exit delay ends.
0 6 Exit Delay Output activates at the start of Exit Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains activated
until exit delay ends.
0 7 Exit Delay Finished Output activates at the end of Exit Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains activated
(until disarmed) until the system is disarmed.
0 8 Bell Test on Close For systems programmed for closing reports, the output activates when the acknowledgement for the
closing report is received. For systems not sending closing reports, the output activates at the end of
Exit Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains activated until the system is disarmed.
0 9 Entry Delay Output activates at the start of Entry Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes the output remains activated
until Entry Delay ends.
0 10 Entry Delay + Chime Output activates at the start of Entry Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains activated
until entry delay ends. The output also activates whenever a Chime zone is faulted. The output does
not activate if Chime Tone is turned off.
0 11 Exit Delay, Entry Delay, Output activates at the start of Exit Delay or Entry Delay. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output
Chime remains activated until Entry or Exit Delay ends. The output also activates whenever a Chime zone is
faulted. The output does not activate if Chime Tone is turned off.
Table 41: Output Function Types
Digit Digit Function Type Description
1 2
0 12 Phone Line Fail Output activates when a Phone Line Fail condition is detected. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output
remains activated until the condition is cleared. This output works independently of Address 0220 (p.
75), Phone Line Fault Response Options.
0 13 Ack Received (any Output activates when the acknowledgement for any report is received. For Steady or Pulse modes, [#] +
report) [4] + [7] resets.
0 14 AC Fail Output activates when a AC Fail condition is detected. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains
activated until the condition is cleared.
0 15 Low or Missing Battery Output activates when a panel Low or Missing Battery condition occurs. For Steady or Pulse modes, the
output remains activated until the condition is cleared.
1 0 PO 2 (on-board) Siren Output activates when a Siren Supervision Fail condition is detected. For Steady or Pulse modes, the
Supervision Fail output remains activated until the condition is cleared.
1 1 Sensor Trouble Monitor Output activates when a Sensor Trouble Monitor condition is detected in conjunction with the selection
made for the Sensor Monitor Time setting. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains activated until
the Sensor Monitor Trouble condition is cleared.
1 2 Duress, [#]+[4]+[7] (reset) Output activates whenever a Duress PIN is entered. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains
resets. activated until user enters [#] + [4] + [7].
1 3 User Tamper, [#]+[4]+[7] Output activates on a User Tamper event. For Steady or Pulse modes, the output remains activated until
(reset) resets. user enters [#] + [4] + [7].
1 4 Arming Beeps (for Disarm/All On/Perimeter Only/Partial On Beeps for keyswitch/RF arming. 1=Off, 2=All, 3=Perimeter Only.
keyswitch/RF arming) Mode and Time parameters do not apply. This feature works in conjunction with Address 1039
(p135). Available for on-board outputs only.
1 5 Bell Time Starts on any Output activates on any alarm event. Entering PIN terminates Bell Time. For Steady and Pulse modes,
Alarm Event. PIN entry the output remains activated for the duration programmed in the Bell Time parameter.
Stops. Activates on Bell
Test.
1 6 Strobe See Strobe Output Type Options, page 136, to learn how Strobe starts. PIN entry resets the function.
1 7 Silent Alarm Activated by alarm on non-fire zones programmed for No Alarm Output. Follows Bell Time for Steady and
Pulse modes. PIN stops.
1 8 Alarm All On, Perimeter Activated by alarm on zone when All On, Perimeter Only, and Partial On Armed, or by alarm on Non-fire
Only, and Partial On 24 hour zone, and by user/installer Bell Test. Follows Bell Time for Steady and Pulse modes. PIN
Arming, Non-fire 24 hour resets.
alarms Follows programming for Alarm output types.
1 9 Alarm Perimeter Only Activated by alarm on zone when Perimeter Only, and Partial On Armed, or by alarm on Non-fire 24 hour
and Partial On Arming zone, and by user/installer Bell Test. Follows bell time for Steady and Pulse modes. PIN resets.
Modes, Non-fire 24 hour Follows programming Alarm output types.
alarms
1 10 Alarm zones, 24-hr Activated by alarm on zone when All On, Perimeter Only, and Partial On Armed, or by alarm on Fire and
zones (Fire and Non-Fire) Non-fire 24 hour zone, and by user/installer Bell Test. Follows bell time for Steady and Pulse modes.
Pulses in Temporal Code 3 format per NFPA and UL requirements for Fire alarms only. PIN resets.
Off-board outputs cannot provide output in Temporal Code 3 format (only on-board outputs). Off-
board outputs configured for Temporal Code 3 will provide a steady output. Follows
programming for Alarm output types. Temporal Code 3 for Fire alarms only.
1 11 Fire Alarm Activated by alarm on Fire zone, and by user/installer Bell Test. Follows Bell Time. Pulses in Temporal
Code 3 format per NFPA and UL requirements. Mode and Time parameters do not apply. PIN resets.
Off-board outputs cannot provide output in Temporal Code 3 format (only on-board outputs). Off-
board outputs configured for Temporal Code 3 will provide a steady output. Follows
programming for Alarm output types.
1 12 Fire Alarm, Latching Activated by alarm on Fire zone, and by user/installer Bell Test. Does not pulse in Temporal Code 3
format. Mode and Time parameters do not apply. [#] + [4] + [7] resets.
Follows programming for Alarm output types.
1 13 Fire Verification/Reset Inverted, resettable output used with Fire Verification zones. Verification for Fire Verification Zone
Function type and [#] + [4] + [7] activate output for approximately 15 seconds. Mode and Time
parameters do not apply. See page 122 for 24-hour, Fire with Alarm Verification Zone Function type
description. Used for 4-wire smoke detectors.
1 14 System Trouble Activates on any System Trouble. Resets when all system troubles are clear.
1 15 O Key (Trapezoid Key Activates when Trapezoid Key on RF Keyfob is pressed. [#] + [4] + [7] resets. Pressing O (trapezoid) key
on RF Key Fob) again also resets output.
Digit Digit Function Type Description
1 2
2 0 P Key(Rising Sun Key on RF Activates when Rising Sun Key on RF Keyfob is pressed. [#] + [4] + [7] resets. Pressing P (sun) key
Fob) again also resets output.
2 1 Panic on RF Fob Activates when Arm Key (locked icon) and Disarm Key (unlocked icon) on RF Keyfob are pressed at
the same time. [#] + [4] + [7] resets.
2 2 Panic on RF Fob, Bell Time, Activates when Arm Key (locked icon) and Disarm Key (unlocked icon) on RF Keyfob are pressed at
PIN resets the same time. Steady and Pulse modes follow bell time. PIN resets.
2 3 [A] Key Activates when [A] key is pressed twice. [#] + [4] + [7] resets if no alarm response is assigned.
2 4 [B] Key Activates when [B] key is pressed twice. [#] + [4] + [7] resets if no alarm response is assigned.
2 5 [C] Key Activates when [C] key is pressed twice. [#] + [4] + [7] resets if no alarm response is assigned.
2 6 3 Unsuccessful Dialing Activates after 3 unsuccessful dialing attempts. Resets with first successful call or [#] + [4] + [7].
Attempts.
2 7 Communication Fail Event. Activates after Communication Fail Event. Resets with any successful communication or [#] + [4] +
Successful communication [7].
clears.
2 8 Panel Off Hook Activates when the panel takes the phone line off hook for a dialing attempt. Resets when the panel
finishes with the phone line and goes on hook.
2 9 Ring Detect Activates when the panel detects a ring on the phone line. Resets when ringing stops.
2 10 Voice Request For use with an optional Voice Verification Module. The output activates for 2 seconds when the
panel receives an acknowledgement of an alarm report from a zone with the Voice Verification option
enabled. Mode and Time parameters do not apply.
2 11 Follow Keypad Sounder Available for on-board outputs only. Output follows keypad sounder Mode and Time parameters do
not apply.
2 12 Chime Activates per Chime Feature configuration. Follows keypad sounder per Chime Tone configuration.
2 13 Ready to Arm (No zones Output is activated (on) when: (1) panel is disarmed & no zones are faulted (2) panel is armed & no
faulted) zones are faulted (3) panel is armed & any zone is faulted. Output is deactivated (off) when panel is
disarmed & any zone is faulted. Output is deactivated even if the zone became faulted when panel
was armed.
2 14 Exit Error Activates if zone is faulted at the end of Exit Delay. Resets when the system is disarmed.
2 15 AC 60 Hz Activates on 60 Hz. Resets on 50 Hz.
3 0 Ground Start Activates for approximately 0.5 seconds at the start of any dialing attempt. Use to bring up dial tone in
ground start phone systems. See page 49 for wiring instructions.
3 1 Follow Zone Function 1 These 15 output functions activate for any fault on any zone assigned to the specified Zone Function.
To
3 15 Follow Zone Function 15
4 0 Change Outputs Activated/deactivated by Change Outputs function ([#] + [5] + [4]).
4 1 Alarm Zone Function 1 These 15 output functions activate for alarms on any zone assigned to the specified Zone Function
To and the area(s) the output is assigned to. They reset when none of the zones assigned to the
specified Zone Function are in alarm.
4 15 Alarm Zone Function 15
5 1 Trouble Zone Function 1 These 15 output functions activate for troubles on any zone assigned to the specified Zone Function.
To They reset when none of the zones assigned to the specified Zone Function are in trouble.
5 15 Trouble Zone Function 15
6 1 Follow PIN 1 These output functions activate when the specified PIN is entered.
To PIN area assignments are ignored when these output functions are selected.
6 15 Follow PIN 15
7 0 Follow PIN 16
To
7 15 Follow PIN 31
8 0 Follow PIN 32
8 1 Sked Only This output type is only available for Outputs 1 to 15. Activated by Skeds. See Skeds on page 143
for more information.
8 3 Always On Output is always activated.
26.17.3 Mode (Steady, Pulse, One Shot), Output ##
Output Mode Address Default Output Mode Default
Address
1 1047 1 (Steady) 11 1117 1 (Steady)
2 1054 1 (Steady) 12 1124 1 (Steady)
3 1061 1 (Steady) 13 (DS7240 only) 1131 1 (Steady)
Use this parameter to select a Mode setting for each output. The Mode determines how the output responds once it has
activated.
Mode Mode Description
0 Output Disabled
1 Steady Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs are energized when activated.
Time parameters do not apply. Resets as specified by Output function.
2 Latch Normally open. On-board outputs latch low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs latch energized when activated.
Time parameters do not apply. Resets with [System Reset] key or [#] + [4] + [7].
3 Toggle Toggle output state. When the output is activated, the output toggles states.
4 Pulse Normally open. On-board outputs pulse low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs pulse energized when activated.
The time parameters set the activated duration of the pulse.
5 One Shot Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs are energized when activated.
Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Always runs the full duration. A new triggering event does not restart.
6 One Shot with Re-Trigger Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs are energized
when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Always runs at least the full duration. A new
triggering event restarts the one shot timer. Could be used with a motion sensor as trigger for lighting control.
7 One Shot with Reset Normally open. On-board outputs go low (sink current) when activated. Off-board outputs are energized
when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One Shot (activation). Termination of the triggering event terminates the
One Shot early.
8 Steady, Reversed Logic Normal On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally energized. On-
board outputs open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize when activated. Time parameters do not apply. Resets as
specified by output function.
9 Latch, Reversed Logic Normal On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally energized. On board
outputs latch open when activated. Off-board outputs latch de-energized when activated. Time parameters do not apply. Resets with
[System Reset] key or [#] + [4] + [7].
10 Pulse, Reversed Logic Normal On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally energized. On board
outputs pulse open when activated. Off-board outputs pulse de-energized when activated. The time parameters set the activated
duration of the pulse.
11 One Shot, Reverse Logic Normal On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally energized. On
board outputs go open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize when activated. Time parameter sets the duration of the One
Shot (activation). Always runs the full duration. A new triggering event does not restart.
12 One Shot with Re-Trigger, Reverse Logic Normal On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally
energized. On board outputs go open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize when activated. Time parameter sets the
duration of the One Shot (activation). Always runs at least the full duration. A new triggering event restarts the one shot timer. Could
be used with a motion sensor as trigger for lighting control.
13 One Shot with Reset, Reverse Logic Normal On-board outputs normally low (sink current). Off-board outputs are normally
energized. On board outputs go open when activated. Off-board outputs de-energize when activated. Time parameter sets the
duration of the One Shot (activation). Termination of the triggering event terminates the One Shot early.
Table 42: Output Mode Options
26.17.4 Base, Output, ##
Output Base Address Output Base Address
1 1048 11 1118
2 1055 12 1125
3 1062 13 (DS7240 only) 1132
4 1069 14 (DS7240 only) 1139
5 1076 15 (DS7240 only) 1146
6 1083 16 (DS7240 only) 1153
7 1090 17 (DS7240 only) 1160
8 1097 18 (DS7240 only) 1167
9 1104 19 (DS7240 only) 1174
10 1111 20 (DS7240 only) 1181
Default
Output Base Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
200 ms (onboard outputs only)
1 second
1 minute
1 hour
Multiply the Base with the Multiplier to determine the time the outputs off time.
See Table 43 and Table 44.
26.17.5 Multiplier
Multiplier Multiplier
Output Digit 1 Digit 2 Default Output Digit Digit 2 Default
1
1 1049 1050 0, 0 11 1119 1120 0, 0
2 1056 1057 0, 0 12 1126 1127 0, 0
3 1063 1064 0, 0 13 (DS7240 only) 1133 1134 0, 0
4 1070 1071 0, 0 14 (DS7240 only) 1140 1141 0, 0
5 1077 1078 0, 0 15 (DS7240 only) 1147 1148 0, 0
6 1084 1085 0, 0 16 (DS7240 only) 1154 1155 0, 0
7 1091 1092 0, 0 17 (DS7240 only) 1161 1162 0, 0
8 1098 1099 0, 0 18 (DS7240 only) 1168 1169 0, 0
9 1105 1106 0, 0 19 (DS7240 only) 1175 1176 0, 0
10 1112 1113 0, 0 20 (DS7240 only) 1182 1183 0, 0
Multiply the Base with the Multiplier to determine the outputs off time.
See Table 43 and Table 44.
26.17.6 Configuring Steady, Pulse and One Shot Mode
Steady and Toggle Modes: These modes are not affected by the Time Base and Time Multiplier parameters below.
Pulse Modes: The system calculates the On Time (activation) and the Off Time for outputs based on the values in the Base
and Multiplier columns (see Table 43). The duration, or On Time, of an output is determined by selecting one of the four
Base options from Table 43. Calculate the Off Time by multiplying the Base by the Multiplier.
The Time Base of 200 ms in Table 43 and Table 44 is only available for on-board outputs.
Base On Time Multiplier Off Time Tolerance

(On Time = Time of Base) (Off Time = Base x Multiplier)
0 0 N/A Always Off N/A
1 (200 ms) 200 ms 01-99 200 ms 19.8 sec 200 ms
2 (1 sec) 1 sec 01-99 1 99 sec 1 sec
3 (1 min) 1 min 01-99 1 99 min 1 min
4 (1 hr) 1 hr 01-99 1 99 hr 1 hr
Table 43: Pulse Mode Configuration
One Shot Modes: The duration of the On Time of a One Shot output is determined by multiplying the Base by the Multiplier.
Base Multiplier On Time Tolerance

(On Time = Base x Multiplier)
0 N/A 0 N/A
1 (200 ms) 01-99 200 ms 19.8 sec 200 ms
2 (1 sec) 01-99 1 sec 99 sec 1 sec
3 (1 min) 01-99 1 min 99 min 1 min
4 (1 hr) 01-99 1 hr 99 hr 1 hr
Table 44: One Shot Mode Configuration
Pulse Modes and One Shot Modes: If using a larger time base value, be aware that the output may not activate
immediately as desired. It may wait until the off time has expired before activating.
26.18 Skeds
Skeds are programmable events that occur at a specific (programmable) time of day and day of the week. These events can
be Auto On, Auto Perimeter Only On, Auto Partial On, Auto Off or Sked Output Function.
Users can extend Auto On, Auto Perimeter Only On and Auto Partial On time by one hour using the Extend Auto On Time
function ([#] + [5] + [1]). When [#] + [5] + [1] is executed, the panel sends an Auto On Extended [21] report.
Users can also change Skeds using the Change Skeds function ([#] + [5] + [2]). To enable the Change Skeds function by
Authority Level, see Authority Level Configuration Option 10 on page 102.
The following sections and parameters detail the programming of each of the eight Skeds. The parameters in the Outputs
section, page 136, determine the characteristics of the output activation that occurs at the Sked time.
26.18.1 Type, Sked #

Sked Type Address
1 1184
2 1192
3 1200
4 1208
5 1216
6 1224
7 1232
8 1240
Default
Sked Type Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled
Auto All On
Auto Perimeter Only On
Auto Partial On
Auto Off
Output On (DS7240: Outputs 1-15; DS7220: Outputs 1-
12)
Output Off (DS7240: Outputs 1-15; DS7220: Outputs 1-
12)
During the Auto On Pre-Alert (see Auto On Pre-Alert Time on page 82), the user can extend Auto On, Auto Perimeter Only
On and Auto Partial On by one hour using the Extend Auto On Time function ([#] + [5] + [1]). When the Extend Auto On Time
function is executed, the panel sends an Auto On Extended [21] report.
The Output Function On and Output Function Off Sked types override any output function at Sked time
(except for Alarm Output Functions 1,8 to 1,12).
To adjust a Sked ([#] + [5] + [2]), a Sked must first be entered.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: SKEDS
26.18.2 Assign (Area or Output), Sked #
Sked Address Default Assignment
1 1185 0 (Disabled)
2 1193 0 (Disabled)
3 1201 0 (Disabled)
4 1209 0 (Disabled)
5 1217 0 (Disabled)
6 1225 0 (Disabled)
7 1233 0 (Disabled)
8 1241 0 (Disabled)
Data Digit Selection Data Digit Selection

0 Disabled 8 Output 8
1 Area 1 or Output 1 9 Output 9
2 Area 2 or Output 2 10 Output 10
3 Area 3 (DS7240 only) or Output 3 11 Output 11
4 Area 4 (DS7240 only) or Output 4 12 Output 12
5 Output 5 13 (DS7240 only) Output 13
Entering a zero (0) in this parameter disables the Sked.
If the Sked Type is Auto On or Auto Off, this parameter assigns an Area to the Sked.
If the Sked Type is Output On or Output Off, this parameter assigns a programmable output. How the programmable output
functions at Sked time is determined in the Outputs section. See page 136.
The output assigned to the Sked in this parameter can be any output. The Sked overrides that function at Sked Time.
The Sked function is only available for Outputs 1 to 15 for the DS7240 (Outputs1 to 12 for the DS7220). For the DS7220, Data
Digits 3 and 4 apply to Outputs 3 and 4.
26.18.3 Time, Sked #
Time Addresses
Sked (H _ _ _ ) (_H__) ( _ _ M_ ) (___M) Default
1 1186 1187 1188 1189 0000 (Disabled)
2 1194 1195 1196 1197 0000 (Disabled)
3 1202 1203 1204 1205 0000 (Disabled)
4 1210 1211 1212 1213 0000 (Disabled)
5 1218 1219 1220 1221 0000 (Disabled)
6 1226 1227 1228 1229 0000 (Disabled)
7 1234 1235 1236 1237 0000 (Disabled)
8 1242 1243 1244 1245 0000 (Disabled)
Enter the time of day that the Sked will occur. There are four digits in this entry, each one occupying an Address.
Enter the time in 24-hour format (HHMM) where Midnight is 2400, noon is 1200 and 12:01 am is 0001.
Entering 0000 disables the Sked.
26.18.4 Days Option 1, Sked #
Sked Days Option 1 Address Sked Days Option 1 Address

1 1190 5 1222
2 1198 6 1230
3 1206 7 1238
4 1214 8 1246
Default
Sked Days 1 Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected
Every Day
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Use this parameter to determine the day of the week the Sked occurs.
Entering zero (0) for this parameter will disable the Sked if no selection is made at Sked 1 Days, Option 2.
26.18.5 Days Option 2, Sked #
Sked Days Option 2 Address Sked Days Option 2 Address

1 1191 5 1223
2 1199 6 1231
3 1207 7 1239
4 1215 8 1247
Default
Sked Days 2 Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Use this parameter to determine the day of the week the Sked occurs.
Entering zero (0) for this parameter will disable the Sked if no selection is made at Sked 1 Days, Option 1.
If the Every Day option is selected in the Days Option 1, Sked # parameter, it overrides any selection made in
the Days Option 2, Sked # parameter.
26.19 Data (Option) Bus Device Configuration
The following parameters configure devices that connect to the panels Data Bus.
26.19.1 Premises RF Receiver Options
Parameter Address
Premises RF Receiver Options 1249
Default
Option 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No RF Receiver Connected
This parameter tells the panel if a premises RF Receiver is connected.
All of the status reports for the RF Receiver include the address. For example, if the cover is removed, Event [127] (DBus
Tamper) is generated.
Parameter Options
Receiver 1 Connected, Set Receiver to Address 50: RF Receiver 1 has been connected to the control panel. Set the
receivers address to 50 (jumper setting OFF). See page 68 for details on adding RF ID codes. See page 116 for details on
RF transmitters and zone states.
Receiver 2 Connected, Set Receiver to Address 51: RF Receiver 2 has been connected to the control panel. Set the
receivers address to 51 (jumper setting ON). See page 68 for details on adding RF ID codes. See page 116 for details on
RF transmitters and zone states.
26.19.2 Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval
Parameter Address
Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval 1250
Default
Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Supervision
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
12 Hours
24 Hours
Premises RF transmitters (sensors) send a supervisory signal approximately once every hour. The premises RF Receiver
expects to hear this signal from every transmitter in the interval determined in this parameter. A Missing report is sent for
each device that the RF Receiver does not hear.
Supervision Interval for fire transmitters is fixed at 4 hours.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: DATA BUS DEVICE CONFIGURATION
26.19.3 RF Jam Detect Level
RF Jam Detect Level 1251 0-15 12
This parameter configures the RF receivers for jam detection.
Detection Systems recommends that you leave the RF Jam Detect Level setting at the default unless advised
by Detection Systems Technical Service.
26.19.4 DX4010 RS-232 Module Output Configuration
Parameter Address
DX4010 Module Output Configuration 1253
Default
DX4010 Module Output Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled (No RS-232 Module Connected)
RS-232 Output in Log Format for Printer
RS-232 Output in GSP Format
Set the DX4010 to Data Bus Address 250. See DX4010 Address DIP Switches on page 66 for information.
Leave this parameter set to 0 (default setting) when using the DX4010 as a direct-connect module for remote programming.
Parameter Options
RS-232 Output in Log Format for Printer: Output is formatted ASCII text similar to the text that appears in the text keypad
displays. Each log event is output in real time. Line breaks are included making this option suitable for connecting a serial
printer to the module.
If you connect a printer to the DX4010 and get unexpected results, check the module output configuration
(Address 1253), baud rate configuration (Address 1254) and parity/flow control/stop bit configuration (Address
1255) for proper settings.
RS-232 Output is GSP Format: Output is formatted in Gateway Serial Protocol. GSP protocol allows you to integrate the
panel with future GSP-compatible devices.
26.19.5 DX4010 RS-232 Module Baud Rate Configuration
Parameter Address
DX4010 Module Baud Rate Configuration 1254
Default
DX4010 Module Baud Rate Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Reserved
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
14400 bps
This parameter tells the panel what baud rates the DX4010 should use for communication.
If you connect a printer to the DX4010 and get unexpected results, check the module output configuration
(Address 1253), baud rate configuration (Address 1254) and parity/flow control/stop bit configuration (Address
1255) for proper settings.
26.19.6 DX4010 Module Parity, Flow Control, Stop Bit Configuration

Parameter Address
DX4010 Parity, Flow Control, Stop Bit Configuration 1255
Selection Parity Flow Control Stop Bits

None Odd Even Software Hardware 1 2
Default 0 X X X
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
4 X X X
5 X X X
6 X X X
7 X X X
26.19.7 DX8010 Telephone Command Module, Access Options
Parameter Address
DX8010 Access Options 1256
Default
DX8010 Access Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled, No DX8010 Connected
Access Granted to Users With Authority Level 1
Set this parameter to zero (0) if there are no DX8010 modules connected to the panel, or to disable any DX8010 modules that
are connected to the panel.
Selecting any of the other options allows system control for users assigned to the chosen authority level.
26.20 Miscellaneous System Trouble Options
Parameter Address
Miscellaneous System Trouble Options 1265
Default
Miscellaneous System Trouble Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Options Selected
Enable AC Fail Trouble Tone
Enable Ground Fault Display & Trouble Tone
Reserved
Reserved
Enable AC Fail Trouble Tone: Use this parameter to enable or disable the AC Fail Trouble Tone. If enabled, all keypads
will emit the trouble tone when an AC Fail condition occurs. This tone must be silenced from each area.
Enable Ground Fault Display & Trouble Tone: Use this parameter to enable or disable the Ground Fault display on the
LCD keypad and the accompanying trouble tone (both LCD and LED keypads). If enabled, all LCD keypads will display a
Ground Fault message and all keypads will emit a trouble tone when a Ground Fault condition occurs. The display and tone
must be cleared from each area.
If Ground Fault reports are disabled and the Ground Fault Display & Trouble Tone parameter is disabled, then
ground fault events will not be logged.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM TROUBLE OPTIONS
26.21 Text Entry Parameters
The panel uses text entry parameters to enter System Text, Area Text and Location Text.
Addresses are shown for each text entry parameter. When programming from the text keypad, selecting any Address in the
parameter puts you in special text programming mode that allows you to edit text blocks of 16 characters. See Programming
Text Entry Parameters on page 11 for more information.
Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 . , ? ! - & < > 1
2 A B C a b c 2
3 D E F d e f 3
4 G H I g h i 4
5 J K L j k l 5
6 M N O m n o 6
7 P Q R S p q r s 7
8 T U V t u v 8
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9
0 _ @ # $ % * 0
* Moves to the Address before the text block.
# Moves to the Address after the text block.
A Moves cursor to the previous character position in text block.
B No function emits error tone when pressed.
C Moves cursor to the next character position in text block.
On, Off, Perimeter Only, No Entry, Bypass and System Reset keys all
produce an error tone when pressed. Not used in text programming.
26.21.1 System Text

Call for Service Text
Call for Service Text 1266-1297 Blank
This parameter provides 16 characters of programmable text to be displayed in the second line of the display whenever the
first line shows Call for Service.
Use Table 45 to make entries.
The following are possible entries for the second line of text:
Central Station phone number.
Preferred phone number called for service.
Press 0 to View, which will show system trouble details.
See Call for Service Details on page 162 for more information.
ABC Key Text
[A] Key Text 1298-1329 A Key Text
[B] Key Text 1330-1361 B Key Text
[C] Key Text 1362-1393 C Key Text
Enter up to 16 characters to describe the ABC Keys. Use Table 45 to make entries.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: TEXT ENTRY PARAMETERS
26.21.2 Area Text
Area Name
DS7240 Area 3 Name 1522-1553 Area 3 Name Text
only Area 4 Name 1586-1617 Area 4 Name Text
Enter up to 16 characters to describe each Area. Use Table 45 to make entries.
Area Idle Text
DS7240 Area 3 Idle Text 1554-1585 Not Ready
only Area 4 Idle Text 1618-1649 Not Ready
This parameter provides 16 characters of programmable text for Area 1 to be displayed when the system is idle (no alarms, no
troubles, system disarmed). Use Table 45 to make entries.
If Dont Show Zone Status on Keypads is not selected (see Keypad # Options, page 110), the text keypad displays OK for
All On or OK for Perimeter across the second line. This indicates that all zones are normal and the system is ready to arm
All On or Perimeter Only. If a controlled zone is faulted (either open or shorted), the Area Idle Text for this zones assigned
area replaces the OK for All On/Part On message.
If Dont Show Zone Status on Keypads is selected, the default Area Idle Text (Not Ready) should be
changed. See Programming Text Entry Parameters on page 11 for text entry instructions.
If a zone not configured for Perimeter Only arming is faulted (either open or shorted), OK for Perimeter replaces OK for All
On on the text keypads display. The system may be armed Perimeter Only, but cannot be armed All On until the faulted zone
is restored. See Options 1, Zone Function ## on page 125, for Zone Function configuration details.
26.21.3 Location Text
Zone Text Zone Text

Location Location
Addresses Default Addresses Default
1 1650 Location 1 Text 21 2290 Location 21 Text
10 1938 Location 10 Text 30 2578 Location 30 Text Locations
11 1970 Location 11 Text 31 2610 Location 31 Text 25 and
12 2002 Location 12 Text 32 2642 Location 32 Text higher
available
13 2034 Location 13 Text 33 2674 Location 33 Text with
14 2066 Location 14 Text 34 2706 Location 34 Text DS7240
15 2098 Location 15 Text 35 2738 Location 35 Text only
Enter up to 16 characters to describe each Location. Use Table 45 to make entries.
26.22 RF Keypads
The panel supports up to four RF keypads. Each keypad has two programming parameters. The RF keypads report low
battery, tamper, etc. by transmitter number.
The compatible RF keypads have not been investigated by UL.
RF Keypad Rcvr 1 DBus Address Transmitter Number Rcvr 2 DBus Address Transmitter Number
1 52 255 60 247
2 53 254 61 246
3 54 253 62 245
4 55 252 63 244
Table 46: RF Keypad Data Bus Addresses
26.22.1 RF Keypad # Options

RF Keypad Options Address
1 Addr 2930
2 Addr 2932
3 Addr 2934
4 Addr 2936
Default
RF Keypad Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected
Reserved
Belongs to Receiver 2
Supervised
Reserved
Parameter Options
Belongs to Receiver 2: RF Receiver 2 performs ID and monitoring functions for the keypad. If this option is not selected,
the keypad belongs to Receiver 1.
Supervised: The receiver always supervises the keypad and the panel ignores the supervision based on the installers
configuration of this option.
26.22.2 RF Keypad # Area
RF Keypad Area Address
1 Addr 2931
2 Addr 2933
3 Addr 2935
4 Addr 2937
Default
RF Keypad Area Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Disabled (No Area Assigned)
Assign RF Keypad to Area 1
Assign RF Keypad to Area 2
Assign RF Keypad to Area 3 (DS7240 only)
Assign RF Keypad to Area 4 (DS7240 only)
To enable a RF keypad it must be assigned to an Area. To disable a RF keypad, enter a 0 at this parameter.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: RF KEYPADS
26.23 RF Keyfobs
RF Keyfobs (two- and four-button keychain keypads) are managed internally by the panel. Keyfobs are assigned to PINs
(users) by entering IDs. No other programming parameters are required. Keyfobs follow the authority level and area
assignment for the PIN they are assigned to.
They report low battery conditions using the user number (1-32). The users ID number, not the transmitter number, is used for
open/close reports. The compatible RF keyfobs have not been investigated by UL.
For the DS7240, each RF Receiver can handle 24 Keyfobs. For 32 Keyfobs, two RF Receivers are required. Address 2938
must be set to a value from 1 to 14.
For the DS7220, all 32 Keyfobs can fit on one receiver. Address 2938 must be set to a value from 0 to 15.
To add a RF Keyfob into the system, see Adding RF IDs on page 68.
26.23.1 Keyfob Receiver Assignment Options
Parameter Address
RF Keyfob Receiver Assignment Options 2938

RF Keyfob Receiver Assignment Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected (all RF on RX1)
Assign Keyfobs 1 to 8 to Receiver 2
This parameter assigns keyfobs in groups of eight to Receiver 2. Keyfobs not assigned to Receiver 2 are automatically
assigned to Receiver 1.
26.23.2 RF Keyfob Options
Parameter Address
RF Keyfob Options 2939
Default
RF Keyfob Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
No Option Selected
Panic Enabled
Alarm Output on Panic
Assign [O] (trapezoid) Key to Perimeter Only On
Assign [P] (sun) Key to Partial On
This parameter configures all keyfobs for all areas and all PINs.
Parameter Options
Panic Enabled: Pressing the Lock and Unlock keys on the keyfob simultaneously transmits a unique Panic signal to the RF
Receiver. This option configures the systems response to the RF panic signal. If the keyfob Panic option is enabled, the
system sends a Duress report. Duress reports from keyfobs follow ABC/Duress report routing.
Alarm Output on Panic: This option functions the same as the Panic Enabled option, except that Alarm Output on Panic
also activates the alarm output.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: RF KEYFOBS
Assign [O] (Trapezoid) Key to Perimeter Only: Programs the keyfob to arm the system Perimeter Only when the [O] key
is pressed. If you select this option, you cannot use the [O] key to activate Output Function 1, 15.
Assign [P] (Sun) Key to Partial On: Programs the keyfob to turn the system on using Partial On when the [P] key is
pressed. The [P] key on the RF keypads is also configured by this option. If you select this option, you cannot use the [P] key
to activate Output Function 2,0.
The Assign [O] Key to Perimeter Only and Assign [P] Key to Partial On features are designed
for use with the RF3224 RF Premises Receiver. These keyfob keys may not operate as intended if
used with other RF receivers.
26.24 Factory Default

26.24.1 Factory Defaults
Parameter Address
Factory Defaults 2944
Default
Factory Default Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Maintain user-specifies settings
Return all parameters to factory default settings
Use this parameter to restore all of the manufacturers default settings for all parameters (including this one)
by entering 1.
PART IV: PANEL PROGRAMMING: FACTORY DEFAULT
Part V: Reference Materials
27.0 Installation Label
27.1 DS7240
Figure 68 shows the installation label that appears on the inside of the enclosure door for the DS7240 Control/Communicator.
This system should be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, the National Fire Alarm
Code, NFPA 72 and the local authority having jurisdiction. Depending on the application, the installation is to be in
accordance with one or more of the following UL standards: UL681 Installation and Classification of Mercantile and
Bank Burglar Alarm Systems; UL1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems and Units; UL1641 Installation and
DS7240 Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems. Printed information describing proper installation, operation,
testing, maintenance, repair service and response to an alarm is to be provided with this equipment.
Warning: Owner's Instruction Notice: Not to be removed by anyone except occupant.
Detection Systems recommends
testing the entire system at least once This equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules for Class B
a week, and having a qualified Computing Devices. Operation is subject to the two following conditions (1) this device may not cause any interference,
technician check the system at a and (2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
minimum of once every 3 years. Complies with Part 68, FCC Rules. FCC Registration Number: ESVMUL-46531-AL-E 0.1B
Suitable for the following applications: 1) Household Burglar Alarm System Units, Grade A. 2) Household Fire Warning System Units. 3) Police Station
connect, for all Police Station applications and grades, Model AE5CC Attack Resistant Enclosure with a UL Listed local sounding device is required.
4) Local, Grade A Mercantile Premise alarm system and Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault alarm system. For all local applications and grades, Model AE5CC
Attack Resistant Enclosure and a UL Listed local sounding device is required. 5) Central Station, Grade C application. Central Station, Grade B when installed
with a UL Listed local sounding device. 6) Proprietary Burglar Alarm units, Grade A. Proprietary Burglar Alarm unit. DS7240 must be installed in accordance
with Installation Instructions 49720.
Do not connect to a receptacle All external connections are inherently Class 2 power limited.
controlled by a switch. Do not
share with DS7240 uses a System Delay Chart See Reference Manual P/N 49720
other CX4010 UL Listed for System Wiring Diagram
equipment. Class 2 Transformer Circuit Control Unit Smoke Detector
18 VAC 22 VA 60 HZ (Loop) Delay - Sec Model Delay - Sec
Installer Switch
1 16 sec (a) Disables Arming,
Earth Ground Reports, and Relays.
(a) The delay (power-up) (start-up) time marked on the Lock for local
installation wiring diagram of the smoke detector or programming.
Green Data on the installed smoke detector(s) is to be used.
Auxilliary Powered Devices 11.5 to 12.4 VDC. Below 10.2 VDC, the DS7240 stops processing Loop inputs.
Yellow Data With 7.0 Ah battery,
120 mA for 24 hrs for Fire and Combined Fire/Burglary,
Aux Pwr - 400 mA for 4 hrs for UL Burglary.
Black
Red 600 mA for other*
Keypads, Expanders R R Red
Printer modules & POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Communication modules Aux The Power Supply provides a maximum of 600 mA for the Control Panel
(up to 19 total devices) Pwr R1 R1 Gray
and All Accessory Devices. For System loading, See Installation Manual
+
P/N 49720. Requirements for battery standby time may reduce
P P P P allowable output. T1 T1 Premises
Brown
CAUTION: See Manual for power requirements relating to terminals [Alrm+] and [+Aux]. Phone
S S S S
Installer JP2 T T Green
Keypad
Lock
A B C D Installer Note 1: A supervisory alarm output module must be used
Switch to PO1 Terminals can be configured on these terminals for household fire applications
program. as an alarm power output. JP2-
PO1 Jumper must be closed. Note 2: Jumper J2-PO1 must be in place for connection Incoming
to NAC or other powered alarm device. Phone
Supervised with 2.2 k Line
EOL Resistor Alrm PO1 + -
(P/N: 47819). PO4 PO3 PO2 + A B L-1 Com L-2 L-3 Com L-4 L-5 Com L-6 L-7 Com L-8
Typical Initiating Devices
are Door Contacts NO/NC, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Floor Mats, Motion 1
Sensors, Glass Break
Detectors, etc. Outputs PO3 &
PO4 can sink up + -
to 500 mA 12
Maximum charging VDC.
current is 1.1 A.
Replace Battery every 3 to 5 yrs. see
with a lead acid battery such as Note 1
model P334
(12 V, 7 Amp-Hr, 6 cells) Supervised Loops
Recommended Battery Open 7.7 to 14.0 VDC
Manufacturers: Use compatible NAC Powered Sensor Loop Normal 6.3 to 7.3 VDC
Output PO2 can be used such as Wheelock suitable for 2-Wire Short 0.0 to 6.0 VDC
POWER SONIC: YUASA: with Alarm+ as a MB-G6-12-R Smoke Detectors 2.2 k
PS-1270, NP7-12, supervised siren driver. 2.2 k Resistor
Resistor required at End of (P/N 47819) Minimum system requirements for Classification in
PS-12180 NPG18-12 Connect an approved 400 mA for Fire and Line. For compatible smoke Accordance with ANSI/SIA CP-01-2000:
4 or 8 siren. Combined Fire/ Required at End of Line
detectors, see Technogram Control Unit, Model DS7240;
Alternatively, PO2 can Burglary; 1500 mA P/N 49722. The UL Panel Control Unit Board, Model EA7240;
Battery Capacity: sink up to 500 mA 12 for UL Burglary; P/N Compatibility Identifier = B. Also available for 4-Wire Keypad, one or more of the following: DS7445i or DS7447i;
Min 5.0 Ah Max 18.0 Ah VDC. 1850 mA for other* 25899 Smoke Detectors such as Detection Systems DS284TH. Enclosure, AE1 or AE5CC.
Applies to all four UL Listed Local Bell.
outputs combined.
* Not investigated by UL.
WARNING: THIS UNIT INCLUDES AN ALARM VERIFICATION FEATURE FOR L-1 (LOOP 1)
THAT RESULTS IN A DELAY OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL WHEN PROGRAMMED
FOR THIS FEATURE. THE TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS SMOKE DETECTORS) This box will be checked if L-1 is
SHALL NOT EXCEED 60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING DEVICES SHALL BE programmed for Alarm Verification.
CONNECTED TO L-1 WHEN PROGRAMMED FOR ALARM VERIFICATION, UNLESS P/N 49719C 6/02
APPROVED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 2002 Detection Systems, Inc.
Figure 68: DS7240 Installation Label
PART V: REFERENCE MATERIALS
27.2 DS7220
Figure 69 shows the installation label that appears on the inside of the enclosure door for the DS7220 Control/Communicator.
This system should be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, the National Fire Alarm
Code, NFPA 72 and the local authority having jurisdiction. Depending on the application, the installation is to be in
accordance with one or more of the following UL standards: UL681 Installation and Classification of Mercantile and
Bank Burglar Alarm Systems; UL1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems and Units; UL1641 Installation and
DS7220 Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems. Printed information describing proper installation, operation,
testing, maintenance, repair service and response to an alarm is to be provided with this equipment.
Warning: Owner's Instruction Notice: Not to be removed by anyone except occupant.
Detection Systems recommends
testing the entire system at least once This equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules for Class B
a week, and having a qualified Computing Devices. Operation is subject to the two following conditions (1) this device may not cause any interference,
technician check the system at a and (2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
minimum of once every 3 years. Complies with Part 68, FCC Rules. FCC Registration Number: ESVMUL-46531-AL-E 0.1B
Suitable for the following applications: 1) Household Burglar Alarm System Units, Grade A. 2) Household Fire Warning System Units. 3) Police Station
connect, for all Police Station applications and grades, Model AE5CC Attack Resistant Enclosure with a UL Listed local sounding device is required.
4) Local, Grade A Mercantile Premise alarm system and Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault alarm system. For all local applications and grades, Model AE5CC
Attack Res istant Enclosu re and a UL Listed local sounding de vice is re quire d. 5) Central Station , Grade C application. Central Statio n,
Grade B when installed with a UL Listed local sounding device. 6) Proprietary Burglar Alarm units, Grade A. Proprietary Burglar Alarm unit.
DS7220 must be installed in accordance with Installation Instructions 49720.
Do not connect to a receptacle All external connections are inherently Class 2 power limited.
controlled by a switch. Do not
share with DS7220 uses a System Delay Chart See Reference Manual P/N 49720
other CX4010 UL Listed for System Wiring Diagram
equipment. Class 2 Transformer Circuit Control Unit Smoke Detector
18 VAC 22 VA 60 HZ (Loop) Delay - Sec Model Delay - Sec Installer Switch
(a) Disables Arming,
1 16 sec Reports, and Relays.
Earth Ground
Lock for local
(a) The delay (power-up) (start-up) time marked on the programming.
installation wiring diagram of the smoke detector or
Green Data on the installed smoke detector(s) is to be used.
Auxilliary Powered Devices 11.5 to 12.4 VDC. Below 10.2 VDC, the DS7220 stops processing Loop inputs.
Yellow Data With 7.0 Ah battery,
120 mA for 24 hrs for Fire and Combined Fire/Burglary,
Aux Pwr - 400 mA for 4 hrs for UL Burglary.
Black
Red 600 mA for other*
Keypads, Expanders R R Red
Printer modules & POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Communication modules Aux The Power Supply provides a maximum of 600 mA for the Control Panel
(up to 19 total devices) Pwr R1 R1 Gray
and All Accessory Devices. For System loading, See Installation Manual
+
P/N 49720. Requirements for battery standby time may reduce
P P P P allowable output. T1 T1 Premises
Brown
CAUTION: See Manual for power requirements relating to terminals [Alrm+] and [+Aux]. Phone
S S S S
Installer JP2 T T Green
Keypad
Lock
A B C D Installer Note 1: A supervisory alarm output module must be used
Switch to PO1 Terminals can be configured on these terminals for household fire applications
program. as an alarm power output. JP2- Note 2: Jumper J2-PO1 must be in place for connection
PO1 Jumper must be closed. Incoming
to NAC or other powered alarm device. Phone
Supervised with 2.2 k Line
EOL Resistor Alrm PO1 + -
(P/N: 47819). PO4 PO3 PO2 + A B L-1 Com L-2 L-3 Com L-4 L-5 Com L-6 L-7 Com L-8
Typical Initiating Devices
are Door Contacts NO/NC, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Floor Mats, Motion 1
Sensors, Glass Break
Detectors, etc. Outputs PO3 &
PO4 can sink up + -
to 500 mA 12
Maximum charging VDC.
current is 1.1 A.
Replace Battery every 3 to 5 yrs. see
with a lead acid battery such as Note 1
model P334
(12 V, 7 Amp-Hr, 6 cells) Supervised Loops
Recommended Battery Open 7.7 to 14.0 VDC
Manufacturers: Use compatible NAC Powered Sensor Loop Normal 6.3 to 7.3 VDC
Output PO2 can be used such as Wheelock suitable for 2-Wire Short 0.0 to 6.0 VDC
POWER SONIC: YUASA: with Alarm+ as a MB-G6-12-R Smoke Detectors 2.2 k
PS-1270, NP7-12, supervised siren driver. 2.2 k Resistor
Resistor required at End of (P/N 47819) Minimum system requirements for Classification in
PS-12180 NPG18-12 Connect an approved 400 mA for Fire and Line. For compatible smoke
4 or 8 siren. Combined Fire/ Required at End of Line Accordance with ANSI/SIA CP-01-2000:
detectors, see Technogram Control Unit, Model DS7220;
Alternatively, PO2 can Burglary; 1500 mA P/N 49722. The UL Panel
Battery Capacity: sink up to 500 mA 12 for UL Burglary; P/N Compatibility Identifier = B. Also available for 4-Wire Control Unit Board, Model EA7220;
Min 5.0 Ah Max 18.0 Ah VDC. 1850 mA for other* 25899 Smoke Detectors such as Detection Systems DS284TH. Keypad, one or more of the following: DS7445i or DS7447i;
Applies to all four Enclosure, AE1 or AE5CC.
outputs combined. UL Listed Local Bell.
* Not investigated by UL.
WARNING: THIS UNIT INCLUDES AN ALARM VERIFICATION FEATURE FOR L-1 (LOOP 1)
THAT RESULTS IN A DELAY OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL WHEN PROGRAMMED
FOR THIS FEATURE. THE TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS SMOKE DETECTORS) This box will be checked if L-1 is
SHALL NOT EXCEED 60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING DEVICES SHALL BE programmed for Alarm Verification.
CONNECTED TO L-1 WHEN PROGRAMMED FOR ALARM VERIFICATION, UNLESS P/N 50506C 6/02
APPROVED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 2002 Detection Systems, Inc.
Figure 69: DS7220 Installation Label
28.0 Troubleshooting
28.1 Introduction
Detection Systems provides this section to help you troubleshoot problems with the DS7240/DS7220. To prevent problems
from occurring, read the preceding sections of this manual to verify that the panel is correctly installed and programmed.
Below are various problems that may occur, followed by explanations of the problems (cause) and solutions.
28.2 Arming Issues
Problem Cause Solution
I enter a valid PIN to arm an No zones are programmed for that Area. Add a minimum of one zone to each Area.
Area, but the Area does not arm.
User does not have the appropriate Make sure users who should be able to
Authority Level to arm system. arm/disarm the system have the appropriate
Authority Level. See page 97 for details.
Must press On or Perimeter Only keys.
I cannot tell if my panel is armed The keypad does turns the Perimeter Only There is no solution. The user who arms the
for Perimeter Only or Partial On LED on for both of these arming features, system will have to know which keys were pressed
from a DS7445i LED Keypad. but cannot distinguish between the two. ([Perimeter Only] or [#]+[2] for Perimeter Only;
[#]+[3] for Partial On). This only affects panels with
Firmware version 1.03 or lower.
I armed my panel All On, but it The All On-No Exit arming option is See Arming Options 1 (Address 0258) on page 90
keeps changing to Perimeter enabled. When the panel was armed, to disable this feature.
Only. nobody faulted an Exit Delay zone, therefore
the panel did not arm those internal zones.
28.3 Zone Issues

I have a trouble on a Keyswitch Swinger Shunt on a Keyswitch may not be Arm and disarm the panel to clear the current
zone and it will not clear. The enabled on this Zone Function. The zone trouble. To prevent this in the future, check the
zone is restored to its normal will not restore until the Swinger Shunt Keyswitch Zone Function programming and make
condition. condition restores. sure the Swinger Shunt feature is disabled.
There is no output after alarming Incorrect programming. Review the following sections to see if the output is
a zone. correctly programmed:
Options 2, Zone Function ## on page 127
Outputs on page 136
28.4 Programming Issues

I cannot enter into Programming One or more Areas are armed. If one or more Areas are armed, disarm all
Mode. Programming may be disabled. armed Areas. Programming mode cannot be
entered if an Area is armed (unless you are
Installer Switch may be open.
using an Installers Keypad).
Programming may be disabled. See
Programming and Daylight Savings Time
Options (Address 0257) on page 89. Enable
Keypad Programming and PK32
(Programming Key) through DSRPS or by
using an Installers Keypad.
To enter the Programming Mode, the Installer
Switch must be closed (momentarily or
locked). See Entering the Installer Mode on
page 67.
I have enabled Open/Close The Open/Close Reports for Perimeter See Areas on page 95. In the Area #
reports, but when I arm the panel Only feature is not programmed correctly. Opening/Closing Reporting Options parameter,
Perimeter Only, these reports are enable Open/Close Reports for Perimeter Only
still not sent. Mode by entering a 4, 5, 6, 7 or 12, 13, 14 or 15 in
the appropriate Address (0296, 0318, 0340 or
0362).
The PK32 (Programming Key) The PK32 has not been enabled in the panel See Programming and Daylight Savings Time
does not work (upload, firmware. Options (Address 0257) on page 89. Make sure
download, erase, etc.). the selection you make enables the PK32.
The off-board zones I added to The Device Location parameter is not See Locations on page 115. Verify which device
the system display as missing. correctly programmed. type has been added (for example, RF zone, off-
board zone, etc.). In the Device Location
If the off-board zones are RF (wireless)
parameter, enter the correct value based on the
zones, enable the RF Receiver at
Device Parameter Selections:
Address 1249.
1 = On-board
2 = DX2010
3 = DX2010, Doubled
4 = RF Receiver 1
5 = RF Receiver 2
Zone configuration is locked into only those
configuration types in the Device Parameter
Selections.
The panel does not send a Open/Close reports for Perimeter Only are See Areas on page 95. In the Area #
Closing report after it is armed not enabled. Opening/Closing Reporting Options parameter,
Perimeter Only. enable Open/Close Reports for Perimeter Only
Mode by entering a 4, 5, 6, 7 or 12, 13, 14 or 15 in
the appropriate Address (0296, 0318, 0340 or
0362).
The panel is not following report The Lock Area Reporting parameter is Set the Lock Area Reporting parameter to 0
routing as programmed. enabled. (Disabled). Add page ref to Lock Area Reporting
(NOT Quick Start ref).
28.5 Keypad Issues

I entered the Move to Area The Move to Area function is disabled if Program at least one zone and assign it to an Area.
function ([#] + [5] + [0]) at my there are no zones assigned to a particular The Move to Area function should work as defined.
keypad, but it will not let me Area.
move to another area.
28.6 Miscellaneous Issues

There are numbers in brackets These numbers [###] refer to the event N/A
[###] throughout this manual. numbers described Panel Events and
Reporting Formats on page 167.
My printer is printing The settings for the DX4010 RS-232 Serial See Data (Option) Bus Device Configuration on page
strange characters and I Interface Module may cause unexpected 146. Verify the settings for the following parameters:
cannot read it. printer output. DX4010 Output Configuration (Address 1253)
Baud Rate Configuration (Address 1254)
Parity/Flow Control/Stop Bit Configuration
(Address 1255).
29.0 Approved Application Compliance Guide
29.1 Listings and Approvals
Fire: UL, CSFM (pending)
Burglary: UL, SIA
29.2 Introduction
The System Chart on page 163 references components evaluated and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for
compatibility with the Control/Communicator. These components meet the basic system requirements for the applicable
standard.
The Installation Labels for the DS7240 and the DS7220 on pages 157 and 158 show the relationships between the panels and
the accessory components referred to in the System Chart.
29.3 Optional Compatible Equipment
You can use UL listed components that do not require evaluation for electrical compatibility in many applications when
installed according to the manufacturers instructions.
29.3.1 Burglary Applications
You can use UL listed burglary alarm sensors that do not require evaluation for electrical compatibility in burglary applications.
In some cases, you must use a UL listed Detection Systems interface module in conjunction with the sensors. Consult the
individual component specification and installation documents to determine suitability.
UL Standard 1023 requires a weekly test for residential burglary applications.
29.3.2 Auto Arming for Bank/Safe/Vault Applications

To auto-arm for Bank Safe/Vault applications, use an Auto On/Auto Off Sked (schedule). Set the Auto On Sked to arm the
system on a 7 day (1 week) timer no later than 10 pm. Set the Auto Off Sked to disarm the system no sooner than 6 am the
next business day. Adjust these skeds so that the system is armed during non-business hours (such as holidays and
weekends). These times may be adjusted if they conflict with normal business hours and/or any non-business hour carry-over
(extended holiday/closed periods).
See Skeds on page 143 for Sked set-up instructions.
29.3.3 Fire Applications
You can use UL listed fire initiating devices not requiring electrical compatibility evaluation in any application. For example: 4-
wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, water flow switches, and manual pull stations are suitable fire initiating devices. Consult
the individual component specification and installation documents to determine suitability.
Two-wire smoke detectors only connect to the panel on the sensor loop for Location 1. Two-wire detectors must be evaluated
for electrical compatibility, and must be UL listed for use with the panel. See the Smoke Compatibility List Technical Service
Note (P/N: 49722), or contact the detector manufacturer.
When using 4-wire smoke detectors, install a suitable power supervision unit according to the manufacturers instructions. Use
the DX3010 Octo-Output Expander or PO 1 to provide reset capability. See DX3010 Octo-Output Expander on page 59 for
details on the installation of the DX3010.
For battery calculations, see Standby Battery Requirements on page 45.
29.3.4 Enclosures and Configurations
Detection Systems offers the following optional enclosure and system configuration for the control/communicator.
AE5CC Attack Resistant Enclosure: This enclosure is suitable for the following applications with a UL Listed local
sounding device (required):
Household Burglar Alarm System Units, Grade A
Household Fire Warning System Units
Police Station Connect (for all Police Station applications and grades)
Local, Grade A Mercantile Premises Alarm System and Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Alarm System
Central Station Mercantile, Grade C application
Central Station Mercantile, Grade B
Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units, Grade B
Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units
All references to NFPA and related requirements are based upon compliance with the 1999 edition of NFPA 72,
National Fire Alarm Code. Since installation specifications are nearly always based upon a specific edition of a
standard that has been legally adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), earlier editions of NFPA
standards will generally apply. Consult the appropriate AHJ for confirmation.
EA7240 System Configuration: Complete DS7240 Control/Communicator assembly without an enclosure or transformer. A
CX4010 Transformer must be ordered separately.
EA7220 System Configuration: Complete DS7220 Control/Communicator assembly without an enclosure or transformer. A
CX4010 Transformer must be ordered separately.
30.0 Call for Service Details
The system displays Call for Service to users when they press [#] + [4] + [2] to display System Troubles and there is a Call
for Service condition present.
The first line of the display is fixed. The second line consists of programmable text that can display the preferred phone
number to use if a Call for Service must be placed. This number could be the Central Stations phone number or a different
number. The second line could also be used to show an instructional message, such as PRESS 0 TO VIEW. This message
would instruct the user to press the [0] key to view system trouble details.
Pressing the [0] key will still provide additional information even if the Call for Serivce text does not instruct to
press [0].
There are a variety of system conditions that can bring up the Call for Service display. The exact nature of the trouble is not
shown to the user because none of the conditions can be serviced by them (they require attention from the servicing
company).
System Condition Explanation
Comm Fail, Destination 1 (2) The system attempted to send a report to this routing destination, but failed. See Comm Fail Event
and Routing Tables on page 164 for details on the failed communication event.
System Battery is Low The battery connected to the DS7240/DS7220 has fallen below 12.1 volts.
System Battery is Missing The battery connected to the DS7240/DS7220 is badly discharged, damaged or disconnected.
Data Bus Missing, Device ### The Data (Option) Bus device set to the Address shown in the display (###) is missing or has
stopped responding.
Data Bus Tamper, Device ### The tamper on the Data (Option) Bus set to the Address shown in the display (###) is open.
Data Bus Reset, Device ### The Data (Option) Bus device set to the Address shown in the display (###) has reset its
microprocessor.
Data Bus Trouble, Device ### The Data (Option) Bus device set to the Address shown in the display (###) is sending a trouble
message to the panel. Troubles are defined per device type. See the instructions for the device
shown to learn the exact nature of the trouble.
Bell Supervision Fault at PO 2 Programmable Output 2 (PO 2) can be programmed as a supervised siren/speaker. See Outputs
on page 136. When PO 2 is programmed for supervision, disconnecting or shorting the siren or
speaker generates this fault condition.
RF Rcvr Trouble, Device ### The premises RF receiver set to the displayed Data (Option) Bus Address (Device ###) is sending
a trouble message to the panel. Troubles are defined per device type. See the instructions for the
device shown to learn the exact nature of the trouble.
RF Rcvr Jammed, Device ### The premises RF receiver set to the displayed Data (Option) Bus Address (Device ###) is sending
a jammed message to the panel.
Table 47: Call for Service Details
30.1 System Chart
Household Fire/Burglary
Central Station Burglary
Bank Safe/Vault Alarm
Proprietary Burglary
Household Burglary
Mercantile (72 hrs)

Police Connected
Mercantile (4 hrs)
Household Fire
Local Burglary
Commercial
Combined
(Grade A)
(Grade C)
Burglary
NFPA Standard 72 72
Min. Hrs of Standby Battery 4 24 hrs + 24 hrs + 4 4 4 4 72 4
4 min 4 min
Entry/Exit Time (sec)* 45/60 45/60 45/60 60/60 60/60 60/60 60/60 60/60 60/60
Bell Time (minutes) 4 4 4 15 15 15 15 15 15
AE1 Enclosure Included w/ panel No No No No No No
AE5CC Attack Resistant Enclosure** Optional Req Req Req Req Req
7 Ah Battery Req Req Req Req Req Req Req No Req
18 Ah Battery Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Req Opt
D132A Smoke Detector Reversing Required if D192C is not used. Use the D132A with compatible smoke detectors only.
Relay Module
Telephone Cord Required to connect panel to RJ131X Telco
Block.
D192C NAC Supervision Module Required if D132A and compatible smoke
detectors are not used.
DS7447i LCD/DS7445i LED Keypads 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+
DS282TH Smoke Detector 1 1
D282THS Smoke Detector w/ Sounder Use with D132A.
Wheelock MB-G6-12-R, MB-G10-12-R 1+ 1+ 1+ Opt
or MIZ-12-R Indicating Devices
CX4010 Transformer Required for all applications.
Key
No: Not acceptable for this application.
Req: Required for this application.
Opt: Optional for this application.
1+: 1 or more required for this application. Consult the appropriate standard.
1: At least one detector required. You can substitute other 2-wire detectors listed for use with the panel. You could
use the DS250 with the MB4W 4-wire base or other manufacturers 4-wire detectors. You must use a listed power
supervision relay with 4-wire detectors.
: UL Listed bell housing for burglary alarm bell (Rothenbuhler 5110 Bell).
Empty Cell: Not used for this application.
*: Not to exceed these Entry/Exit Delay limits for UL installations.
**: Lock/Key assembly P/N: 33800C used for this application.
Table 48: System Chart
31.0 Data (Option) Bus Address Quick Reference
Option Bus Address Device Description

0 Installer Keypad or local connection to DSRPS 2000+
1-8 Keypads 1-8
40, 41 DX8010 Telephone Control Module
50 Premises RF Receiver 1
51 Premises RF Receiver 2
52-55 Premises RF Keypads Receiver 1
60-63 Premises RF Keypads Receiver 2
101-107 DX2010 Wired Input Expanders
150, 151 DX3010 Octo-Outputs and/or DX3020 X-10 Module
250 DX4010 Serial RS-232 Interface Module
Table 49: Option Bus Address Quick Reference
32.0 Reserved Programming Addresses

The following addresses are reserved for future use and cannot be accessed.
0065 0274-0275 0924 0956 0996 1035-1037 2940-2943
0131 0705 0932 0964 1004 1248 2945-2946
0214-0219 0908 0940 0972 1012 1252
0236-0243 0916 0948 0980 1020 1257-1264
The following reserved addresses apply only to the DS7220:

0320-0363 0826-0905 1128-1183 1522-1649 2418-2929
33.0 Comm Fail Event and Routing Dialing Tables

This appendix contains tables showing the dialing attempts for each Destination/Phone Number configuration.
There is not a Phone 2 Only option. If you wish to program only one phone number for a Routing Destination,
it must be Phone 1.
If Phone 1 is programmed to cancel Call Waiting, you should program Phone 2 without the Call Waiting cancel
sequence. If the subscriber cancels Call Waiting without notifying the installing company, the panel will still be
able to send reports using Phone 2. Dialing a Call Waiting sequence on a non-Call Waiting line prevents the
system from successfully dialing the central station.
33.1 Comm Fail Event
When a Comm Fail occurs, the panel responds as follows:
1. Clear (dump) the initiating report and any pending reports for the destination where the Comm Fail event occurred.
2. Create a Comm Fail [69] or AltComm Comm Fail [70] report which includes the Destination Number (1 or 2). The
Alternate Comm Fail report is used when an alternate communications path is used (SAFECOM for example).
3. The Comm Fail, Comm Restoral [71], Alternate Comm Restore [72] reports follow the System Status Reports routing.
4. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 1 and System Status Reports routing is set to Destination 2 or set to Destination
2 on Destination 1 fail, then send Comm Fail report.
5. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 1 and System Status Reports routing is set to Destination 1 then send a Comm
Restore report with the next report for Destination 1.
6. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 2 and System Status Reports routing is set to Destination 1, then send Comm
Fail report.
7. If the Comm Fail occurred on Destination 2 and System Status Reports routing is set to Destination 2 then send a Comm
Restore report with the next report for Destination 2.
8. If a Comm Fail report is sent successfully to the other destination, a Comm Restore event should be sent when there is a
successful communication on the failed destination.
33.2 Routing Option Tables
In the following tables an X shows the point where dialing attempts for a Routing Destination end (the last attempt) and the
Comm Fail event begins.
Routing Option Destination 1 Only
Phone 1 Programmed Phone 1 and Phone 2 Programmed

Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 1 Destination 2
Attempt Attempt
Phone 1 Phone 2 Phone 1 Phone 2 Phone 1 Phone 2 Phone 1 Phone 2
1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
Routing Option Destination 2 Only
Phone 1 Programmed Phone 1 and Phone 2 Programmed

Attempt Attempt
1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
Routing Option Destination 1 and Destination 2
Phone 1 and Phone 2 Programmed for Both

Phone 1 Programmed for Both Destinations Destinations
Attempt Attempt
1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
Phone 1 and Phone 2 Programmed for Destination Phone 1 Programmed for Destination 1, Phone 1
1, Phone 1 Programmed for Destination 2 and Phone 2 Programmed for Destination 2
Attempt Attempt
1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
1 X 1 X
2 X 2 X
3 X 3 X
4 X 4 X
5 X 5 X
34.0 Panel Events and Reporting Formats
34.1 Introduction
The following table includes each panel event, the description for each event as it appears in the panel log, the reports sent for
each event, the zone types linked to the event and the DSRPS Event Alert Group number.
The last column, Status Reports, indicates System Status events. An R indicates that reports for the event follow the System
Status routing. An S indicates that the event following the System Status Swinger Count. System reports do not include an
Area number; they use the account number for Area 1.
The event numbers shown in the Panel Events and Reporting Formats table are the same numbers that will show up on a
pager for each corresponding report.
34.2 Panel Events and Reporting Formats
Event as shown Zone Types DSRPS Status
Event # SIA Report SIA Report Data Contact ID Report Event Description
in Panel Log Linked to Event Event Group Reports
01 AC Fail AC Trouble AT 301 AC Loss AC Power to panel 12 R S
interrupted.
02 AC Restore AC Restoral AR 301 AC Loss AC Power to panel 12 R S
restored.
03 Alarm,Tamper Tamper Alarm ri {area} TA {loop} 137 Tamper Alarm, Tamper Zone 4-Tamper 3
Type.
04 Alarm,Emergency Emergency ri {area} QA {loop} 101 Personal Alarm, Emergency 5- Emergency 3
Alarm Emergency Zone Type or ABC Emergency Key
key programmed for
emergency response.
05 Alarm,Panic Panic Alarm ri {area} PA {loop} 120 Panic Alarm, Panic-Visible 6- Visible Panic 3
Zone Type. Emergency Key
06 Alarm,Invisible Holdup Alarm ri {area} HA {loop} 120 Panic Alarm, Panic- Invisible 7-Invisible Panic 3
Zone Type or ABC Emergency Key
key programmed for
panic response.
07 Alarm,24-hr Burg Burglary Alarm ri {area} BA {loop} 133 24 Hr Safe Alarm, Burglary Zone 8- Burglary 3
Type.
08 Alarm,Cntrl,Dly Burglary Alarm ri {area} BA {loop} 134 Entry/Exit Alarm, Delay 1 or 11- Delay 1 3
Delay 2 Zone Type. 12- Delay 2
09 Alarm,Cntrl Burglary Alarm ri {area} BA {loop} 130 Burglary Alarm, Keyswitch or 10- Keyswitch 3
Follower or Instant 13- Follower
Zone Types. 14- Instant
10 Cross,Tamper Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 137 Tamper Alarm, Tamper Zone 4-Tamper 3
Cross Zone Type with Cross Zone
Option selected.
11 Cross,Emergency Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 101 Personal Alarm, Emergency 5- Emergency 3
Cross Zone Emergency Zone Type with Cross
Zone Option selected.
12 Cross,Panic Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 120 Panic Alarm, Panic-Visible 6- Visible Panic 3
Cross Zone Zone Type with Cross
13 Cross,Invisible Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 120 Panic Alarm, Panic- Invisible 7-Invisible Panic 3
Cross Zone Zone Type with Cross
14 Cross,24hr Burg Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 133 24 Hr Safe Alarm, Burglary Zone 8- Burglary 3
Cross Zone Type with Cross Zone
Option selected
15 Cross,Cntrl,Dly Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 134 Entry/Exit Alarm, Delay 1 or 11- Delay 1 3
Cross Zone Delay 2 Zone Type 12- Delay 2
with Cross Zone
Option selected.
16 Cross,Cntrl Burglary Alarm ri {area} BM {loop} 130 Burglary Alarm, Keyswitch or 13- Follower 3
Cross Zone Follower or Instant 14- Instant
Zone Types with
Cross Zone Option
selected.
Table 50: Panel Events and Reporting Formats
DSRPS
Event as shown in SIA Report Data Contact ID Report Zone Types Status
Event # SIA Report Event Description Event
Panel Log Linked to Event Reports
Group
17 Cross,Unverified Unverified ri {area} BG {loop} 378 Cross-zone A fault on one non- any with Cross 3
Event Burglary Trouble fire zone type with the Zone Option
Cross Zone Option
selected. This is not
an alarm event.
18 Alarm Exit Error Exit Alarm ri {area} EA {loop} 374 Exit Error Zone faulted at the 11- Delay 1 3
(zone) end of Exit Delay. 12- Delay 2
19 Alrm Recent Clse Recent Closing ri {area} CR {loop} 134 Entry/Exit Alarm event within 2 11- Delay 1 3
minutes of closing. 12- Delay 2
20 Alrm Recent Clse Recent Closing ri {area} CR {loop} 130 Burglary Alarm event within 2 10- Keyswitch 3
minutes of closing. 13- Follower
14- Instant
21 Auto On Extended Closing Extend ri {area} CE {user} 464 Auto-arm Time Auto On Sked 10
Extended delayed one hour by
user. Report follows
Open/Close routing.
22 Battery Low System Battery YT 302 Low System Panel battery is low. 12 R S
Trouble Battery
23 Battery Missing System Battery YM 311 Battery Panel battery is 12 R S
Missing Missing/Dead missing. Very low,
shorted, or open
batteries are reported
as missing.
24 Rstrl Batt Low System Battery YR 302 Low System Battery restoral from 12 R S
Restoral Battery low battery.
25 Rstrl Bat Missng System Battery YR 311 Battery Battery Restoral from 12 R S
Restoral Missing/Dead missing battery
26 Bypass,Fire,User Fire Bypass ri {area} FB {loop} 571 Fire bypass Selective bypass by 1- Fire 15
user, fire zone types 2- Fire with
Alarm
Verification
27 Bypass,Fire, Fire Bypass ri {area} FB {loop} 571 Fire bypass Selective bypass by 1- Fire
RPS DSRPS, fire zone 2- Fire with
types. Alarm
Verification
28 Bypass,Ctrl,User Burglary ri {area} BB {loop} 570 Zone/Sensor Selective bypass by 10 to 14- Zone 15
Bypass bypass user, zone types. Types
29 Bypass,Ctrl, Burglary ri {area} BB {loop} 570 Zone/Sensor Selective bypass by 10 to 14- Zone
RPS Bypass bypass DSRPS, zone types. Types
30 Bypass,24hr,User Burglary ri {area} BB {loop} 572 24-Hr Zone Selective bypass by 2 to 9- 24-hour, 15
Bypass Bypass user, 24-hour non-fire Non-Fire Zone
zone types. Types
31 Bypass,24hr, Burglary ri {area} BB {loop} 572 24-Hr Zone Selective bypass by 2 to 9- 24-hour,
RPS Bypass Bypass DSRPS, 24-hour non- Non-Fire Zone
fire zone types. Types
32 Bypass,Forced Zn Burglary ri {area} BB {loop} 570 Zone/Sensor Zone force armed at 10 to 14- Zone 15
Bypass bypass force arming. Types
33 Bypass,Swinger Burglary ri {area} BB {loop} 575 Swinger Shunt Zone Swinger All zone types 15
Bypass Shunted.
34 UnBypss,Fire, Usr Fire Bypass ri {area} FU {loop} 571 Fire bypass User cleared bypass 1- Fire 15
(unbypass), Fire zone 2- Fire with
types. Alarm
Verification
35 UnBypss,Ctrl,Usr Burglary ri {area} BU {loop} 570 Zone/Sensor User cleared bypass 10 to 14- Zone 15
Unbypass bypass (unbypass), zone Types
types.
36 UnBypss,24hr,Usr Burglary ri {area} BU {loop} 572 24-Hr Zone User cleared bypass 2 to 9- 24-hour, 15
Unbypass Bypass (unbypass), 24-hour Non-Fire Zone
zone types. Types
Table 50 (cont.): Panel Events and Reporting Formats
Zone Types DSRPS
Event as shown Status
Event # SIA Report SIA Report Data Contact ID Report Event Description Linked to Event
in Panel Log Reports
Event Group
37 Call for Service Service YX 616 Service This report sent 12 R
Required Request automatically at Call for
Service Interval. It does not
indicate a trouble condition.
38 Cancel Alarm Burglary ri {area} BC {user} 406 Cancel User acknowledged active 8
Cancel alarm before Bell Time
expired, non-fire zone
types.
39 Cancel Fire Fire Cancel ri {area} FC {user} 406 Cancel User acknowledged active 7
alarm before Bell Time
expired, non-fire zone
types.
40 CheckSum Fail Parameter YF 303 RAM Checksum on panels 12 R S
Checksum Fail Checksum Bad parameters failed. Panel
program should be verified.
41 ChckSum Parameter pi {SDI address} YF 330 System Checksum on Option Bus 12 R S
Fail,DBus Checksum Fail Peripheral trouble device parameters failed.
Device should be checked.
42 Cls,All,+Dly,Skd Automatic ai {252} CA {area} 403 Automatic O/C System turned All On with 10
Closing Entry/Exit Delay by Sked.
43 Cls,All,+Dly,KS Closing ss {255} CS {area} 409 Keyswitch O/C System turned All On with 10
Keyswitch Entry/Exit Delay by
Keyswitch.
44 Cls,All,+Dly, Remote ri {area} CQ {254} 400 Open/Close System turned All On with
RPS Closing Entry/Exit Delay by DSRPS.
45 Cls,All,+Dly,Tel Remote ri {area} CQ {253} 407 Remote System turned All On with 10
Closing Arm/Disarm Entry/Exit Delay by
Telephone.
46 Cls,All,+Dly,Usr Closing Report ri {area} CL {user} 401 O/C by User System turned All On with 10
Entry/Exit Delay by User.
47 Cls,All,-Dly,RPS Remote ri {area} CQ {254} 400 Open/Close System turned All On with
Closing no delay (instant) by
DSRPS.
48 Cls,All,-Dly,Usr Closing Report ri {area} CL {user} 401 O/C by User System turned All On with 10
no delay (instant) by User.
49 Cls,Prt,+Dly,Skd Automatic ri {area} CA {252} 456 Partial Arm System armed Perimeter 10
Closing Only with Entry/Exit delay
by Sked.
50 Cls,Prt,+Dly,KS Closing ss {255} CS {area} 442 Keyswitch System armed Perimeter 10
Keyswitch Armed Stay Only with Entry/Exit Delay
by Keyswitch.
51 Cls,Prt,+Dly, Remote ri {area} CQ {254} 456 Partial Arm System armed Perimeter
RPS Closing Only with Entry/Exit Delay
by DSRPS.
52 Cls,Prt,+Dly,Usr Closing Report ri {area} CL {user} 456 Partial Arm System armed Perimeter 10
Only with Entry/Exit Delay
by User.
53 Cls,Prt,-Dly, Remote ri {area} CQ {254} 456 Partial Arm System armed Perimeter
RPS Closing Only with no delay (instant)
by DSRPS.
54 Cls,Prt,-Dly,Usr Closing Report ri {area} CL {user} 456 Partial Arm System armed Perimeter 10
Only with no delay (instant)
by User.
55 Frc,All,+Dly,Skd Forced Closing ai {252} CF {area} 403 Automatic O/C System forced All On with 10
Entry/Exit Delay by Sked.
56 Frc,All,+Dly,KS Forced Closing ss {255} CF {area} 400 O/C System forced All On with 10
Entry/Exit Delay by
Keyswitch.
Zone Types DSRPS
Event Group
57 Frc,All,+Dly,RPS Forced Closing ri {area} CF {254} 400 O/C System forced All On with
Entry/Exit Delay by DSRPS.
58 Frc,All,+Dly,Tel Forced Closing ri {area} CF {253} 400 O/C System forced All On with 10
Entry/Exit Delay by
Telephone.
59 Frc,All,+Dly,Usr Forced Closing ri {area} CF {user} 401 O/C by User System forced All On with 10
Entry/Exit Delay by User.
60 Frc,All,-Dly,RPS Forced Closing ri {area} CF {254} 400 O/C System forced All On with
no delay (instant) by
DSRPS.
61 Frc,All,-Dly,Usr Forced Closing ri {area} CF {user} 401 O/C by User System forced All On with 10
no delay (instant) by User.
62 Frc,Prt,+Dly,Skd Forced ai {252} NF {area} 456 Partial Arm System forced Perimeter 10
Perimeter Arm Only with Entry/Exit Delay
by Sked.
63 Frc,Prt,+Dly,KS Forced ss {255} NF {area} 456 Partial Arm System forced Perimeter 10
by Keyswitch.
64 Frc,Prt,+Dly, Forced ri {area} NF {254} 456 Partial Arm System forced Perimeter
RPS Perimeter Arm Only with Entry/Exit Delay
by DSRPS.
65 Frc,Prt,+Dly,Usr Forced ri {area} NF {254} 456 Partial Arm System forced Perimeter 10
by User.
66 Frc,Prt,-Dly, Forced ri {area} NF {254} 456 Partial Arm System forced Perimeter
RPS Perimeter Arm Only with no delay (instant)
by DSRPS.
67 Frc,Prt,-Dly,Usr Forced ri {area} NF {254} 456 Partial Arm System forced Perimeter 10
Perimeter Arm Only with no delay (instant)
by User.
68 Reserved
69 Comm Fail Communicatio rg {destination} YC 354 Failure to Report failed to reach 12 R S
ns Fail communicate routing destination.
event
70 CommFail, Communicatio pi {SDI Address} YC 354 Failure to Report failed to reach 12 R S
AltComm ns Fail communicate routing destination
event configured for Alternate
Communication.
71 Comm Restoral Communicatio rg {destination} YK 354 Failure to After communication fail, 12 R S
ns Restoral communicate report sent successfully to
event routing destination.
72 CommRstl, Communicatio pi {SDI Address} YK 354 Failure to After communication fail, 12 R S
AltComm ns Restoral communicate report sent successfully to
event routing destination
configured for Alternate
Communication.
73 Date/Time Change Time Changed JT {user} 625 Time/Date Date/Time in panel 12 R
reset changed.
74 Duress Hold Up Alarm ri {area} HA {loop} 121 Duress User entered Duress PIN or 1
pressed Panic key
sequence on RF Keyfob.
The Duress report is sent in
addition to any other report
that the users action would
generate.
75 Fire,Alarm Fire Alarm ri {area} FA {loop} 110 Fire Alarm event on fire zone 1- Fire 2
type. 2- Fire with
Alarm
Verification
Zone Types DSRPS
Event Group
76 Fire,Cross Fire Alarm ri {area} FM {loop} 110 Fire Verified alarm event on fire 1- Fire 2
Cross Zone zone type with Cross Zone 2- Fire with
Option. See Cross Zone Alarm
Option, page 127. Verification
77 Fire,Un-verified Unverified ri {area} FG {loop} 378 Cross-zone Unverified alarm event on 1- Fire 5
Event-Fire Trouble fire zone type with Cross 2- Fire with
Zone Option. See Cross Alarm
Zone Option, page 127 Or Verification
unverified event on Fire
Verify zone type. See page
122.
78 Fire, Missing Missing Fire ri {area} FY {loop} 373 Fire Trouble Fire zone type assigned to 1- Fire 5
Trouble zone expander (wired or 2- Fire with
RF) not responding to Alarm
panels status poll. Verification
79 Fire,Alrm,Rstl Fire Alarm ri {area} FH {loop} 110 Fire Restoral from alarm, Fire 1- Fire 7
Restore zone types 2- Fire with
Alarm
Verification
80 Fire,Trouble Fire Trouble ri {area} FT {loop} 373 Fire Trouble Trouble condition on Fire 1- Fire 5
zone types 2- Fire with
Alarm
Verification
81 Fire,Trbl,Rstl Fire Trouble ri {area} FJ {loop} 373 Fire Trouble Restoral from Trouble, Fire 1- Fire 7
Restore zone types. 2- Fire with
Alarm
Verification
82 Instl Mode,Start Local Program LB 466 Service On Installer PIN entered. 11 R
Premises Installer mode accessed.
83 Instl Mode,End Local LX 466 Service Off Installer mode exited. 11 R
Programming Premises
Ended
84 Log Overflow Log Overflow JO 624 Event Log Panel log overflow 12 R
Overflow condition. Oldest events
being overwritten.
85 Log Threshold Log Threshold JL 620 Event Log Panel log reached 12 R
threshold. See Log
Supervision Configuration,
page 81.
86 AltCom Low Signl Low Received XL {device address} 350 Low Signal Strength 12 R S
Signal Strength Communication detected on Alternate
Trouble Communication device.
87 Missing,Alarm Untyped ri {area} UZ {loop} 140 General Alarm Zone assigned to zone Any non-fire 3
Missing Alarm expander (wired or RF) not zone type
responding to panels status
poll while system is armed.
88 Missing,Trouble Untyped ri {area} UY {loop} 382 Loss of super- Zone assigned to zone Any non-fire 6
Missing RPM expander (wired or RF) not zone type
Trouble responding to panels status
poll while system is
disarmed.
89 Open,Skd Automatic ai {252} OA {area} 403 Automatic O/C Opening by Sked. 10
Opening
90 Open, RPS Remote ri {area} OQ {254} 400 Open/Close Opening by DSRPS.
Opening
91 Open,Usr Opening ri {area} OP {user} 401 O/C by User Opening by user, by ID 10
Report reported.
92 Open,KS Opening ss {255} OS {area} 409 Keyswitch O/C Opening by Keyswitch. 10
Keyswitch
93 Open,Skd,Alarm Disarm from ri {area} OR {252} 403 Automatic O/C Opening after Alarm event 10
Alarm by Sked.
Zone Types DSRPS
Event Group
94 Open,RPS,Alarm Disarm from ri {area} OR {254} 400 Open/Close Opening after Alarm event
Alarm by DSRPS.
95 Open,Usr,Alarm Disarm from ri {area} OR {user} 401 O/C by User Opening after Alarm event, 10
Alarm ID reported.
96 Open,KS,Alarm Disarm from ri {area} OR {255} 409 Keyswitch O/C Opening after Alarm event 10
Alarm by Keyswitch
97 Reserved
98 Params Changed Parameter YG 306 Panel Panel Parameters Changed 12 R
Changed Programming
Changed
99 Phone Line Fail Phone Line LT {phone line} 351 Telco 1 fault Phone line voltage less than 12 R S
Trouble 3 volts for 40 seconds.
100 Phone Line Rstl Phone Line LR {phone line} 351 Telco 1 fault After Phone Line Fail event, 12 R S
Restoral phone line voltage detected
at greater than 3 volts for 40
seconds.
101 Bad Call to RPS Remote RA 413 Unsuccessful Panel attempted call to 12 R
Programmer access DSRPS, but was
Call Failed unsuccessful.
102 RPS Access Fail Remote RU 413 Unsuccessful DSRPS attempted to R
Program access connect to panel but was
Fail not successful.
103 RPS Access OK Valid RS 412 Successful DSRPS successfully R
Remote Download/Access connected to and
Access disconnected from panel.
104 Re-Boot,Panel Power Up RR 305 System reset Normal start up or reset with R S
Installer Switch.
105 Re-Boot,DBus Power Up pi {SDI address} RR 339 Exp. Module Unexpected reset (reboot) 12 R S
Reset from Option Bus device.
106 Output Reset,Usr Relay Open id {user} RO {output #} 320 Sounder/Relay Output Reset by User 16 R
107 Output Reset,Skd Relay Open id {252} RO {output #} 320 Sounder/Relay Output Reset by Sked 16 R
108 Output Reset, Relay Open id {254} RO {output #} 320 Sounder/Relay Output Reset by DSRPS R
RPS
109 Output Set,Usr Relay Close id {user} RC {output #} 320 Sounder/Relay Output Set by User 16 R
110 Output Set,Skd Relay Close id {252} RC {output #} 320 Sounder/Relay Output Set by Sked 16 R
111 Output Set,RPS Relay Close id {254} RC {output #} 320 Sounder/Relay Output Set by DSRPS R
112 Rstrl,Tamper Tamper ri {area} TR {loop} 137 Tamper Restoral from alarm, 4- Tamper 8
Restoral Tamper zone type.
113 Rstrl,Emergency Emergency ri {area} QR {loop} 101 Personal Restoral from alarm, 5- 8
Restoral Emergency Emergency zone type. Emergency
114 Rstrl,Panic Panic ri {area} PR {loop} 120 Panic Restoral from alarm, Panic 6- Visible 8
Restoral zone type. Panic
115 Rstrl,Invisible Holdup ri {area} HR {loop} 120 Panic Restoral from alarm, 7-Invisible 8
Restoral Invisible zone type. Panic
116 Rstrl,24-hr Burg Burglary ri {area} BR {loop} 133 24hr (Safe) Restoral from alarm, 24- 8- Burglary 8
Restoral hour burglary zone types. 9- Reserved
117 Rstrl,Cntrl,Dly Burglary ri {area} BR {loop} 134 Entry/Exit Restoral from alarm, zone 11- Delay 1 8
Restoral types. 12- Delay 2
118 Rstrl,Cntrl Burglary ri {area} BR {loop} 130 Burglary Restoral from alarm, zone 10- 8
Restoral types. Keyswitch
13- Follower
14- Instant
119 Rcvr Jam RF XQ {RF device #} 344 RF Receiver Jammed condition detected 9 R S
Interference Jam Detect on premises RF receiver.
120 Rcvr Jam Rstl RF XH {RF device #} 344 RF Receiver Jammed condition detected 9 R S
Interference Jam Detect on premises RF receiver
Restoral Restoral cleared.
DSRPS
Event as shown Zone Types Status
Event # SIA Report SIA Report Data Contact ID Report Event Description Event
in Panel Log Linked to Event Reports
Group
121 RF Battery Low Transmitter ri {area} XT {RF device 384 RF Low Battery Low Battery detected Any zone type 9
Battery #} on premises RF
Trouble transmitter.
122 RF Battery Rstl Transmitter ri {area} XR {RF device 384 RF Low Battery Low Battery condition Any zone type 9
Battery #} detected on premises
Restoral RF transmitter cleared.
123 RF Tamper Trbl Tamper ri {area} TT {RF device 383 Sensor Tamper Premises RF Any zone type 9
Trouble #} Transmitter Tamper
Trouble
124 RF Tamper Rstl Tamper ri {area} TR {RF device 383 Sensor Tamper Premises RF Any zone type 9
Trouble #} Transmitter Tamper
Restore Restoral
125 DBus Missing Expansion EM {SDI address} 333 Exp. Module Option Bus device not 12 R S
Device Failure responding to polling.
Missing
126 DBus Missing,Rstl Expansion EN {SDI address} 333 Exp. Module Option Bus device 12 R S
Missing Failure declared as missing
Restore now responding to
polling.
127 DBus Tamper Expansion ES {SDI address} 341 Exp. Module Tamper open on 12 R S
Device Tamper Option Bus Device
Tamper Tamper.
128 DBus Tamper,Rstl Expansion EJ {SDI address} 341 Exp. Module Option Bus Device 12 R S
Tamper Tamper Tamper Restoral.
Restore
129 DBus Trouble Expansion ET {SDI address} 330 System Trouble detected on 12 R S
Trouble Peripheral Trouble Option Bus Device.
130 DBus Trouble,Rstl Expansion ER {SDI address} 330 System Option Bus Device 12 R S
Restoral Peripheral Trouble Trouble condition
cleared.
131 DBus OverCurrent Overcurrent pi {SDI address} YI 330 System Over current condition 12 R S
Trouble Peripheral Trouble detected on Option
Bus device.
132 DBus OverCur,Rstl Overcurrent pi {SDI address} YJ 330 System Over current condition 12 R S
Restore Peripheral Trouble on Option Bus device
restored.
133 Sensor Mon Trbl No Activity ri {area} NA {loop} 391 Sensor Watch Sensor trouble 6
trouble detected. See page
133 for a description of
Sensor Monitor
feature. Reports follow
zone trouble routing.
134 Sensor Mon Rstl Activity ri {area} NS {loop} 391 Sensor Watch Sensor trouble 6
Restored trouble condition restored.
Reports follow zone
trouble routing.
135 Sensor Reset Local Event User entered System 12
Only Reset key sequence
([#] + [4] + [7]).
136 System Inactive Closing CD {area} System was not armed 12 R
Delinquent in Inactive Interval. See
page 80. System Reset
key sequence ([#] + [4]
+ [7]) or arming resets
this trouble.
137 Test, OK Automatic RP 602 Period Test No system troubles at 13
Test Report automatic test report
time.
138 Test,Off-Normal Test Off ri {0} RY {0} 608 Period Test System trouble present 13
Normal Report, System at test time.
Trouble Present
DSRPS
Group
139 Trbl,Tamper Tamper ri {area} TT {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Trouble condition on 4-Tamper 6
Trouble Tamper or Voice
Active zone types.
140 Trbl,Emergency Emergency ri {area} QT {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Trouble condition on 5- Emergency 6
Trouble Emergency zone type.
141 Trbl,Panic Panic ri {area} PT {loop} 375 Panic Zone Trouble condition on 6- Visible Panic 6
Trouble Trouble Panic zone type.
142 Trbl,Invisible Holdup ri {area} HT {loop} 375 Panic Zone Trouble condition on 7-Invisible Panic 6
Trouble Trouble Invisible zone type.
143 Trbl,24-hr Burg Burglary ri {area} BT {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Trouble condition on 8- Burglary 6
Trouble Burglary zone type.
144 Trbl,Cntrl,Dly Burglary ri {area} BT {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Trouble condition on 11- Delay 1 6
Trouble Delay zone types. 12- Delay 2
145 Trbl,Cntrl Burglary ri {area} BT {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Trouble condition on 10- Keyswitch 6
Trouble Keyswitch, Follower, 13- Follower
and Instant zone 14- Instant
types.
146 Rstrl,Trbl,Tmpr Tamper ri {area} TJ 380 Sensor Trouble Restoral from trouble 4-Tamper 8
Trouble condition on Tamper or
Restore Voice Active zone
types.
147 Rstrl,Trbl,Emerg Emergency ri {area} QJ {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Restoral from trouble 5- Emergency 8
Trouble condition on
Restore Emergency zone type.
148 Rstrl,Trbl,Panic Panic ri {area} PJ {loop} 375 Panic Zone Restoral from trouble 6- Visible Panic 8
Trouble Trouble condition on Panic
Restore zone type.
149 Rstrl,Trbl,Invis Holdup ri {area} HJ {loop} 375 Panic Zone Restoral from trouble 7-Invisible Panic 8
Trouble Trouble condition on Invisible
Restore zone type.
150 Rstrl,Trbl,24-hr Burglary ri {area} BJ {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Restoral from trouble 8- Burglary 8
Trouble condition on Burglary
Restore zone type.
151 Rstrl,Trbl,Dly Burglary ri {area} BJ {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Restoral from trouble 11- Delay 1 8
Trouble condition on Delay 12- Delay 2
Restore zone types.
152 Rstrl,Trbl,Cntrl Burglary ri {area} BJ {loop} 380 Sensor Trouble Restoral from trouble 10- Keyswitch 8
Trouble condition on 13- Follower
Restore Keyswitch, Follower, 14- Instant
and Instant zone
types.
153 User Code Area User Code id {user doing change} User Code added by 16 R
Set Added JY {changed user} assigning area.
154 User Code Change User Code id {user doing change} User Code changed. 16 R
Changed JV {changed user}
155 User Code Delete User Code id {user doing change} User Code deleted. 16 R
Deleted JX {changed user}
156 User Code Tamper User Code pi {SDI address} JA 461 Wrong Code Invalid User Codes 16 R
Tamper {area} Entry entered at keypad
exceeded User
Tamper Retry Count.
See page 106.
157 User Level Set User Level JZ {changed user} User Level set. 16 R
Set
158 Walk Test Start Test Start ri {area} TS 607 Walk Test Mode Walk Test started with 11
Walk Test key
sequence ([#]+[4]+[4]).
159 Walk Test End Test End ri {area} TE 607 Walk Test Mode Walk Test ended by 11
user or timed out.
DSRPS
Group
160 Siren Trouble Bell Fault YA 320 Sounder Relay Trouble condition 12 R S
detected on PO 2
configured as
supervised siren
output.
161 Siren Restoral Bell YH 320 Sounder Relay Trouble condition on 12 R S
Restored supervised siren
output cleared.
162 Grnd Fault Equipment IA {0} 310 Ground Fault Ground fault detected 12 R S
Failure on panels sensor
Condition loops, Option Bus, or
Aux power outputs.
163 Grnd Fault, Rstl Equipment IR {0} 310 Ground Fault Ground fault condition 12 R S
Fail Restoral cleared.
164 First Open Opening OP {user} 400 Open/Close Panel is configured for 10
Report multiple area first to
open, last to close
functionality. See page
91. First area has
opened.
165 Last Close Closing CL {user} 400 Open/Close Panel is configured for 10
Report multiple area first to
open, last to close
functionality. See page
91. Last area has
closed.
166 AltCom Cond Network ss {condition} NC 350 Communication Trouble detected on 12 R S
Condition {path} Trouble Alternate
Communication
network.
167 AltComm Fail Network ss {condition} NT 350 Communication Network failure 12 R S
Failure {path} Trouble detected on Alternate
Communication
network.
168 AltComm Rstrl Network ss {condition} NR 350 Communication Network 12 R S
Restoral {path} Trouble communication
resumed on alternate
communications
network.
169 Reserved
170 Reserved
171 Reserved
172 Reserved
173 Rstrl, Swinger Burglary ri {area} BU {loop} 575 Swinger Shunt Restoral from Swinger Any zone type 8
Unbypass Shunt.
174 Rstrl,Fire,Miss Local Event Local Event Only Restoral from Fire 1- Fire 7
Only Missing. Local event, 2- Fire with
no report. Alarm
Verification
175 Rstrl,Alarm,Miss Local Event Local Event Only Restoral from Missing, Any non-fire 8
Only Non-Fire zones. Local zone type
event, no report sent.
176 Rstrl,Trble,Miss Local Event Local Event Only Restoral from Trouble, Any non-fire 8
Only Non-Fire zones. Local zone type
event, no report.
177 Rstl,Low Signl Local Event Local Event Only Restoral from Alternate 12 R S
Only Communication Low
Signal Strength event.
DSRPS
Group
178 UnBypss,Fire, RPS Fire ri {area (?)} FU {loop} 571 Fire bypass Bypass on Fire zone 1- Fire
Unbypass type cleared using 2- Fire with
DSRPS (un-bypass) Alarm
Verification
179 UnBypss,Ctrl, Burglary ri {area (?)} BU {loop} 570 Zone/Sensor Bypass on zone type 10 to 14- Zone
RPS Unbypass bypass cleared using DSRPS Types
(un-bypass)
180 UnBypss,24hr, Burglary ri {area (?)} BU {loop} 572 24 hour zone Bypass on 24-hour 2 to 9- 24-hour,
RPS Unbypass bypass zone type cleared Non-Fire Zone
using DSRPS (un- Types
bypass)
181 RF Battery Low Transmitter ri {0} XT {user} 384 RF Low Battery Low battery condition 9 R
Battery on RF Keyfob.
Trouble
182 RF Battery Rstl Transmitter ri {0} XR {user} 384 RF Low Battery Low battery condition 9 R
Battery on RF Keyfob
Restoral restored.
183 Default PINS Local Event Local Event Only Installer or User PINS
Only have not been
changed from default.
184 Default PINS Rstl Local Event Local Event Only Installer or User
Only default PINS have
been changed.
35.0 Basic Pager Format
35.1 Configuring the Panel
Setting a Routing Destination to Basic Pager format configures the panel to send reports to a numeric pager. To utilize the
Basic Pager format:
1. Enter the phone number for the pager in the Phone Number 1 parameter for the Routing Destination you have chosen as
the Basic Pager Destination.
The panels Basic Pager format does not wait for an acknowledgement tone from the pager service provider to
send its report to the pager. It dials the phone number, waits 250 milliseconds and then sends the report. To
increase the delay (pause), add delay characters as needed to the end of the phone number. See Table 51 (page
179) for the valid phone number entries.
2. Set the Format for Destination 1 (2) parameter to Basic Pager for the Routing Destination you have chosen as the Basic
Pager Destination.
Set the routing for any reports you would like sent to the pager to the Routing Destination (1 or 2) you have chosen as the
Basic Pager destination.
Report digits are dialed as 100-millisecond DTMF tone pulses with 100-millisecond pauses between the digits.
35.2 Configuring a Pager Display
A pagers display can show up to four fields of information in the order as shown below:
(Account Number) - (Event Number) - (Area Number) - (Zone/User Number)
The data entered to set up a pager display follows the numbers entered for the panels routing phone numbers.
See Table 51 for the valid phone number entries.
The following examples show how to set up a pager display with different fields showing with and without separators. The
following variables will be used for each example:
Phone Number: 978-1580
Account Number: 1234
Event Number: 08 (can be a 2- or 3-digit number)
Area Number: 03
Zone Faulted: 21
35.2.1 All Four Fields and No Separators
To set up a pager display that shows all four fields without any separators between fields, enter the Phone Number Addresses
as shown below:
Address Entry: 9-7-8-1-5-8-10-13-13-13-0-#-0
Resulting Pager Display: 1234080321
The first 7 digits entered (9, 7, 8, 1, 5, 8, 10) make up the sample phone number (to enter 0, key in 10 at the
keypad). Three pause characters (13, 13, 13 follow the phone number).
The 11th digit, 0, is the phone number terminator. This digit is always a 0 (zero).
The 12th digit, # (entered as 12 at the keypad), turns off all field separators. Without any field separators, the
digits will appear as shown above without any spacing between field groupings.
The 13th digit, 0, is the separator/field terminator. This digit is always a 0 (zero).
The absence of a * (asterisk) entry will show all four fields in the following order: Account Number, Event
Number, Area Number and Zone Number.
35.2.2 All Four Fields with Separators
To set up a pager display that shows all four areas with separators between fields, enter the Phone Number Addresses as
shown below:
Address Entry: 9-7-8-1-5-8-10-13-13-13-0-0
Resulting Pager Display: 1234-08-03-21
The absence of a # entry inserts separators (-) between each field.
The absence of a * (asterisk) entry will show all four fields in the following order: Account Number, Event
Number, Area Number and Zone Number.
35.2.3 First Three Fields with Separators
To set up a pager display that shows the first three fields (Account Number, Event Number, and Area Number) with separators
between fields, enter the Phone Number Addresses as shown below:
Address Entry: 9-7-8-1-5-8-10-13-13-13-0-*-*-*-0
Resulting Pager Display: 1234-08-03
The 12th, 13th and 14th digits, * (asterisk entered as 11 at the keypad), will show the first three fields in the
following order: Account Number, Event Number and Area Number.
The 15th digit, 0 is the separator/field terminator. This digit is always a 0 (zero).
The absence of a # entry inserts separators (-) between each field. To turn the separators off, enter a # after
the phone number terminator.
35.2.4 First Two Fields with Separators
To set up a pager display that shows the first two fields (Account Number and Event Number) with separators between fields,
enter the Phone Number Addresses as shown below:
Address Entry: 9-7-8-1-5-8-10-13-13-13-0-*-*-0
Resulting Pager Display: 1234-08
The 12th and 13th digits, * (asterisk entered as 11 at the keypad), will show the first two fields in the following
order: Account Number and Event Number.
The 14th digit, 0 is the separator/field terminator. This digit is always a 0 (zero).
The absence of a # entry inserts separators (-) between each field. To turn the separators off, enter a # after
the phone number terminator.
35.2.5 First Field Only
To set up a pager display that shows only the first field (Account Number), enter the Phone Number Addresses as shown
below:
Address Entry: 9-7-8-1-5-8-10-13-13-13-0-*-0
Resulting Pager Display: 1234
The 12th digit, * (asterisk entered as 11 at the keypad), will show the first field (Account Number) only.
Table 51 shows the phone number selections that may be entered from the keypad:
Digit to be Dialed Enter at the Keypad
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
0 10
* 11
# 12
p (4-second pause) 13
f (on-hook, pause, off-hook) 14
reserved 15
t (terminate) 0
Table 51: Phone Number Selections
Any pauses that need to be entered in the dialing sequence (phone number) must go before the terminator.
The number of pauses required will vary based on the requirements of the specific paging service being used.
Pre-testing should be performed to determine the correct number of pauses used to correctly establish panel
communications by the pager sequence.
If the zone/user number is three digits, the leading digit is omitted. For example, 252 displays as 52.
Do not use alpha cahracters for the account number in basic pager format.
36.0 History Log
The Log can store up to 254 events. When it reaches 75% full, the panel sends a Log Threshold [85] report. When the Log
reaches capacity, the system sends a Log Overflow [84] report to the security company.
DSRPS 2000+ can accept a download from the DS7240/DS7220 Log, thus clearing the log file. If the log is not cleared it
begins writing over previous events.
The first line of the log shows the event description (see Pager Events and Reporting Formats on page 167). The second line
of the log display alternates between the time and date of the event and the area, zone (device), user and communication
information for the event. The panel displays time in 24-hour format and the date as programmed in Date Format and Enable
PIN Trouble (Address 0235) on page 83.
To view the log, press [#] + [8] + [5]. The keypad may prompt you to enter a valid PIN. Press the [*] key to advance to the next
event. Press [#] to exit the log and return to the normal display.
Area, Zone/Device/Line User, Communication Data
The History Log employs the following characters to communicate certain information:
Display Description
A# Area Number
Zn## Zone Number
Dv## Device Number
Ln## Phone Line Number
Mn# Minutes till Auto Arm Sked
Cd## User Code Number
Op## Output Number
Ks## Keyswitch Number
U## User Number
## Communication status for Routing
Destinations 1 & 2
- (dash) Destination Disabled
A Aborted
D Deleted from Pending Buffer by Panel
Reset
F Failed
L Local
P Pending
S Sent
Table 52: History Log Display Descriptions
Figure 70 is a DS7447i Keypad display of an event log. The first line describes the event and the second line alternates
between event specific information (such as area # and zone #, if applicable) and the time and date of the event.
Event
Event
Sensor Mon Rstl

A1 Zn3 SL Sensor Mon Rstl
08:29 06/13/01
Event Specific Destination 2

Time of Event Date of Event
Information Destination 1
Figure 70: History Log Display
37.0 Glossary
24-Hour Zone: Zones that are always on even when the system is turned off. Two types: Fire Zones and Non-Fire
Zones.
Account Number: The account number is the number the DS7240/DS7220 transmits to the Central Station receiver. It is
not the Personal Identification Number (PIN). The account number is not sufficient identification to abort
an alarm.
Address: Once the installer selects a value for a parameter, the panel stores the selection in E2 memory. Each
parameter uses one or more Addresses. When programming from the keypad, the installer enters a
selection directly into the memory Address(es). When programming from the remote programmer, the
installer need only make one entry per parameter.
All On: All zones are armed. All On with No Entry (Instant) is an option.
Area (Partition): An installer-specified collection of zones that can be armed and disarmed independently. An Area can
report with its own account number. Opening, closing, alarm, trouble and restoral reports are all
associated with an Area. You can organize the panels zones and users into a maximum of four (or two)
independent Areas, in essence creating four independent systems with a single control/communicator.
Authority Level: A programmable feature that determines which functions a user can perform in a specified Area.
Burg Alarm Tone: A constant warble tone.
Bypass: To selectively remove zones temporarily from the system.
Central Station: A facility where trained personnel monitor a security system 24 hours a day. The security system may be
programmed to contact the Central Station during alarm conditions, enabling Central Station personnel
to dispatch the proper authorities.
Checksum: A method of checking accuracy of transmitted information. A number representing the total number of
bits of information transmitted is included with the transmission. The microprocessor counts the bits of
information received and compares its sum to the transmitted checksum number. If the numbers do not
match, the transmission is in error.
Cross Zone: Two zones that are configured to initiate an alarm when both zones have been faulted. Fire zones
cannot be set for Cross Zone configuration.
Data Digit: Selections for data range from 0 to 15 (16 selections total). The programming selection made at each
parameter is the Data Digit. For many programming parameters, there are less than 16 choices. To
properly enter a data digit that is only one digit in length, press the appropriate number key on the
keypad, or press [0] followed by the appropriate number key. Then press [*] to enter your choice into the
system. For example, [4] + [*] and [0] + [4] + [*] are the same entry.
DTMF Dialing: Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. A standard signaling method for dialing and data transmission using a
combination of two sine waves at different frequencies. Also commonly referred to as Touch-Tone
signaling.
Duress PIN: A PIN that arms and disarms the system just like a user PIN does, however it also sends an alarm signal
to the Central Station without sounding an alarm on the premises.
DSRPS 2000+: DSRPS (Detection Systems Remote Programming Software) 2000+ is a Windows-based account
management and panel programming utility designed to remotely set up and program specific control
panels.
Entry Delay: A programmed delay of the system alarm responses that allow a person to enter the building through the
Entry door to turn the system off. An alarm response begins if the panel is not disarmed before Entry
Delay expires.
Error Tone: The same warble tone as the Trouble tone, but not repeated.
Faulted Zone: A zone that is not normal (for example, an open door or window).
Fire Alarm Tone: A warble tone that is on for one second, then briefly off (repeatedly).
Follower Zone: A zone programmed to initiate an instant alarm unless a Delay zone is faulted first. When a Delay zone
is faulted first, the Follower zone assumes the Entry Delay time of the Delay zone.
Force Arming: A method of overriding the safety feature that prevents arming with a faulted zone on a
control/communicator.
Global: Something that affects the entire system (for example, global zone configuration refers to the
programmable features that affect all zones).
Groups: The DS7240/DS7220 programming parameters described in this manual are organized into groups.
Most groups primarily contain parameters that are related in some way. For example, the Authority
Levels Group contains parameters that configure the panels four Authority Levels.
Handshake: A signal sent by one end of the communications channel to the other indicating reception of signal.
Hold: An instruction to press and hold a key to perform a function.
Instant Alarm: A zone type that initiates an alarm immediately when faulted. This zone type does not follow any
Entry/Exit delay time.
Invisible Zone: A zone that does not display at any keypad during alarm or trouble conditions.
Keyfob: A small, hand-held wireless device usually designed to fit on a key chain. It consists of buttons that allow
the user to perform various functions, depending on the keyfob, such as arming/disarming the system,
operating outputs or sending reports.
Keyswitch: Two types: Momentary and Maintained. To operate a Momentary Keyswitch, insert the key, turn it and
release it. The key returns to its starting position automatically. The key cannot be removed unless it is in
the starting position. A Maintained Keyswitch typically has two positions marked Armed and
Disarmed. To operate, insert the key, turn to desired position and remove the key.
Latching: The locking in of a circuit by means of a holding contact.
Location: On the DS7240/DS7220 Control/Communicators, a Location represents the following parameter
assignments: Area, Zone Number and Device. A Location tells the panel in which Area a device is
assigned and by which Zone Number it reports as.
No Entry: Turning the system on without Entry Delay.
Off Display: The display that appears when the system is turned off and no keys are pressed (normal display).
Options: Options are a unique type of parameter that allows the installer to configure up to four features by
entering a Data Digit at a single Address.
PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network. An assembly of communications facilities and central office
equipment operated jointly by authorized common carriers that provides the general public with the
ability to establish communications channels via discrete dialing codes.
Parity: A method of checking the accuracy of transmitted data by adding an extra bit to the number when
necessary to make the number odd or even.
Parameter: Each program parameter sets a specific value or chooses an option.
Partial On: A user-defined subset of the zones that arm. Partial On with No Entry (Instant) is an option
Perimeter Only: An installer-defined subset of the zones that arm. Perimeter Only with No Entry (Instant) is an option.
PIN: Personal Identification Number. A unique number issued at the time of installation of each system. This
PIN is required to operate the system (arm/disarm, test system, initiate functions, etc.). The PIN is not
the same as the account number.
Press/Push: These are used interchangeably instructing you to push down and then release a key.
Pulse Dialing: A method of selecting the called number by pulsing the phone line.
Restoral Report: A signal transmitted upon the removal of a trouble or alarm condition from a zone.
Sked: A scheduling parameter that allows a selected event to happen at a specific time.
Swinger Shunt: A programmable feature that determines the number of alarms or troubles the zone can transmit. If the
number is exceeded, the zone is bypassed for the remainder of the arming period.
Trouble: A service condition that needs to be corrected, such as a broken wire.
Visible Zone: A zone that displays at keypads during alarm or trouble conditions.
Zone: The panel reports changing conditions on the sensor loops as Zone events. For example, when the
condition on On-board Sensor Loop 1 changes from Normal (supervised EOL resistor in place) to
Shorted, the panel can be programmed to create an alarm event for Zone 1. That alarm event appears in
keypad displays as Alarm, Zn 1. If programmed for reporting, the panel would send an Alarm, Zn 1
report to the Central Station receiver in the programmed reporting format.
Zone Function: Use to construct personality types for zones used in the DS7240/DS7220 systems. Each unique Zone
Function Configuration determines responses to specific conditions occurring on the zones.
Zone Type: Describes what the zone does. For example, Fire zone, Burglar zone, 24-hour zone, etc.
Index
A Automatic Test Report Options
Call RPS at Test Time ........................................................ 86
A, B, C Keys Defer Test Report ............................................................... 86
ABC Key & Duress Rpt Routing ..................................23, 114 Test Report Only if System is Armed.................................. 86
Alarm Output Option....................................................22, 113 Test Reports for All Areas................................................... 86
Alarm Response..........................................................21, 112
Area Options ...............................................................21, 112 B
Duress Reporting Options .................................................114 Basic Pager Format.............................................................. 177
Enable Keypad Tamper Response .............................23, 115 Battery
Report & Ack Beep Options ..............................................113 Charging Circuit .................................................................. 46
ABC Key Alarm Response Options Discharge/Recharge Schedule ........................................... 46
Emergency Alarm Response.............................................112 Installation........................................................................... 46
Fire Alarm Response.........................................................112 NFPA 72 Battery Calculation .............................................. 45
Panic Alarm Response......................................................112 Standby Battery Calculation ............................................... 45
ABC Key Report & Beep Options Standby Battery Requirements........................................... 45
Ack Beep for ABC Keys ....................................................113 Supervision ......................................................................... 46
Enable ABC Key Reporting ...............................................113 Burglary Applications............................................................ 161
AC Power Supervision Options C
AC Tag-along ......................................................................78
Disable AC Fail Local Annunciation ....................................78 Call for Service Options
Enable Arm/Disarm Bypass Tracking .................................78 Display at Call for Service Interval...................................... 81
Enable Internal Crystal to Keep Time .................................78 Display at System Inactive Interval..................................... 81
Accounts Enable Weekly Test Reminder ........................................... 81
Standard Features...............................................................42 Report at Call for Service Interval....................................... 81
Adding RF ID Codes ...............................................................68 Circuit Suppression ................................................................ 46
Alarm Event Memory Comm Fail Event .................................................................. 164
Standard Features...............................................................42 Communication Failure........................................................... 48
Alarm Power ...........................................................................47 Configuring a Pager Display................................................. 177
Alternate Communication Path ...............................................72 Configuring the Panel ........................................................... 177
Approved Application Compliance Guide .............................161 Continuous Power Output ...................................................... 47
Areas Control/Communicator
Account # for Routing Dest 1 (2) ...................................14, 95 Assembly ............................................................................ 43
Lock Area # Reporting...................................................15, 97 Standard Features .............................................................. 42
Opening/Closing Reporting Options..............................15, 96 Current Requirements ............................................................ 41
Standard Features...............................................................42 D
Arming Devices Data Bus
Overview .............................................................................62 DX2010 to Panel Connections............................................ 55
Arming Options 1 DX3010 to Panel Connections............................................ 60
Answering Machine Bypass Options...................................90 DX4010 to Panel Connections............................................ 65
Enable All On/No Exit..........................................................90 Dialing Format ........................................................................ 14
Remote Arming w/ Telephone.............................................90 DS-RPS 2000+....................................................................... 44
Arming Options 2 Duress
Enable All Areas All On .......................................................91 ABC Key and Duress Report Routing............................... 114
First Area to Open/Last Area to Close ................................91 Duress Reporting Options ................................................ 114
Make Area 1 Common Area................................................91 DX2010
Authority Level Configuration Address Programming ........................................................ 57
Option 1...............................................................................98 Auxiliary Output Connections ............................................. 56
Option 10...........................................................................102 Data Bus Connections ........................................................ 55
Option 11...........................................................................103 Installation........................................................................... 54
Option 12...........................................................................103 Overview ............................................................................. 44
Option 13...........................................................................104 Sensor Loop (Zone) Connections....................................... 57
Option 14...........................................................................104 Status LED.......................................................................... 58
Option 15...........................................................................105 Tamper Input Connections ................................................. 56
Option 2...............................................................................98 DX3010
Option 3...............................................................................99 Address Programming ........................................................ 61
Option 4...............................................................................99 Configuration....................................................................... 59
Option 5.............................................................................100 Data Bus Connections ........................................................ 60
Option 6.............................................................................100 Installation........................................................................... 60
Option 7.............................................................................101 Overview ............................................................................. 44
Option 8.............................................................................101 Relay Outputs ..................................................................... 59
Option 9.............................................................................102 DX3020................................................................................... 44
Auto Arming for Bank/Safe/Vault Applications......................161
DX4010 Extend Handshake.............................................................. 77
Address Programming.........................................................66 Log Supervision Configuration............................................ 81
Baud Rate Configuration ...................................................149 System Inactive Interval...................................................... 80
Configuration Jumpers ........................................................66 System Inactive Options ..................................................... 81
Data Bus Connections.........................................................65 System Status Report Swinger Count ................................ 79
DB9 Connector....................................................................66 System Status Reports Routing.......................................... 80
Installation ...........................................................................64 Global Zone Configuration
Output Configuration .........................................................148 Alarm Event Abort Window ............................................... 134
Overview .............................................................................44 Bypass, Swinger Shunt, Sensor Trbl Rpt Options ............ 133
Parity, Flow Control, Stop Bit Configuration......................149 Bypass/Force Arm Report Routing ................................... 132
Remote Programming Direct Connection ...........................65 EOL Resistor Value for On-board Locations 2 to 8 .......... 131
Supervision..........................................................................66 Sensor Monitor Time......................................................... 133
DX4010 Output Options Swinger Count for Alarm Output....................................... 132
GSP Format ......................................................................148 Swinger Count for Zone Reports ...................................... 133
Log Format ........................................................................148 Zone Response Options ................................................... 131
DX8010 Zone Trouble, Restoral from Trouble Report Routing ...... 134
Access Options .................................................................150 Ground Start ........................................................................... 49
E H
EMI/Lightning Transient Suppression .....................................42 History Log ........................................................................... 180
Enable AC Fail Trouble Tone................................................150 Standard Features .............................................................. 42
Enable Ground Fault Display & Trouble Tone ......................150 I
Enclosure
Compatible Enclosures .......................................................41 Installer Menu
Enclosure Housing ..............................................................41 Battery Test......................................................................... 68
Enclosures.........................................................................162 Bell Test .............................................................................. 68
Environmental Specifications..................................................41 Exiting ................................................................................. 70
External Power Supply............................................................46 Keypad Program ................................................................. 70
Output Test ......................................................................... 68
F Programming Key (PK32) ................................................... 70
Factory Default......................................................................156 RF Menu ............................................................................. 68
Fire Applications ...................................................................161 Strobe Test ......................................................................... 68
Fire System Power Formula ...................................................47 Test Report ......................................................................... 68
G Zone Status......................................................................... 68
Installer Mode
Global Open/Close Options Entering............................................................................... 67
Arming Options 1.................................................................90 Installer Switch
Arming Options 2.................................................................91 Momentary Closure....................................................... 67, 70
Bypass/Force Arm Limit ......................................................91 Installer Switch/Daylight Savings Options
Entry Delay Time 1 (2) ........................................................94 Auto Adjust for Daylight Savings ........................................ 89
Exit Delay Time 1 (2)...........................................................95 Keypad Prog Enabled ......................................................... 89
Exit Time Restart.................................................................93 PK32 Enabled ..................................................................... 89
Open/Close Reporting Options ...........................................92 Installers Keypad ................................................................... 67
Opening/Closing Report Routing.........................................93
Perimeter Only Mode Delay Time .......................................94 K
Global Output Configuration Keyfob Options
Alarm Output Arming Beep Volume ..................................136 Assign O Key .................................................................... 156
Bell Time ...........................................................................135 Assign P Key..................................................................... 156
Global Output Options.......................................................135 Panic Enabled................................................................... 155
Siren Warble Frequency....................................................136 Keypad Options
Strobe Output Type Options..............................................136 Beep Keypad on System Trouble ..................................... 110
Global Output Options Don't Show Zone Status ................................................... 111
Enable Alarm Output Arming Beep ...................................135 Enable Area Display ......................................................... 111
Enable Strobe Arming Flash .............................................135 Enable Exit Tone............................................................... 110
Output 2 Supervised..........................................................135 Keypads
Send Output Set/Reset Reports........................................135 Address Programming ........................................................ 62
Global Reporting Options DS7445i LED Keypad ......................................................... 44
AC Fail/Low Battery Report Options ...................................79 DS7446i Keypad ............................................................... 111
AC Power Supervision Options ...........................................78 DS7447i LCD Keypad......................................................... 44
Ack Wait Time .....................................................................78 Enable Keypad Tamper Response............................. 23, 115
Auto On Pre-Alert Time .......................................................82 Entering Account Numbers from the Keypad ..................... 96
Burg Alarm After 2 Failed Attempts.....................................77 Entering Phone Numbers ................................................... 72
Call for Service Interval .......................................................80 Installation........................................................................... 62
Call for Service Options.......................................................81 Keypad # Area .................................................................. 111
Cancel Event Enabled.........................................................82 Keypad # Options ............................................................. 110
Date Format ........................................................................83 Keypad Program ................................................................. 70
Delay Alarm Output .............................................................77 Overview ............................................................................. 62
Enable PIN Trouble .............................................................83 Programming from the Keypad..................................... 94, 95
Enable Reporting.................................................................77 Specifications...................................................................... 42
Keyswitch DTMF/Pulse Dialing ............................................................ 73
Arming/Disarming................................................................63 Phone Line Fault Response Options .................................. 75
Installation ...........................................................................63 Remote Prog Call Back Number......................................... 74
Keyswitch Zone Function Options.....................................126 RPS Answer Ring Count .................................................... 75
Maintained Keyswitch..........................................................63 PIN Configuration, Installer PIN
Momentary Keyswitch .........................................................63 Installer PIN ...................................................................... 106
Operation.............................................................................63 PIN Length ........................................................................ 105
Overview .............................................................................63 User Tamper Lockout Time .............................................. 106
Programming.......................................................................63 User Tamper Options........................................................ 105
Silencing Alarms..................................................................63 User Tamper Retry Count................................................. 106
Standard Features...............................................................42 Power
L AC Power Failure................................................................ 46
Alarm Power ....................................................................... 47
LED Auxiliary Power ................................................................... 46
DX2010 Status LED ............................................................58 Continuous Power Output................................................... 47
Listings and Approvals....................................................43, 161 External Power Supply ....................................................... 46
Locations Fire System Power Formula ............................................... 47
Location ##, Area ..............................................................119 Power Outputs .................................................................... 41
Location ##, Zone Function...............................................118 Power Supply...................................................................... 46
Location ##, Zone Number................................................120 Primary (AC) Power Circuit................................................. 46
Quick Start...........................................................................24 Secondary (DC) Power ....................................................... 46
Sample Location Scenario ..................................................28 Power Outputs........................................................................ 46
M Primary Voltage ...................................................................... 41
Miscellaneous Ground Fault Display & Trouble Tone Programming
Enable Ground Fault Display & Trouble Tone ..................150 Factory Default.................................................................. 156
Miscellaneous System Trouble Options Programming Parameters................................................... 71
Enable AC Fail Trouble Tone ............................................150 Programming Key (PK32)
Momentary Closure...........................................................67, 70 Enable/Disable Use of ........................................................ 89
Installer Menu Selection ..................................................... 70
O
Overview ............................................................................. 44
O/C Reporting Options Programming Options
Closing Reports Enabled.....................................................92 Daylight Savings Time Options........................................... 89
Exit Error .............................................................................92 Programming Options ......................................................... 89
Opening Reports Enabled ...................................................92 Remote Programming Options ........................................... 88
Recent Closing ....................................................................92
Q
On-board Loop Response Time..............................................54
Option Bus Quick Arm......................................................................... 98, 99
Address Quick Reference .................................................164 Quick Start................................................................................ 5
Device Configuration .........................................................147 R
Device Overview .................................................................63 Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number................... 14
Specifications ......................................................................41 Remote Programming Options
Optional Compatible Equipment ...........................................161 Enable Remote Programming ............................................ 88
Other Features........................................................................43 Enable Remote Programming Callback.............................. 88
Outputs Terminate Remote Programming ....................................... 88
Area, Output # ...................................................................137 Remote Programming Software (DS-RPS) ............................ 44
Base ..................................................................................142 Reporting Enable, Trouble Response Options
Function.............................................................................138 Alarm & Trouble Reports Enabled .................................... 128
Global Output Configuration..............................................135 Restoral Reports Enabled................................................. 128
Mode .................................................................................141 Trouble Response on Open.............................................. 128
Multiplier ............................................................................142 Trouble Response on Short.............................................. 128
Off-board .............................................................................59 Reporting Format for Destinations 1 (2) ................................. 13
On-board .............................................................................58 Reserved Addresses .............................................................. 11
One Shot Modes .........................................................35, 143 RF Detection Devices
Programming.......................................................................47 Adding RF ID Codes ........................................................... 68
Pulse Modes................................................................35, 143 RF Keyfob
Standard Features...............................................................42 Keyfob Receiver Assignment Options .............................. 155
Steady and Toggle Modes ..........................................35, 143 RF Keyfob Options............................................................ 155
P RF3332 Overview ............................................................... 44
Panel Events and Reporting Formats ...................................167 RF3334 Overview ............................................................... 44
Panel Feature Comparison .....................................................41 RF Keypad
Phone Line Fault Options RF Keypad # Area ............................................................ 154
Burg Alarm & Strobe Functions...........................................76 RF Keypad # Options........................................................ 154
Enable Supervision .............................................................76 RF Receiver
Phone Numbers for Destinations 1 (2)....................................13 Premises RF Receiver Options ........................................ 147
Phone, Auto-Forward and RPS Configuration Premises RF Receiver, Supervision Interval .................... 147
Answering Machine Bypass ................................................75 RF Jam Detect Level ........................................................ 148
Call Forwarding Auto On Digits ...........................................73 RF3224 Overview ............................................................... 44
RF Receiver Options Text Entry Parameters
Receiver 1 Connected.......................................................147 ABC Key Text ................................................................... 151
Receiver 2 Connected.......................................................147 Area Name Text................................................................ 152
RF Transmitters and Zone States.........................................117 Call for Service Text.......................................................... 151
Routing Destinations Location Text .................................................................... 153
Alternate Communication Path............................................72 System Text ...................................................................... 151
Entering Phone Numbers from the Keypad ........................72 Troubleshooting.................................................................... 159
Format for Destination 1 (2) ................................................72 U
Phone Number 1 (2) for Destination 1 (2) ...........................71
Routing Option Tables ..........................................................165 User Tamper Options
User Tamper Activates Burg Alarm Output ...................... 106
S User Tamper Reports Enabled ......................................... 106
Sample Location Scenario ......................................................28 Users
Secondary Voltage..................................................................41 Area Option....................................................................... 109
Sensor Loops Authority Level .................................................................. 108
Doubled Zone Configuration ...............................................54 PIN .................................................................................... 107
Off-board, Description of .....................................................54 Standard Features .............................................................. 42
On-board Loop Response Time ..........................................54 V
On-board, Description of .....................................................52
Single Zone Configuration (Loops 2-8) ...............................53 View/Remove RF ID Codes ................................................... 69
SIA Control Panel Standard....................................................43 Voice Verification.................................................................. 126
Skeds Voltage
Assign (Area or Output), Sked # .......................................145 Minimum Operating Voltage ............................................... 41
Days Option 1, Sked # ......................................................146 Voltage Input....................................................................... 41
Time, Sked # .....................................................................145 W
Specifications..........................................................................41 Wiring
Standard Features Control Terminal Wiring ...................................................... 50
Panel Features ....................................................................41 Ground Start ....................................................................... 49
System Chart ........................................................................163 RJ31X Wiring ........................................................................ 9
System Options.......................................................................44 RJ38X Wiring ........................................................................ 9
System Test Options
Z
Send Test Report ................................................................84
Test Battery .........................................................................84 Zone Function Configuration
Test Bell ..............................................................................84 Alarm Report Routing ....................................................... 129
Test Strobe..........................................................................84 Keyswitch Zone Function Options .................................... 126
On-board Loop Response Time ....................................... 124
T
Reporting Enable, Trouble Response Options ................. 128
Telephone Restoral Report Routing ................................................... 130
Called Party Disconnect ......................................................48 Zone Function Options 1 .................................................. 125
Communication Failure .......................................................48 Zone Function Options 2 .................................................. 127
Connections ........................................................................48 Zone Function Type .......................................................... 121
Dialing Format .....................................................................48 Zone Function Options 1
Entering Phone Numbers ....................................................72 Enable Alarm Event Abort ................................................ 125
Ground Start........................................................................49 Perimeter Only Mode Arming ........................................... 126
Notification...........................................................................48 Sensor Trouble Monitor .................................................... 126
Phone Line Fault .................................................................48 Voice Verification .............................................................. 126
Registration .........................................................................48 Zone Function Options 2
RJ31X Wiring ........................................................................9 Alarm Output..................................................................... 127
RJ38X Wiring ........................................................................9 Bypassed/Force Armed .................................................... 127
Tests Cross Zone ....................................................................... 127
Automatic Test Report Interval............................................87 Swinger Shunt................................................................... 127
Automatic Test Report Options ...........................................86 Zone Response Options
Automatic Test Report Time................................................86 Smart Swinger .................................................................. 131
System Test Configuration Options.....................................83 Unverified Events Send Trouble Reports ......................... 131
System Test Enable Options...............................................84 Zones
Test Report..........................................................................68 24-hour Zone .................................................................... 121
Test Report Routing ............................................................87 Cross Zone ....................................................................... 127
Testing RF Devices .............................................................69 Global Zone Configuration ................................................ 131
Walk Test Configuration Options.........................................85 Standard Features .............................................................. 42
Walk Test Enable Options...................................................85 Zone.................................................................................. 121
Walk Test Start/End Rpt Routing ........................................86 Zone Function Configuration ............................................ 121
Detection Systems, Inc., 130 Perinton Parkway, 6/02

Fairport, New York, USA 14450-9199 Copyright 2002 Detection Systems, Inc.
(585) 223-4060 (800) 289-0096 Fax: (585) 223-9180 DS7240/DS7220 Reference Guide
P/N: 49720D Page 186 of 186

49720D DS7240-DS7220 Ref Guide PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

49720D DS7240-DS7220 Ref Guide PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Reference Guide for the DS7240/DS7220

Armed Armed Perimeter

Status Status Supervisory

Fire Fire Trouble 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Keypad Quick Reference Guide

Earth Ground AUXILIARY

Figure 1: Basic Panel Wiring Connections

If you think that EMI may be a problem, use shielded

Figure 4: Installer Switch

Figure 7: RJ38X Wiring

Com L-2 L-3 Installer Switch

Figure 9: System Status LED AUXILIARY

System Status LED Operation

Adr: 0231 D=0 Display for Address 0231.

Adr: 0231 D=0 Press [8] to change Data Digit

Figure 15: Sample Programming Entry

Complete programming instructions begin on page 71.

5.1 Routing Destination, Phone and RPS Configurations

5.1.4 Remote Programming Call Back Phone Number

5.2 Area Configurations

Account # for Routing Account # for Routing Default Account #

DS7240 3 Address 0320-0325 Address 0330-0335 10, 10, 10, 10, 0, 0

5.3.2 User Tamper Options

See User Tamper Options on page 105 for more information.

5.3.4 User Tamper Lockout Time

5.3.5 Installer PIN

Table 4: User Configuration Addresses

Users 2-32 Default User 1 Default

5.4.3 Authority Level Configuration

User 2-32 Default User 1 Default

5.5 Keypad Configuration

See Keypad # Options on page 110 for more information.

Keypads 2-8 Default Keypad 1 Default

DS7220 Default DS7240 Default

5.6.2 Alarm Response for ABC Keys

5.6.4 ABC Key Reports, Acknowledgement Beep at Keypad Options

5.6.6 ABC Keys and Duress Report Routing

Data Digit Entry Option

Table 7: DS7240/DS7220 Location Config Parameters

Table 8: Location Configuration Parameters, DS7240 only

Locations 9-40 Default Locations 1-8 Default

Location # Zone Function Type Default

Locations 1-40 Default

Off-Board Locations Off-Board Locations, DS7240 only

See the Sample Location Scenario on page 28 for more information.

Location # Device Zone Area Zone # 1 2 3 4 5

Enter 2 at Address 0746 for DX2010 without zone doubling.

Location # Device Zone Area Zone # 1 2 3 4 5

Enter 11 at Address 0747 for Entry/Exit Delay 1 Zone Function Type.

Enter 2 at Address 0748 to assign Location 9 to Area 2.

Change the Zone Number from 09 to 01 for Location 9.

Digit 1 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 2

Table 10: DS7240/DS7220 Output Config Parameters

Digit 1 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 2

Table 11: Output Configuration Parameters, DS7240 only

See Table 12 for descriptions of each Output Function type.

Digit 1 Digit 2 Function Type/Description

Mode Mode Description

Base On Time Multiplier Off Time Tolerance

Base Multiplier On Time Tolerance

Assign Time Days Days

5.10.2 Assign (Area or Output), Sked #

Data Selection Default Data Selection Default